From: Harlan Stenn Date: Thu, 7 Mar 2019 11:59:40 +0000 (+0000) Subject: NTP_4_2_8P13 X-Git-Url: http://git.ipfire.org/cgi-bin/gitweb.cgi?a=commitdiff_plain;h=b9fe79642a4f471fb9c7fbf68daa09a74c5a58f2;p=thirdparty%2Fntp.git NTP_4_2_8P13 bk: 5c8107acQkUZiirtg7buhX8gZdvTfA --- diff --git a/ChangeLog b/ChangeLog index 242a7a46c..9ff845c81 100644 --- a/ChangeLog +++ b/ChangeLog @@ -1,6 +1,9 @@ --- -(4.2.8p13) +(4.2.8p13) 2019/03/07 Released by Harlan Stenn +* [Sec 3565] Crafted null dereference attack in authenticated + mode 6 packet + - reported by Magnus Stubman * [Bug 3560] Fix build when HAVE_DROPROOT is not defined - applied patch by Ian Lepore * [Bug 3558] Crash and integer size bug diff --git a/NEWS b/NEWS index 8dc0f0f72..5cae9372a 100644 --- a/NEWS +++ b/NEWS @@ -1,8 +1,60 @@ +--- +NTP 4.2.8p13 (Harlan Stenn , 2019 Mar 07) + +Focus: Security, Bug fixes, enhancements. + +Severity: MEDIUM + +This release fixes a bug that allows an attacker with access to an +explicitly trusted source to send a crafted malicious mode 6 (ntpq) +packet that can trigger a NULL pointer dereference, crashing ntpd. +It also provides 17 other bugfixes and 1 other improvement: + +* [Sec 3565] Crafted null dereference attack in authenticated + mode 6 packet + - reported by Magnus Stubman +* [Bug 3560] Fix build when HAVE_DROPROOT is not defined + - applied patch by Ian Lepore +* [Bug 3558] Crash and integer size bug + - isolate and fix linux/windows specific code issue +* [Bug 3556] ntp_loopfilter.c snprintf compilation warnings + - provide better function for incremental string formatting +* [Bug 3555] Tidy up print alignment of debug output from ntpdate + - applied patch by Gerry Garvey +* [Bug 3554] config revoke stores incorrect value + - original finding by Gerry Garvey, additional cleanup needed +* [Bug 3549] Spurious initgroups() error message + - patch by Christous Zoulas +* [Bug 3548] Signature not verified on windows system + - finding by Chen Jiabin, plus another one by me +* [Bug 3541] patch to fix STA_NANO struct timex units + - applied patch by Maciej Szmigiero +* [Bug 3540] Cannot set minsane to 0 anymore + - applied patch by Andre Charbonneau +* [Bug 3539] work_fork build fails when droproot is not supported + - applied patch by Baruch Siach +* [Bug 3538] Build fails for no-MMU targets + - applied patch by Baruch Siach +* [Bug 3535] libparse won't handle GPS week rollover + - refactored handling of GPS era based on 'tos basedate' for + parse (TSIP) and JUPITER clocks +* [Bug 3529] Build failures on Mac OS X 10.13 (High Sierra) + - patch by Daniel J. Luke; this does not fix a potential linker + regression issue on MacOS. +* [Bug 3527 - Backward Incompatible] mode7 clockinfo fudgeval2 packet + anomaly , reported by GGarvey. + - --enable-bug3527-fix support by HStenn +* [Bug 3526] Incorrect poll interval in packet + - applied patch by Gerry Garvey +* [Bug 3471] Check for openssl/[ch]mac.h. + - added missing check, reported by Reinhard Max +* [Bug 1674] runtime crashes and sync problems affecting both x86 and x86_64 + - this is a variant of [bug 3558] and should be fixed with it +* Implement 'configure --disable-signalled-io' + -- NTP 4.2.8p12 (Harlan Stenn , 2018/14/09) -NOTE: this NEWS file will be undergoing more revisions. - Focus: Security, Bug fixes, enhancements. Severity: MEDIUM diff --git a/build b/build index 15fe39afa..f6dca6b35 100755 --- a/build +++ b/build @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ esac case "$NTP_BDIR" in '') case "$IAM" in - *.ntp.org) + *.ntp.org | *.ntfo.org) NTP_BDIR=host ;; *.udel.edu) diff --git a/ntpd/invoke-ntp.conf.texi b/ntpd/invoke-ntp.conf.texi index 7e675877e..132709eec 100644 --- a/ntpd/invoke-ntp.conf.texi +++ b/ntpd/invoke-ntp.conf.texi @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ # # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (invoke-ntp.conf.texi) # -# It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:29:07 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 +# It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:56:39 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 # From the definitions ntp.conf.def # and the template file agtexi-file.tpl @end ignore diff --git a/ntpd/invoke-ntp.keys.texi b/ntpd/invoke-ntp.keys.texi index a1f1e9520..9698c5480 100644 --- a/ntpd/invoke-ntp.keys.texi +++ b/ntpd/invoke-ntp.keys.texi @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ # # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (invoke-ntp.keys.texi) # -# It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:29:10 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 +# It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:56:41 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 # From the definitions ntp.keys.def # and the template file agtexi-file.tpl @end ignore diff --git a/ntpd/invoke-ntpd.texi b/ntpd/invoke-ntpd.texi index b50529401..16dce2180 100644 --- a/ntpd/invoke-ntpd.texi +++ b/ntpd/invoke-ntpd.texi @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ # # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (invoke-ntpd.texi) # -# It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:29:12 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 +# It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:56:42 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 # From the definitions ntpd-opts.def # and the template file agtexi-cmd.tpl @end ignore @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ with a status code of 0. @exampleindent 0 @example -ntpd - NTP daemon program - Ver. 4.2.8p12 +ntpd - NTP daemon program - Ver. 4.2.8p13 Usage: ntpd [ - [] | --[@{=| @}] ]... \ [ ... ] Flg Arg Option-Name Description @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Usage: ntpd [ - [] | --[@{=| @}] ]... \ -g no panicgate Allow the first adjustment to be Big - may appear multiple times -G no force-step-once Step any initial offset correction. - -i Str jaildir Jail directory + -i --- jaildir built without --enable-clockctl or --enable-linuxcaps or --enable-solarisprivs -I Str interface Listen on an interface name or address - may appear multiple times -k Str keyfile path to symmetric keys @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Usage: ntpd [ - [] | --[@{=| @}] ]... \ -s Str statsdir Statistics file location -t Str trustedkey Trusted key number - may appear multiple times - -u Str user Run as userid (or userid:groupid) + -u --- user built without --enable-clockctl or --enable-linuxcaps or --enable-solarisprivs -U Num updateinterval interval in seconds between scans for new or dropped interfaces Str var make ARG an ntp variable (RW) - may appear multiple times diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.conf.5man b/ntpd/ntp.conf.5man index e1f061cfe..50ae14f0e 100644 --- a/ntpd/ntp.conf.5man +++ b/ntpd/ntp.conf.5man @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH ntp.conf 5man "14 Aug 2018" "4.2.8p12" "File Formats" +.TH ntp.conf 5man "20 Feb 2019" "4.2.8p13" "File Formats" .\" -.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-2caiQA/ag-bdaaPA) +.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:28:54 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:56:43 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 .\" From the definitions ntp.conf.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.conf.5mdoc b/ntpd/ntp.conf.5mdoc index d31c6b761..7d133286e 100644 --- a/ntpd/ntp.conf.5mdoc +++ b/ntpd/ntp.conf.5mdoc @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd August 14 2018 +.Dd February 20 2019 .Dt NTP_CONF 5mdoc File Formats .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntp.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:29:15 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:56:34 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 .\" From the definitions ntp.conf.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.conf.html b/ntpd/ntp.conf.html index 5439ff7a7..e19e32642 100644 --- a/ntpd/ntp.conf.html +++ b/ntpd/ntp.conf.html @@ -1,128 +1,168 @@ - + + + -NTP Configuration File User's Manual - - - - - - - + +NTP Configuration File User’s Manual + + + + + + + + + + + - -

NTP Configuration File User's Manual

-
-

-Next: , -Previous: (dir), -Up: (dir) -
-
-

NTP's Configuration File User Manual

+ +

NTP Configuration File User’s Manual

-

This document describes the configuration file for the NTP Project's -ntpd program. -

This document applies to version 4.2.8p12 of ntp.conf. -

-

Short Contents

- + + + +
+

+Next: , Previous: , Up: (dir)  

+ +

NTP’s Configuration File User Manual

-
    -
  • ntp.conf Description -
  • ntp.conf Notes +

    This document describes the configuration file for the NTP Project’s +ntpd program. +

    +

    This document applies to version 4.2.8p13 of ntp.conf. +

    + +

    Short Table of Contents

    + +
    + - -
    -

    -Previous: Top, -Up: Top -
    - -

    Description

    + + + + +
    • ntp.conf Description:   +
    • ntp.conf Notes:   +
    + +
    + +
    +

    +Previous: , Up: Top  

    +
    + +

    1 Description

    The behavior of ntpd can be changed by a configuration file, by default ntp.conf. +

    + + +
    • ntp.conf Notes:   +
    -
    -

    +
    -
    +
    +

    +Previous: , Up: ntp.conf Description  

    + +

    1.1 Notes about ntp.conf

    + + -

    Notes about ntp.conf

    -

    -

    The +

    The ntp.conf configuration file is read at initial startup by the ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) daemon in order to specify the synchronization sources, -modes and other related information. +modes and other related information. Usually, it is installed in the -/etc +/etc directory, but could be installed elsewhere -(see the daemon's +(see the daemon’s -c command line option). - -

    The file format is similar to other -unix -configuration files. +

    +

    The file format is similar to other +UNIX +configuration files. Comments begin with a -# +‘#’ character and extend to the end of the line; -blank lines are ignored. +blank lines are ignored. Configuration commands consist of an initial keyword followed by a list of arguments, -some of which may be optional, separated by whitespace. -Commands may not be continued over multiple lines. +some of which may be optional, separated by whitespace. +Commands may not be continued over multiple lines. Arguments may be host names, host addresses written in numeric, dotted-quad form, integers, floating point numbers (when specifying times in seconds) and text strings. - -

    The rest of this page describes the configuration and control options. +

    +

    The rest of this page describes the configuration and control options. The -"Notes on Configuring NTP and Setting up an NTP Subnet" +"Notes on Configuring NTP and Setting up an NTP Subnet" page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp) -contains an extended discussion of these options. +/usr/share/doc/ntp) +contains an extended discussion of these options. In addition to the discussion of general -Configuration Options, +‘Configuration Options’, there are sections describing the following supported functionality and the options used to control it: -

    - -

    Following these is a section describing -Miscellaneous Options. +

    + +

    Following these is a section describing +Miscellaneous Options. While there is a rich set of options available, the only required option is one or more pool, @@ -131,42 +171,66 @@ the only required option is one or more broadcast or manycastclient -commands. -

    -

    +commands. +

    + + + + + + + + + + + +
    • Configuration Support:   +
    • Authentication Support:   +
    • Monitoring Support:   +
    • Access Control Support:   +
    • Automatic NTP Configuration Options:   +
    • Reference Clock Support:   +
    • Miscellaneous Options:   +
    • ntp.conf Files:   +
    • ntp.conf See Also:   +
    • ntp.conf Bugs:   +
    • :   +
    + +
    -
    +
    +

    +Next: , Up: ntp.conf Notes  

    - -

    Configuration Support

    - + +

    1.1.1 Configuration Support

    Following is a description of the configuration commands in -NTPv4. +NTPv4. These commands have the same basic functions as in NTPv3 and -in some cases new functions and new arguments. +in some cases new functions and new arguments. There are two classes of commands, configuration commands that configure a persistent association with a remote server or peer or reference clock, and auxiliary commands that specify environmental variables that control various related operations. - -

    Configuration Commands
    - +

    +

    1.1.1.1 Configuration Commands

    The various modes are determined by the command keyword and the -type of the required IP address. +type of the required IP address. Addresses are classed by type as (s) a remote server or peer (IPv4 class A, B and C), (b) the broadcast address of a local interface, (m) a multicast address (IPv4 -class D), or (r) a reference clock address (127.127.x.x). +class D), or (r) a reference clock address (127.127.x.x). Note that -only those options applicable to each command are listed below. +only those options applicable to each command are listed below. Use of options not listed may not be caught as an error, but may result in some weird and even destructive behavior. - -

    If the Basic Socket Interface Extensions for IPv6 (RFC-2553) +

    +

    If the Basic Socket Interface Extensions for IPv6 (RFC-2553) is detected, support for the IPv6 address family is generated -in addition to the default support of the IPv4 address family. +in addition to the default support of the IPv4 address family. In a few cases, including the reslist billboard generated @@ -174,84 +238,96 @@ by ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) or ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc), -IPv6 addresses are automatically generated. +IPv6 addresses are automatically generated. IPv6 addresses can be identified by the presence of colons -: -in the address field. +“:” +in the address field. IPv6 addresses can be used almost everywhere where IPv4 addresses can be used, with the exception of reference clock addresses, which are always IPv4. - -

    Note that in contexts where a host name is expected, a +

    +

    Note that in contexts where a host name is expected, a -4 qualifier preceding the host name forces DNS resolution to the IPv4 namespace, while a -6 -qualifier forces DNS resolution to the IPv6 namespace. +qualifier forces DNS resolution to the IPv6 namespace. See IPv6 references for the equivalent classes for that address family. -

    -
    pool address [burst] [iburst] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [maxpoll maxpoll]
    server address [key key | autokey] [burst] [iburst] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [maxpoll maxpoll] [true]
    peer address [key key | autokey] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [maxpoll maxpoll] [true] [xleave]
    broadcast address [key key | autokey] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [ttl ttl] [xleave]
    manycastclient address [key key | autokey] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [maxpoll maxpoll] [ttl ttl]
    +

    +
    pool address [burst] [iburst] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [maxpoll maxpoll]
    +
    server address [key key | autokey] [burst] [iburst] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [maxpoll maxpoll] [true]
    +
    peer address [key key | autokey] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [maxpoll maxpoll] [true] [xleave]
    +
    broadcast address [key key | autokey] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [ttl ttl] [xleave]
    +
    manycastclient address [key key | autokey] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [maxpoll maxpoll] [ttl ttl]
    +
    -

    These five commands specify the time server name or address to -be used and the mode in which to operate. +

    These five commands specify the time server name or address to +be used and the mode in which to operate. The address can be -either a DNS name or an IP address in dotted-quad notation. +either a DNS name or an IP address in dotted-quad notation. Additional information on association behavior can be found in the -"Association Management" +"Association Management" page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp). -

    -
    pool
    For type s addresses, this command mobilizes a persistent -client mode association with a number of remote servers. +/usr/share/doc/ntp). +

    +
    pool
    +

    For type s addresses, this command mobilizes a persistent +client mode association with a number of remote servers. In this mode the local clock can synchronized to the remote server, but the remote server can never be synchronized to -the local clock. -

    server
    For type s and r addresses, this command mobilizes a persistent +the local clock. +

    +
    server
    +

    For type s and r addresses, this command mobilizes a persistent client mode association with the specified remote server or local -radio clock. +radio clock. In this mode the local clock can synchronized to the remote server, but the remote server can never be synchronized to -the local clock. +the local clock. This command should not be used for type -b or m addresses. -

    peer
    For type s addresses (only), this command mobilizes a +b or m addresses. +

    +
    peer
    +

    For type s addresses (only), this command mobilizes a persistent symmetric-active mode association with the specified -remote peer. +remote peer. In this mode the local clock can be synchronized to the remote peer or the remote peer can be synchronized to the local -clock. +clock. This is useful in a network of servers where, depending on various failure scenarios, either the local or remote peer may be -the better source of time. +the better source of time. This command should NOT be used for type -b, m or r addresses. -

    broadcast
    For type b and m addresses (only), this -command mobilizes a persistent broadcast mode association. +b, m or r addresses. +

    +
    broadcast
    +

    For type b and m addresses (only), this +command mobilizes a persistent broadcast mode association. Multiple commands can be used to specify multiple local broadcast interfaces -(subnets) and/or multiple multicast groups. +(subnets) and/or multiple multicast groups. Note that local broadcast messages go only to the interface associated with the -subnet specified, but multicast messages go to all interfaces. +subnet specified, but multicast messages go to all interfaces. In broadcast mode the local server sends periodic broadcast messages to a client population at the address specified, which is usually the broadcast address on (one of) the -local network(s) or a multicast address assigned to NTP. +local network(s) or a multicast address assigned to NTP. The IANA has assigned the multicast group address IPv4 224.0.1.1 and IPv6 ff05::101 (site local) exclusively to NTP, but other nonconflicting addresses can be used to contain the -messages within administrative boundaries. +messages within administrative boundaries. Ordinarily, this specification applies only to the local server operating as a sender; for operation as a broadcast client, see the @@ -259,65 +335,73 @@ sender; for operation as a broadcast client, see the or multicastclient commands -below. -

    manycastclient
    For type m addresses (only), this command mobilizes a +below. +

    +
    manycastclient
    +

    For type m addresses (only), this command mobilizes a manycast client mode association for the multicast address -specified. +specified. In this case a specific address must be supplied which matches the address used on the manycastserver command for -the designated manycast servers. +the designated manycast servers. The NTP multicast address 224.0.1.1 assigned by the IANA should NOT be used, unless specific means are taken to avoid spraying large areas of the Internet with these messages and causing a possibly massive implosion of replies -at the sender. +at the sender. The manycastserver command specifies that the local server is to operate in client mode with the remote servers that are -discovered as the result of broadcast/multicast messages. +discovered as the result of broadcast/multicast messages. The client broadcasts a request message to the group address associated with the specified address and specifically enabled -servers respond to these messages. +servers respond to these messages. The client selects the servers providing the best time and continues as with the server -command. +command. The remaining servers are discarded as if never -heard. +heard. +

    -

    Options: -

    -
    autokey
    All packets sent to and received from the server or peer are to +

    Options: +

    +
    autokey
    +

    All packets sent to and received from the server or peer are to include authentication fields encrypted using the autokey scheme described in -Authentication Options. -

    burst
    when the server is reachable, send a burst of eight packets -instead of the usual one. +‘Authentication Options’. +

    +
    burst
    +

    when the server is reachable, send a burst of eight packets +instead of the usual one. The packet spacing is normally 2 s; however, the spacing between the first and second packets can be changed with the calldelay command to allow -additional time for a modem or ISDN call to complete. +additional time for a modem or ISDN call to complete. This is designed to improve timekeeping quality with the server -command and s addresses. -

    iburst
    When the server is unreachable, send a burst of eight packets -instead of the usual one. +command and s addresses. +

    +
    iburst
    +

    When the server is unreachable, send a burst of eight packets +instead of the usual one. The packet spacing is normally 2 s; however, the spacing between the first two packets can be changed with the calldelay command to allow -additional time for a modem or ISDN call to complete. +additional time for a modem or ISDN call to complete. This is designed to speed the initial synchronization acquisition with the server @@ -325,167 +409,196 @@ command and s addresses and when ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) is started with the -q -option. -

    key key
    All packets sent to and received from the server or peer are to +option. +

    +
    key key
    +

    All packets sent to and received from the server or peer are to include authentication fields encrypted using the specified key -identifier with values from 1 to 65535, inclusive. +identifier with values from 1 to 65535, inclusive. The -default is to include no encryption field. -

    minpoll minpoll
    maxpoll maxpoll
    These options specify the minimum and maximum poll intervals +default is to include no encryption field. +

    +
    minpoll minpoll
    +
    maxpoll maxpoll
    +

    These options specify the minimum and maximum poll intervals for NTP messages, as a power of 2 in seconds The maximum poll interval defaults to 10 (1,024 s), but can be increased by the maxpoll -option to an upper limit of 17 (36.4 h). +option to an upper limit of 17 (36.4 h). The minimum poll interval defaults to 6 (64 s), but can be decreased by the minpoll -option to a lower limit of 4 (16 s). -

    noselect
    Marks the server as unused, except for display purposes. -The server is discarded by the selection algroithm. -
    preempt
    Says the association can be preempted. -
    true
    Marks the server as a truechimer. -Use this option only for testing. -
    prefer
    Marks the server as preferred. +option to a lower limit of 4 (16 s). +

    +
    noselect
    +

    Marks the server as unused, except for display purposes. +The server is discarded by the selection algroithm. +

    +
    preempt
    +

    Says the association can be preempted. +

    +
    true
    +

    Marks the server as a truechimer. +Use this option only for testing. +

    +
    prefer
    +

    Marks the server as preferred. All other things being equal, this host will be chosen for synchronization among a set of -correctly operating hosts. +correctly operating hosts. See the -"Mitigation Rules and the prefer Keyword" +"Mitigation Rules and the prefer Keyword" page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp) -for further information. -

    true
    Forces the association to always survive the selection and clustering algorithms. +/usr/share/doc/ntp) +for further information. +

    +
    true
    +

    Forces the association to always survive the selection and clustering algorithms. This option should almost certainly only -be used while testing an association. -

    ttl ttl
    This option is used only with broadcast server and manycast -client modes. +be used while testing an association. +

    +
    ttl ttl
    +

    This option is used only with broadcast server and manycast +client modes. It specifies the time-to-live ttl to use on broadcast server and multicast server and the maximum ttl for the expanding ring search with manycast -client packets. +client packets. Selection of the proper value, which defaults to 127, is something of a black art and should be coordinated with the -network administrator. -

    version version
    Specifies the version number to be used for outgoing NTP -packets. +network administrator. +

    +
    version version
    +

    Specifies the version number to be used for outgoing NTP +packets. Versions 1-4 are the choices, with version 4 the -default. -

    xleave
    Valid in +default. +

    +
    xleave
    +

    Valid in peer and broadcast -modes only, this flag enables interleave mode. +modes only, this flag enables interleave mode. +

    - -
    Auxiliary Commands
    - -
    -
    broadcastclient
    This command enables reception of broadcast server messages to -any local interface (type b) address. + +

    1.1.1.2 Auxiliary Commands

    +
    +
    broadcastclient
    +

    This command enables reception of broadcast server messages to +any local interface (type b) address. Upon receiving a message for the first time, the broadcast client measures the nominal server propagation delay using a brief client/server exchange with the server, then enters the broadcast client mode, in which it -synchronizes to succeeding broadcast messages. +synchronizes to succeeding broadcast messages. Note that, in order to avoid accidental or malicious disruption in this mode, both the server and client should operate using symmetric-key or public-key authentication as described in -Authentication Options. -

    manycastserver address ...
    This command enables reception of manycast client messages to -the multicast group address(es) (type m) specified. +‘Authentication Options’. +

    +
    manycastserver address ...
    +

    This command enables reception of manycast client messages to +the multicast group address(es) (type m) specified. At least one address is required, but the NTP multicast address 224.0.1.1 assigned by the IANA should NOT be used, unless specific means are taken to limit the span of the reply and avoid a possibly massive -implosion at the original sender. +implosion at the original sender. Note that, in order to avoid accidental or malicious disruption in this mode, both the server and client should operate using symmetric-key or public-key authentication as described in -Authentication Options. -

    multicastclient address ...
    This command enables reception of multicast server messages to -the multicast group address(es) (type m) specified. +‘Authentication Options’. +

    +
    multicastclient address ...
    +

    This command enables reception of multicast server messages to +the multicast group address(es) (type m) specified. Upon receiving a message for the first time, the multicast client measures the nominal server propagation delay using a brief client/server exchange with the server, then enters the broadcast client mode, in -which it synchronizes to succeeding multicast messages. +which it synchronizes to succeeding multicast messages. Note that, in order to avoid accidental or malicious disruption in this mode, both the server and client should operate using symmetric-key or public-key authentication as described in -Authentication Options. -

    mdnstries number
    If we are participating in mDNS, +‘Authentication Options’. +

    +
    mdnstries number
    +

    If we are participating in mDNS, after we have synched for the first time -we attempt to register with the mDNS system. +we attempt to register with the mDNS system. If that registration attempt fails, we try again at one minute intervals for up to mdnstries -times. +times. After all, ntpd -may be starting before mDNS. +may be starting before mDNS. The default value for mdnstries -is 5. +is 5. +

    -
    -

    +
    -
    +
    +

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp.conf Notes  

    - -

    Authentication Support

    - + +

    1.1.2 Authentication Support

    Authentication support allows the NTP client to verify that the server is in fact known and trusted and not an intruder intending -accidentally or on purpose to masquerade as that server. +accidentally or on purpose to masquerade as that server. The NTPv3 specification RFC-1305 defines a scheme which provides -cryptographic authentication of received NTP packets. +cryptographic authentication of received NTP packets. Originally, this was done using the Data Encryption Standard (DES) algorithm operating in Cipher Block Chaining (CBC) mode, commonly called -DES-CBC. +DES-CBC. Subsequently, this was replaced by the RSA Message Digest -5 (MD5) algorithm using a private key, commonly called keyed-MD5. +5 (MD5) algorithm using a private key, commonly called keyed-MD5. Either algorithm computes a message digest, or one-way hash, which can be used to verify the server has the correct private key and key identifier. - -

    NTPv4 retains the NTPv3 scheme, properly described as symmetric key +

    +

    NTPv4 retains the NTPv3 scheme, properly described as symmetric key cryptography and, in addition, provides a new Autokey scheme -based on public key cryptography. +based on public key cryptography. Public key cryptography is generally considered more secure than symmetric key cryptography, since the security is based on a private value which is generated by each server and -never revealed. +never revealed. With Autokey all key distribution and management functions involve only public values, which -considerably simplifies key distribution and storage. +considerably simplifies key distribution and storage. Public key management is based on X.509 certificates, which can be provided by commercial services or produced by utility programs in the OpenSSL software library or the NTPv4 distribution. - -

    While the algorithms for symmetric key cryptography are +

    +

    While the algorithms for symmetric key cryptography are included in the NTPv4 distribution, public key cryptography requires the OpenSSL software library to be installed -before building the NTP distribution. +before building the NTP distribution. Directions for doing that are on the Building and Installing the Distribution page. - -

    Authentication is configured separately for each association +

    +

    Authentication is configured separately for each association using the key or @@ -497,36 +610,36 @@ subcommand on the and manycastclient configuration commands as described in -Configuration Options -page. +‘Configuration Options’ +page. The authentication options described below specify the locations of the key files, if other than default, which symmetric keys are trusted and the interval between various operations, if other than default. - -

    Authentication is always enabled, +

    +

    Authentication is always enabled, although ineffective if not configured as -described below. +described below. If a NTP packet arrives including a message authentication code (MAC), it is accepted only if it -passes all cryptographic checks. +passes all cryptographic checks. The checks require correct key ID, key value -and message digest. +and message digest. If the packet has been modified in any way or replayed by an intruder, it will fail one or more -of these checks and be discarded. +of these checks and be discarded. Furthermore, the Autokey scheme requires a preliminary protocol exchange to obtain the server certificate, verify its credentials and initialize the protocol - -

    The +

    +

    The auth flag controls whether new associations or -remote configuration commands require cryptographic authentication. +remote configuration commands require cryptographic authentication. This flag can be set or reset by the enable and @@ -535,22 +648,22 @@ commands and also by remote configuration commands sent by a ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) program running on -another machine. +another machine. If this flag is enabled, which is the default case, new broadcast client and symmetric passive associations and remote configuration commands must be cryptographically -authenticated using either symmetric key or public key cryptography. +authenticated using either symmetric key or public key cryptography. If this flag is disabled, these operations are effective even if not cryptographic -authenticated. +authenticated. It should be understood that operating with the auth flag disabled invites a significant vulnerability where a rogue hacker can masquerade as a falseticker and seriously -disrupt system timekeeping. +disrupt system timekeeping. It is important to note that this flag has no purpose other than to allow or disallow @@ -559,42 +672,41 @@ and symmetric active messages and remote configuration commands and, in particular, the flag has no effect on the authentication process itself. - -

    An attractive alternative where multicast support is available +

    +

    An attractive alternative where multicast support is available is manycast mode, in which clients periodically troll for servers as described in the Automatic NTP Configuration Options -page. +page. Either symmetric key or public key -cryptographic authentication can be used in this mode. +cryptographic authentication can be used in this mode. The principle advantage of manycast mode is that potential servers need not be configured in advance, since the client finds them during regular operation, and the configuration files for all clients can be identical. - -

    The security model and protocol schemes for +

    +

    The security model and protocol schemes for both symmetric key and public key cryptography are summarized below; further details are in the briefings, papers and reports at the NTP project page linked from http://www.ntp.org/. - -

    Symmetric-Key Cryptography
    - +

    +

    1.1.2.1 Symmetric-Key Cryptography

    The original RFC-1305 specification allows any one of possibly 65,535 keys, each distinguished by a 32-bit key identifier, to -authenticate an association. +authenticate an association. The servers and clients involved must agree on the key and key identifier to -authenticate NTP packets. +authenticate NTP packets. Keys and related information are specified in a key file, usually called -ntp.keys, +ntp.keys, which must be distributed and stored using -secure means beyond the scope of the NTP protocol itself. +secure means beyond the scope of the NTP protocol itself. Besides the keys used for ordinary NTP associations, additional keys can be used as passwords for the @@ -602,25 +714,25 @@ additional keys can be used as passwords for the and ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) utility programs. - -

    When +

    +

    When ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) is first started, it reads the key file specified in the keys configuration command and installs the keys -in the key cache. +in the key cache. However, individual keys must be activated with the trusted -command before use. +command before use. This allows, for instance, the installation of possibly several batches of keys and then activating or deactivating each batch remotely using -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc). +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc). This also provides a revocation capability that can be used -if a key becomes compromised. +if a key becomes compromised. The requestkey command selects the key used as the password for the @@ -630,121 +742,118 @@ utility, while the command selects the key used as the password for the ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) utility. - -

    Public Key Cryptography
    - +

    +

    1.1.2.2 Public Key Cryptography

    NTPv4 supports the original NTPv3 symmetric key scheme described in RFC-1305 and in addition the Autokey protocol, -which is based on public key cryptography. +which is based on public key cryptography. The Autokey Version 2 protocol described on the Autokey Protocol page verifies packet integrity using MD5 message digests and verifies the source with digital signatures and any of several -digest/signature schemes. +digest/signature schemes. Optional identity schemes described on the Identity Schemes page and based on cryptographic challenge/response algorithms -are also available. +are also available. Using all of these schemes provides strong security against replay with or without modification, spoofing, masquerade and most forms of clogging attacks. - -

    The Autokey protocol has several modes of operation -corresponding to the various NTP modes supported. +

    +

    The Autokey protocol has several modes of operation +corresponding to the various NTP modes supported. Most modes use a special cookie which can be computed independently by the client and server, -but encrypted in transmission. +but encrypted in transmission. All modes use in addition a variant of the S-KEY scheme, in which a pseudo-random key list is generated and used -in reverse order. +in reverse order. These schemes are described along with an executive summary, current status, briefing slides and reading list on the -Autonomous Authentication +‘Autonomous Authentication’ page. - -

    The specific cryptographic environment used by Autokey servers +

    +

    The specific cryptographic environment used by Autokey servers and clients is determined by a set of files and soft links generated by the ntp-keygen(1ntpkeygenmdoc) -program. +program. This includes a required host key file, required certificate file and optional sign key file, -leapsecond file and identity scheme files. +leapsecond file and identity scheme files. The digest/signature scheme is specified in the X.509 certificate -along with the matching sign key. +along with the matching sign key. There are several schemes available in the OpenSSL software library, each identified by a specific string such as md5WithRSAEncryption, which stands for the MD5 message digest with RSA -encryption scheme. +encryption scheme. The current NTP distribution supports all the schemes in the OpenSSL library, including those based on RSA and DSA digital signatures. - -

    NTP secure groups can be used to define cryptographic compartments -and security hierarchies. +

    +

    NTP secure groups can be used to define cryptographic compartments +and security hierarchies. It is important that every host in the group be able to construct a certificate trail to one -or more trusted hosts in the same group. +or more trusted hosts in the same group. Each group host runs the Autokey protocol to obtain the certificates -for all hosts along the trail to one or more trusted hosts. +for all hosts along the trail to one or more trusted hosts. This requires the configuration file in all hosts to be engineered so that, even under anticipated failure conditions, the NTP subnet will form such that every group host can find a trail to at least one trusted host. - -

    Naming and Addressing
    - +

    +

    1.1.2.3 Naming and Addressing

    It is important to note that Autokey does not use DNS to -resolve addresses, since DNS can't be completely trusted -until the name servers have synchronized clocks. +resolve addresses, since DNS can’t be completely trusted +until the name servers have synchronized clocks. The cryptographic name used by Autokey to bind the host identity credentials and cryptographic values must be independent -of interface, network and any other naming convention. +of interface, network and any other naming convention. The name appears in the host certificate in either or both the subject and issuer fields, so protection against DNS compromise is essential. - -

    By convention, the name of an Autokey host is the name returned +

    +

    By convention, the name of an Autokey host is the name returned by the Unix gethostname(2) -system call or equivalent in other systems. +system call or equivalent in other systems. By the system design -model, there are no provisions to allow alternate names or aliases. +model, there are no provisions to allow alternate names or aliases. However, this is not to say that DNS aliases, different names for each interface, etc., are constrained in any way. - -

    It is also important to note that Autokey verifies authenticity +

    +

    It is also important to note that Autokey verifies authenticity using the host name, network address and public keys, all of which are bound together by the protocol specifically -to deflect masquerade attacks. +to deflect masquerade attacks. For this reason Autokey includes the source and destination IP addresses in message digest computations and so the same addresses must be available -at both the server and client. +at both the server and client. For this reason operation -with network address translation schemes is not possible. +with network address translation schemes is not possible. This reflects the intended robust security model where government and corporate NTP servers are operated outside firewall perimeters. - -

    Operation
    - +

    +

    1.1.2.4 Operation

    A specific combination of authentication scheme (none, symmetric key, public key) and identity scheme is called -a cryptotype, although not all combinations are compatible. +a cryptotype, although not all combinations are compatible. There may be management configurations where the clients, -servers and peers may not all support the same cryptotypes. +servers and peers may not all support the same cryptotypes. A secure NTPv4 subnet can be configured in many ways while keeping in mind the principles explained above and -in this section. +in this section. Note however that some cryptotype combinations may successfully interoperate with each other, but may not represent good security practice. - -

    The cryptotype of an association is determined at the time +

    +

    The cryptotype of an association is determined at the time of mobilization, either at configuration time or some time -later when a message of appropriate cryptotype arrives. +later when a message of appropriate cryptotype arrives. When mobilized by a server or @@ -761,513 +870,609 @@ using the symmetric key ID specified; if the autokey subcommand is present, the association is authenticated using Autokey. - -

    When multiple identity schemes are supported in the Autokey -protocol, the first message exchange determines which one is used. +

    +

    When multiple identity schemes are supported in the Autokey +protocol, the first message exchange determines which one is used. The client request message contains bits corresponding -to which schemes it has available. +to which schemes it has available. The server response message -contains bits corresponding to which schemes it has available. +contains bits corresponding to which schemes it has available. Both server and client match the received bits with their own and select a common scheme. - -

    Following the principle that time is a public value, +

    +

    Following the principle that time is a public value, a server responds to any client packet that matches -its cryptotype capabilities. +its cryptotype capabilities. Thus, a server receiving an unauthenticated packet will respond with an unauthenticated packet, while the same server receiving a packet of a cryptotype -it supports will respond with packets of that cryptotype. +it supports will respond with packets of that cryptotype. However, unconfigured broadcast or manycast client associations or symmetric passive associations will not be mobilized unless the server supports a cryptotype compatible -with the first packet received. +with the first packet received. By default, unauthenticated associations will not be mobilized unless overridden in a decidedly dangerous way. - -

    Some examples may help to reduce confusion. -Client Alice has no specific cryptotype selected. -Server Bob has both a symmetric key file and minimal Autokey files. -Alice's unauthenticated messages arrive at Bob, who replies with -unauthenticated messages. -Cathy has a copy of Bob's symmetric -key file and has selected key ID 4 in messages to Bob. -Bob verifies the message with his key ID 4. -If it's the +

    +

    Some examples may help to reduce confusion. +Client Alice has no specific cryptotype selected. +Server Bob has both a symmetric key file and minimal Autokey files. +Alice’s unauthenticated messages arrive at Bob, who replies with +unauthenticated messages. +Cathy has a copy of Bob’s symmetric +key file and has selected key ID 4 in messages to Bob. +Bob verifies the message with his key ID 4. +If it’s the same key and the message is verified, Bob sends Cathy a reply -authenticated with that key. +authenticated with that key. If verification fails, Bob sends Cathy a thing called a crypto-NAK, which tells her -something broke. +something broke. She can see the evidence using the ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) program. - -

    Denise has rolled her own host key and certificate. -She also uses one of the identity schemes as Bob. +

    +

    Denise has rolled her own host key and certificate. +She also uses one of the identity schemes as Bob. She sends the first Autokey message to Bob and they -both dance the protocol authentication and identity steps. +both dance the protocol authentication and identity steps. If all comes out okay, Denise and Bob continue as described above. - -

    It should be clear from the above that Bob can support +

    +

    It should be clear from the above that Bob can support all the girls at the same time, as long as he has compatible -authentication and identity credentials. +authentication and identity credentials. Now, Bob can act just like the girls in his own choice of servers; he can run multiple configured associations with multiple different -servers (or the same server, although that might not be useful). +servers (or the same server, although that might not be useful). But, wise security policy might preclude some cryptotype combinations; for instance, running an identity scheme with one server and no authentication with another might not be wise. - -

    Key Management
    - +

    +

    1.1.2.5 Key Management

    The cryptographic values used by the Autokey protocol are incorporated as a set of files generated by the ntp-keygen(1ntpkeygenmdoc) utility program, including symmetric key, host key and public certificate files, as well as sign key, identity parameters -and leapseconds files. +and leapseconds files. Alternatively, host and sign keys and certificate files can be generated by the OpenSSL utilities and certificates can be imported from public certificate -authorities. +authorities. Note that symmetric keys are necessary for the ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) -utility programs. +utility programs. The remaining files are necessary only for the Autokey protocol. - -

    Certificates imported from OpenSSL or public certificate -authorities have certian limitations. +

    +

    Certificates imported from OpenSSL or public certificate +authorities have certian limitations. The certificate should be in ASN.1 syntax, X.509 Version 3 format and encoded in PEM, which is the same format -used by OpenSSL. +used by OpenSSL. The overall length of the certificate encoded -in ASN.1 must not exceed 1024 bytes. +in ASN.1 must not exceed 1024 bytes. The subject distinguished name field (CN) is the fully qualified name of the host -on which it is used; the remaining subject fields are ignored. +on which it is used; the remaining subject fields are ignored. The certificate extension fields must not contain either a subject key identifier or a issuer key identifier field; however, an extended key usage field for a trusted host must contain the value -trustRoot;. +trustRoot;. Other extension fields are ignored. - -

    Authentication Commands
    - -
    -
    autokey [logsec]
    Specifies the interval between regenerations of the session key -list used with the Autokey protocol. +

    +

    1.1.2.6 Authentication Commands

    +
    +
    autokey [logsec]
    +

    Specifies the interval between regenerations of the session key +list used with the Autokey protocol. Note that the size of the key list for each association depends on this interval and the current -poll interval. -The default value is 12 (4096 s or about 1.1 hours). +poll interval. +The default value is 12 (4096 s or about 1.1 hours). For poll intervals above the specified interval, a session key list with a single entry will be regenerated for every message -sent. -

    controlkey key
    Specifies the key identifier to use with the +sent. +

    +
    controlkey key
    +

    Specifies the key identifier to use with the ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) utility, which uses the standard -protocol defined in RFC-1305. +protocol defined in RFC-1305. The key argument is the key identifier for a trusted key, where the value can be in the -range 1 to 65,535, inclusive. -

    crypto [cert file] [leap file] [randfile file] [host file] [sign file] [gq file] [gqpar file] [iffpar file] [mvpar file] [pw password]
    This command requires the OpenSSL library. +range 1 to 65,535, inclusive. +

    +
    crypto [cert file] [leap file] [randfile file] [host file] [sign file] [gq file] [gqpar file] [iffpar file] [mvpar file] [pw password]
    +

    This command requires the OpenSSL library. It activates public key cryptography, selects the message digest and signature encryption scheme and loads the required private and public -values described above. +values described above. If one or more files are left unspecified, -the default names are used as described above. +the default names are used as described above. Unless the complete path and name of the file are specified, the location of a file is relative to the keys directory specified in the keysdir command or default -/usr/local/etc. +/usr/local/etc. Following are the subcommands: -

    -
    cert file
    Specifies the location of the required host public certificate file. +

    +
    cert file
    +

    Specifies the location of the required host public certificate file. This overrides the link -ntpkey_cert_hostname -in the keys directory. -

    gqpar file
    Specifies the location of the optional GQ parameters file. +ntpkey_cert_hostname +in the keys directory. +

    +
    gqpar file
    +

    Specifies the location of the optional GQ parameters file. This overrides the link -ntpkey_gq_hostname -in the keys directory. -

    host file
    Specifies the location of the required host key file. +ntpkey_gq_hostname +in the keys directory. +

    +
    host file
    +

    Specifies the location of the required host key file. This overrides the link -ntpkey_key_hostname -in the keys directory. -

    iffpar file
    Specifies the location of the optional IFF parameters file. +ntpkey_key_hostname +in the keys directory. +

    +
    iffpar file
    +

    Specifies the location of the optional IFF parameters file. This overrides the link -ntpkey_iff_hostname -in the keys directory. -

    leap file
    Specifies the location of the optional leapsecond file. +ntpkey_iff_hostname +in the keys directory. +

    +
    leap file
    +

    Specifies the location of the optional leapsecond file. This overrides the link -ntpkey_leap -in the keys directory. -

    mvpar file
    Specifies the location of the optional MV parameters file. +ntpkey_leap +in the keys directory. +

    +
    mvpar file
    +

    Specifies the location of the optional MV parameters file. This overrides the link -ntpkey_mv_hostname -in the keys directory. -

    pw password
    Specifies the password to decrypt files containing private keys and -identity parameters. +ntpkey_mv_hostname +in the keys directory. +

    +
    pw password
    +

    Specifies the password to decrypt files containing private keys and +identity parameters. This is required only if these files have been -encrypted. -

    randfile file
    Specifies the location of the random seed file used by the OpenSSL -library. -The defaults are described in the main text above. -
    sign file
    Specifies the location of the optional sign key file. +encrypted. +

    +
    randfile file
    +

    Specifies the location of the random seed file used by the OpenSSL +library. +The defaults are described in the main text above. +

    +
    sign file
    +

    Specifies the location of the optional sign key file. This overrides the link -ntpkey_sign_hostname -in the keys directory. +ntpkey_sign_hostname +in the keys directory. If this file is -not found, the host key is also the sign key. +not found, the host key is also the sign key. +

    -
    keys keyfile
    Specifies the complete path and location of the MD5 key file +
    +
    keys keyfile
    +

    Specifies the complete path and location of the MD5 key file containing the keys and key identifiers used by ntpd(1ntpdmdoc), ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) -when operating with symmetric key cryptography. +when operating with symmetric key cryptography. This is the same operation as the -k -command line option. -

    keysdir path
    This command specifies the default directory path for -cryptographic keys, parameters and certificates. +command line option. +

    +
    keysdir path
    +

    This command specifies the default directory path for +cryptographic keys, parameters and certificates. The default is -/usr/local/etc/. -

    requestkey key
    Specifies the key identifier to use with the +/usr/local/etc/. +

    +
    requestkey key
    +

    Specifies the key identifier to use with the ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) utility program, which uses a proprietary protocol specific to this implementation of -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc). +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc). The key argument is a key identifier for the trusted key, where the value can be in the range 1 to -65,535, inclusive. -

    revoke logsec
    Specifies the interval between re-randomization of certain +65,535, inclusive. +

    +
    revoke logsec
    +

    Specifies the interval between re-randomization of certain cryptographic values used by the Autokey scheme, as a power of 2 in -seconds. +seconds. These values need to be updated frequently in order to deflect brute-force attacks on the algorithms of the scheme; -however, updating some values is a relatively expensive operation. -The default interval is 16 (65,536 s or about 18 hours). +however, updating some values is a relatively expensive operation. +The default interval is 16 (65,536 s or about 18 hours). For poll intervals above the specified interval, the values will be updated -for every message sent. -

    trustedkey key ...
    Specifies the key identifiers which are trusted for the +for every message sent. +

    +
    trustedkey key ...
    +

    Specifies the key identifiers which are trusted for the purposes of authenticating peers with symmetric key cryptography, as well as keys used by the ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) -programs. +programs. The authentication procedures require that both the local and remote servers share the same key and key identifier for this purpose, although different keys can be used with different -servers. +servers. The key arguments are 32-bit unsigned -integers with values from 1 to 65,535. +integers with values from 1 to 65,535. +

    - -
    Error Codes
    - + +

    1.1.2.7 Error Codes

    The following error codes are reported via the NTP control and monitoring protocol trap mechanism. -

    -
    101
    (bad field format or length) -The packet has invalid version, length or format. -
    102
    (bad timestamp) -The packet timestamp is the same or older than the most recent received. -This could be due to a replay or a server clock time step. -
    103
    (bad filestamp) -The packet filestamp is the same or older than the most recent received. -This could be due to a replay or a key file generation error. -
    104
    (bad or missing public key) -The public key is missing, has incorrect format or is an unsupported type. -
    105
    (unsupported digest type) -The server requires an unsupported digest/signature scheme. -
    106
    (mismatched digest types) -Not used. -
    107
    (bad signature length) -The signature length does not match the current public key. -
    108
    (signature not verified) -The message fails the signature check. +

    +
    101
    +

    (bad field format or length) +The packet has invalid version, length or format. +

    +
    102
    +

    (bad timestamp) +The packet timestamp is the same or older than the most recent received. +This could be due to a replay or a server clock time step. +

    +
    103
    +

    (bad filestamp) +The packet filestamp is the same or older than the most recent received. +This could be due to a replay or a key file generation error. +

    +
    104
    +

    (bad or missing public key) +The public key is missing, has incorrect format or is an unsupported type. +

    +
    105
    +

    (unsupported digest type) +The server requires an unsupported digest/signature scheme. +

    +
    106
    +

    (mismatched digest types) +Not used. +

    +
    107
    +

    (bad signature length) +The signature length does not match the current public key. +

    +
    108
    +

    (signature not verified) +The message fails the signature check. It could be bogus or signed by a -different private key. -

    109
    (certificate not verified) -The certificate is invalid or signed with the wrong key. -
    110
    (certificate not verified) +different private key. +

    +
    109
    +

    (certificate not verified) +The certificate is invalid or signed with the wrong key. +

    +
    110
    +

    (certificate not verified) The certificate is not yet valid or has expired or the signature could not -be verified. -

    111
    (bad or missing cookie) -The cookie is missing, corrupted or bogus. -
    112
    (bad or missing leapseconds table) -The leapseconds table is missing, corrupted or bogus. -
    113
    (bad or missing certificate) -The certificate is missing, corrupted or bogus. -
    114
    (bad or missing identity) -The identity key is missing, corrupt or bogus. +be verified. +

    +
    111
    +

    (bad or missing cookie) +The cookie is missing, corrupted or bogus. +

    +
    112
    +

    (bad or missing leapseconds table) +The leapseconds table is missing, corrupted or bogus. +

    +
    113
    +

    (bad or missing certificate) +The certificate is missing, corrupted or bogus. +

    +
    114
    +

    (bad or missing identity) +The identity key is missing, corrupt or bogus. +

    -
    -

    +
    -
    +
    +

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp.conf Notes  

    - -

    Monitoring Support

    - + +

    1.1.3 Monitoring Support

    ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) includes a comprehensive monitoring facility suitable for continuous, long term recording of server and client -timekeeping performance. +timekeeping performance. See the statistics command below for a listing and example of each type of statistics currently -supported. +supported. Statistic files are managed using file generation sets and scripts in the -./scripts -directory of the source code distribution. +./scripts +directory of the source code distribution. Using these facilities and -unix +UNIX cron(8) jobs, the data can be automatically summarized and archived for retrospective analysis. - -

    Monitoring Commands
    - -
    -
    statistics name ...
    Enables writing of statistics records. +

    +

    1.1.3.1 Monitoring Commands

    +
    +
    statistics name ...
    +

    Enables writing of statistics records. Currently, eight kinds of name statistics are supported. -

    -
    clockstats
    Enables recording of clock driver statistics information. +

    +
    clockstats
    +

    Enables recording of clock driver statistics information. Each update received from a clock driver appends a line of the following form to the file generation set named clockstats: -

              
-          49213 525.624 127.127.4.1 93 226 00:08:29.606 D
-
    - -

    The first two fields show the date (Modified Julian Day) and time -(seconds and fraction past UTC midnight). +

    49213 525.624 127.127.4.1 93 226 00:08:29.606 D
+
    +

    The first two fields show the date (Modified Julian Day) and time +(seconds and fraction past UTC midnight). The next field shows the -clock address in dotted-quad notation. +clock address in dotted-quad notation. The final field shows the last timecode received from the clock in decoded ASCII format, where -meaningful. +meaningful. In some clock drivers a good deal of additional information -can be gathered and displayed as well. +can be gathered and displayed as well. See information specific to each -clock for further details. -

    cryptostats
    This option requires the OpenSSL cryptographic software library. +clock for further details. +

    +
    cryptostats
    +

    This option requires the OpenSSL cryptographic software library. It -enables recording of cryptographic public key protocol information. +enables recording of cryptographic public key protocol information. Each message received by the protocol module appends a line of the following form to the file generation set named cryptostats: -

              
-          49213 525.624 127.127.4.1 message
-
    - -

    The first two fields show the date (Modified Julian Day) and time -(seconds and fraction past UTC midnight). +

    49213 525.624 127.127.4.1 message
+
    +

    The first two fields show the date (Modified Julian Day) and time +(seconds and fraction past UTC midnight). The next field shows the peer address in dotted-quad notation, The final message field includes the -message type and certain ancillary information. +message type and certain ancillary information. See the -Authentication Options -section for further information. -

    loopstats
    Enables recording of loop filter statistics information. +‘Authentication Options’ +section for further information. +

    +
    loopstats
    +

    Enables recording of loop filter statistics information. Each update of the local clock outputs a line of the following form to the file generation set named loopstats: -

              
-          50935 75440.031 0.000006019 13.778190 0.000351733 0.0133806
-
    - -

    The first two fields show the date (Modified Julian Day) and -time (seconds and fraction past UTC midnight). +

    50935 75440.031 0.000006019 13.778190 0.000351733 0.0133806
+
    +

    The first two fields show the date (Modified Julian Day) and +time (seconds and fraction past UTC midnight). The next five fields show time offset (seconds), frequency offset (parts per million - PPM), RMS jitter (seconds), Allan deviation (PPM) and clock -discipline time constant. -

    peerstats
    Enables recording of peer statistics information. +discipline time constant. +

    +
    peerstats
    +

    Enables recording of peer statistics information. This includes statistics records of all peers of a NTP server and of special -signals, where present and configured. +signals, where present and configured. Each valid update appends a line of the following form to the current element of a file generation set named peerstats: -

              
-          48773 10847.650 127.127.4.1 9714 -0.001605376 0.000000000 0.001424877 0.000958674
-
    - -

    The first two fields show the date (Modified Julian Day) and -time (seconds and fraction past UTC midnight). +

    48773 10847.650 127.127.4.1 9714 -0.001605376 0.000000000 0.001424877 0.000958674
+
    +

    The first two fields show the date (Modified Julian Day) and +time (seconds and fraction past UTC midnight). The next two fields show the peer address in dotted-quad notation and status, -respectively. +respectively. The status field is encoded in hex in the format -described in Appendix A of the NTP specification RFC 1305. +described in Appendix A of the NTP specification RFC 1305. The final four fields show the offset, -delay, dispersion and RMS jitter, all in seconds. -

    rawstats
    Enables recording of raw-timestamp statistics information. +delay, dispersion and RMS jitter, all in seconds. +

    +
    rawstats
    +

    Enables recording of raw-timestamp statistics information. This includes statistics records of all peers of a NTP server and of -special signals, where present and configured. +special signals, where present and configured. Each NTP message received from a peer or clock driver appends a line of the following form to the file generation set named rawstats: -

              
-          50928 2132.543 128.4.1.1 128.4.1.20 3102453281.584327000 3102453281.58622800031 02453332.540806000 3102453332.541458000
-
    - -

    The first two fields show the date (Modified Julian Day) and -time (seconds and fraction past UTC midnight). +

    50928 2132.543 128.4.1.1 128.4.1.20 3102453281.584327000 3102453281.58622800031 02453332.540806000 3102453332.541458000
+
    +

    The first two fields show the date (Modified Julian Day) and +time (seconds and fraction past UTC midnight). The next two fields show the remote peer or clock address followed by the local address -in dotted-quad notation. +in dotted-quad notation. The final four fields show the originate, -receive, transmit and final NTP timestamps in order. +receive, transmit and final NTP timestamps in order. The timestamp values are as received and before processing by the various data -smoothing and mitigation algorithms. -

    sysstats
    Enables recording of ntpd statistics counters on a periodic basis. +smoothing and mitigation algorithms. +

    +
    sysstats
    +

    Enables recording of ntpd statistics counters on a periodic basis. Each hour a line of the following form is appended to the file generation set named sysstats: -

              
-          50928 2132.543 36000 81965 0 9546 56 71793 512 540 10 147
-
    - -

    The first two fields show the date (Modified Julian Day) and time -(seconds and fraction past UTC midnight). +

    50928 2132.543 36000 81965 0 9546 56 71793 512 540 10 147
+
    +

    The first two fields show the date (Modified Julian Day) and time +(seconds and fraction past UTC midnight). The remaining ten fields show the statistics counter values accumulated since the last generated line. -

    -
    Time since restart 36000
    Time in hours since the system was last rebooted. -
    Packets received 81965
    Total number of packets received. -
    Packets processed 0
    Number of packets received in response to previous packets sent -
    Current version 9546
    Number of packets matching the current NTP version. -
    Previous version 56
    Number of packets matching the previous NTP version. -
    Bad version 71793
    Number of packets matching neither NTP version. -
    Access denied 512
    Number of packets denied access for any reason. -
    Bad length or format 540
    Number of packets with invalid length, format or port number. -
    Bad authentication 10
    Number of packets not verified as authentic. -
    Rate exceeded 147
    Number of packets discarded due to rate limitation. +

    +
    Time since restart 36000
    +

    Time in hours since the system was last rebooted. +

    +
    Packets received 81965
    +

    Total number of packets received. +

    +
    Packets processed 0
    +

    Number of packets received in response to previous packets sent +

    +
    Current version 9546
    +

    Number of packets matching the current NTP version. +

    +
    Previous version 56
    +

    Number of packets matching the previous NTP version. +

    +
    Bad version 71793
    +

    Number of packets matching neither NTP version. +

    +
    Access denied 512
    +

    Number of packets denied access for any reason. +

    +
    Bad length or format 540
    +

    Number of packets with invalid length, format or port number. +

    +
    Bad authentication 10
    +

    Number of packets not verified as authentic. +

    +
    Rate exceeded 147
    +

    Number of packets discarded due to rate limitation. +

    -
    statsdir directory_path
    Indicates the full path of a directory where statistics files -should be created (see below). +
    +
    statsdir directory_path
    +

    Indicates the full path of a directory where statistics files +should be created (see below). This keyword allows the (otherwise constant) filegen filename prefix to be modified for file generation sets, which -is useful for handling statistics logs. -

    filegen name [file filename] [type typename] [link | nolink] [enable | disable]
    Configures setting of generation file set name. +is useful for handling statistics logs. +

    +
    filegen name [file filename] [type typename] [link | nolink] [enable | disable]
    +

    Configures setting of generation file set name. Generation file sets provide a means for handling files that are -continuously growing during the lifetime of a server. -Server statistics are a typical example for such files. +continuously growing during the lifetime of a server. +Server statistics are a typical example for such files. Generation file sets provide access to a set of files used -to store the actual data. +to store the actual data. At any time at most one element -of the set is being written to. +of the set is being written to. The type given specifies -when and how data will be directed to a new element of the set. +when and how data will be directed to a new element of the set. This way, information stored in elements of a file set that are currently unused are available for administrational -operations without the risk of disturbing the operation of ntpd. +operations without the risk of disturbing the operation of ntpd. (Most important: they can be removed to free space for new data produced.) - -

    Note that this command can be sent from the +

    +

    Note that this command can be sent from the ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) program running at a remote location. -

    -
    name
    This is the type of the statistics records, as shown in the +

    +
    name
    +

    This is the type of the statistics records, as shown in the statistics -command. -

    file filename
    This is the file name for the statistics records. +command. +

    +
    file filename
    +

    This is the file name for the statistics records. Filenames of set members are built from three concatenated elements prefix, filename and suffix: -

    -
    prefix
    This is a constant filename path. +

    +
    prefix
    +

    This is a constant filename path. It is not subject to modifications via the filegen -option. +option. It is defined by the -server, usually specified as a compile-time constant. +server, usually specified as a compile-time constant. It may, however, be configurable for individual file generation sets -via other commands. +via other commands. For example, the prefix used with loopstats and peerstats generation can be configured using the statsdir -option explained above. -

    filename
    This string is directly concatenated to the prefix mentioned +option explained above. +

    +
    filename
    +

    This string is directly concatenated to the prefix mentioned above (no intervening -/). +‘/’). This can be modified using the file argument to the filegen -statement. +statement. No -.. +.. elements are allowed in this component to prevent filenames referring to parts outside the filesystem hierarchy denoted by -prefix. -

    suffix
    This part is reflects individual elements of a file set. +prefix. +

    +
    suffix
    +

    This part is reflects individual elements of a file set. It is -generated according to the type of a file set. +generated according to the type of a file set. +

    -
    type typename
    A file generation set is characterized by its type. +
    +
    type typename
    +

    A file generation set is characterized by its type. The following types are supported: -

    -
    none
    The file set is actually a single plain file. -
    pid
    One element of file set is used per incarnation of a ntpd -server. +

    +
    none
    +

    The file set is actually a single plain file. +

    +
    pid
    +

    One element of file set is used per incarnation of a ntpd +server. This type does not perform any changes to file set members during runtime, however it provides an easy way of separating files belonging to different ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) -server incarnations. +server incarnations. The set member filename is built by appending a -. +‘.’ to concatenated prefix and @@ -1275,399 +1480,445 @@ and strings, and appending the decimal representation of the process ID of the ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) -server process. -

    day
    One file generation set element is created per day. +server process. +

    +
    day
    +

    One file generation set element is created per day. A day is -defined as the period between 00:00 and 24:00 UTC. +defined as the period between 00:00 and 24:00 UTC. The file set member suffix consists of a -. +‘.’ and a day specification in the form -YYYYMMdd. +YYYYMMdd. YYYY -is a 4-digit year number (e.g., 1992). +is a 4-digit year number (e.g., 1992). MM -is a two digit month number. +is a two digit month number. dd -is a two digit day number. +is a two digit day number. Thus, all information written at 10 December 1992 would end up in a file named prefix -filename.19921210. -

    week
    Any file set member contains data related to a certain week of -a year. +filename.19921210. +

    +
    week
    +

    Any file set member contains data related to a certain week of +a year. The term week is defined by computing day-of-year -modulo 7. +modulo 7. Elements of such a file generation set are distinguished by appending the following suffix to the file set filename base: A dot, a 4-digit year number, the letter W, -and a 2-digit week number. +and a 2-digit week number. For example, information from January, 10th 1992 would end up in a file with suffix -.No . Ns Ar 1992W1 . -

    month
    One generation file set element is generated per month. +.No . Ns Ar 1992W1 . +

    +
    month
    +

    One generation file set element is generated per month. The file name suffix consists of a dot, a 4-digit year number, and -a 2-digit month. -

    year
    One generation file element is generated per year. +a 2-digit month. +

    +
    year
    +

    One generation file element is generated per year. The filename -suffix consists of a dot and a 4 digit year number. -

    age
    This type of file generation sets changes to a new element of -the file set every 24 hours of server operation. +suffix consists of a dot and a 4 digit year number. +

    +
    age
    +

    This type of file generation sets changes to a new element of +the file set every 24 hours of server operation. The filename suffix consists of a dot, the letter a, -and an 8-digit number. +and an 8-digit number. This number is taken to be the number of seconds the server is -running at the start of the corresponding 24-hour period. +running at the start of the corresponding 24-hour period. Information is only written to a file generation by specifying enable; output is prevented by specifying -disable. +disable. +

    -
    link | nolink
    It is convenient to be able to access the current element of a file -generation set by a fixed name. +
    +
    link | nolink
    +

    It is convenient to be able to access the current element of a file +generation set by a fixed name. This feature is enabled by specifying link and disabled using -nolink. +nolink. If link is specified, a hard link from the current file set element to a file without -suffix is created. +suffix is created. When there is already a file with this name and the number of links of this file is one, it is renamed appending a dot, the letter C, and the pid of the ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) -server process. +server process. When the -number of links is greater than one, the file is unlinked. +number of links is greater than one, the file is unlinked. This -allows the current file to be accessed by a constant name. -

    enable | disable
    Enables or disables the recording function. +allows the current file to be accessed by a constant name. +

    +
    enable | disable
    +

    Enables or disables the recording function. +

    +
    +
    +
    +
    -
    -
    -
    -

    +
    -
    +
    +

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp.conf Notes  

    - -

    Access Control Support

    - + +

    1.1.4 Access Control Support

    The ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) daemon implements a general purpose address/mask based restriction -list. +list. The list contains address/match entries sorted first -by increasing address values and and then by increasing mask values. +by increasing address values and and then by increasing mask values. A match occurs when the bitwise AND of the mask and the packet source address is equal to the bitwise AND of the mask and -address in the list. +address in the list. The list is searched in order with the last match found defining the restriction flags associated -with the entry. +with the entry. Additional information and examples can be found in the -"Notes on Configuring NTP and Setting up a NTP Subnet" +"Notes on Configuring NTP and Setting up a NTP Subnet" page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp). - -

    The restriction facility was implemented in conformance +/usr/share/doc/ntp). +

    +

    The restriction facility was implemented in conformance with the access policies for the original NSFnet backbone -time servers. +time servers. Later the facility was expanded to deflect -cryptographic and clogging attacks. +cryptographic and clogging attacks. While this facility may be useful for keeping unwanted or broken or malicious clients from congesting innocent servers, it should not be considered -an alternative to the NTP authentication facilities. +an alternative to the NTP authentication facilities. Source address based restrictions are easily circumvented by a determined cracker. - -

    Clients can be denied service because they are explicitly +

    +

    Clients can be denied service because they are explicitly included in the restrict list created by the restrict command or implicitly as the result of cryptographic or rate limit -violations. +violations. Cryptographic violations include certificate or identity verification failure; rate limit violations generally result from defective NTP implementations that send packets -at abusive rates. +at abusive rates. Some violations cause denied service only for the offending packet, others cause denied service for a timed period and others cause the denied service for -an indefinite period. +an indefinite period. When a client or network is denied access for an indefinite period, the only way at present to remove the restrictions is by restarting the server. - -

    The Kiss-of-Death Packet
    - +

    +

    1.1.4.1 The Kiss-of-Death Packet

    Ordinarily, packets denied service are simply dropped with no -further action except incrementing statistics counters. +further action except incrementing statistics counters. Sometimes a more proactive response is needed, such as a server message that explicitly requests the client to stop sending and leave a message -for the system operator. +for the system operator. A special packet format has been created -for this purpose called the "kiss-of-death" (KoD) packet. +for this purpose called the "kiss-of-death" (KoD) packet. KoD packets have the leap bits set unsynchronized and stratum set to zero and the reference identifier field set to a four-byte -ASCII code. +ASCII code. If the noserve or notrust flag of the matching restrict list entry is set, -the code is "DENY"; if the +the code is "DENY"; if the limited flag is set and the rate limit -is exceeded, the code is "RATE". -Finally, if a cryptographic violation occurs, the code is "CRYP". - -

    A client receiving a KoD performs a set of sanity checks to +is exceeded, the code is "RATE". +Finally, if a cryptographic violation occurs, the code is "CRYP". +

    +

    A client receiving a KoD performs a set of sanity checks to minimize security exposure, then updates the stratum and reference identifier peer variables, sets the access denied (TEST4) bit in the peer flash variable and sends -a message to the log. +a message to the log. As long as the TEST4 bit is set, -the client will send no further packets to the server. +the client will send no further packets to the server. The only way at present to recover from this condition is -to restart the protocol at both the client and server. +to restart the protocol at both the client and server. This -happens automatically at the client when the association times out. +happens automatically at the client when the association times out. It will happen at the server only if the server operator cooperates. - -

    Access Control Commands
    - -
    -
    discard [average avg] [minimum min] [monitor prob]
    Set the parameters of the +

    +

    1.1.4.2 Access Control Commands

    +
    +
    discard [average avg] [minimum min] [monitor prob]
    +

    Set the parameters of the limited facility which protects the server from -client abuse. +client abuse. The average subcommand specifies the minimum average packet spacing, while the minimum -subcommand specifies the minimum packet spacing. +subcommand specifies the minimum packet spacing. Packets that violate these minima are discarded -and a kiss-o'-death packet returned if enabled. +and a kiss-o’-death packet returned if enabled. The default -minimum average and minimum are 5 and 2, respectively. +minimum average and minimum are 5 and 2, respectively. The monitor subcommand specifies the probability of discard -for packets that overflow the rate-control window. -

    restrict address [mask mask] [ippeerlimit int] [flag ...]
    The +for packets that overflow the rate-control window. +

    +
    restrict address [mask mask] [ippeerlimit int] [flag ...]
    +

    The address argument expressed in -dotted-quad form is the address of a host or network. +dotted-quad form is the address of a host or network. Alternatively, the address -argument can be a valid host DNS name. +argument can be a valid host DNS name. The mask argument expressed in dotted-quad form defaults to 255.255.255.255, meaning that the address -is treated as the address of an individual host. +is treated as the address of an individual host. A default entry (address 0.0.0.0, mask 0.0.0.0) -is always included and is always the first entry in the list. +is always included and is always the first entry in the list. Note that text string default, with no mask option, may -be used to indicate the default entry. +be used to indicate the default entry. The ippeerlimit directive limits the number of peer requests for each IP to int, -where a value of -1 means "unlimited", the current default. -A value of 0 means "none". +where a value of -1 means "unlimited", the current default. +A value of 0 means "none". There would usually be at most 1 peering request per IP, but if the remote peering requests are behind a proxy -there could well be more than 1 per IP. +there could well be more than 1 per IP. In the current implementation, flag always restricts access, i.e., an entry with no flags indicates that free -access to the server is to be given. +access to the server is to be given. The flags are not orthogonal, in that more restrictive flags will often make less restrictive -ones redundant. +ones redundant. The flags can generally be classed into two categories, those which restrict time service and those which restrict informational queries and attempts to do run-time -reconfiguration of the server. +reconfiguration of the server. One or more of the following flags may be specified: -

    -
    ignore
    Deny packets of all kinds, including +

    +
    ignore
    +

    Deny packets of all kinds, including ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) -queries. -

    kod
    If this flag is set when an access violation occurs, a kiss-o'-death -(KoD) packet is sent. +queries. +

    +
    kod
    +

    If this flag is set when an access violation occurs, a kiss-o’-death +(KoD) packet is sent. KoD packets are rate limited to no more than one -per second. +per second. If another KoD packet occurs within one second after the -last one, the packet is dropped. -

    limited
    Deny service if the packet spacing violates the lower limits specified +last one, the packet is dropped. +

    +
    limited
    +

    Deny service if the packet spacing violates the lower limits specified in the discard -command. +command. A history of clients is kept using the monitoring capability of -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc). +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc). Thus, monitoring is always active as long as there is a restriction entry with the limited -flag. -

    lowpriotrap
    Declare traps set by matching hosts to be low priority. +flag. +

    +
    lowpriotrap
    +

    Declare traps set by matching hosts to be low priority. The number of traps a server can maintain is limited (the current limit -is 3). +is 3). Traps are usually assigned on a first come, first served -basis, with later trap requestors being denied service. +basis, with later trap requestors being denied service. This flag modifies the assignment algorithm by allowing low priority traps to -be overridden by later requests for normal priority traps. -

    noepeer
    Deny ephemeral peer requests, -even if they come from an authenticated source. +be overridden by later requests for normal priority traps. +

    +
    noepeer
    +

    Deny ephemeral peer requests, +even if they come from an authenticated source. Note that the ability to use a symmetric key for authentication may be restricted to one or more IPs or subnets via the third field of the -ntp.keys -file. +ntp.keys +file. This restriction is not enabled by default, -to maintain backward compatability. +to maintain backward compatability. Expect noepeer -to become the default in ntp-4.4. -

    nomodify
    Deny +to become the default in ntp-4.4. +

    +
    nomodify
    +

    Deny ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) queries which attempt to modify the state of the -server (i.e., run time reconfiguration). +server (i.e., run time reconfiguration). Queries which return -information are permitted. -

    noquery
    Deny +information are permitted. +

    +
    noquery
    +

    Deny ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) -queries. -Time service is not affected. -

    nopeer
    Deny unauthenticated packets which would result in mobilizing a new association. +queries. +Time service is not affected. +

    +
    nopeer
    +

    Deny unauthenticated packets which would result in mobilizing a new association. This includes broadcast and symmetric active packets -when a configured association does not exist. +when a configured association does not exist. It also includes pool -associations, so if you want to use servers from a +associations, so if you want to use servers from a pool directive and also want to use nopeer -by default, you'll want a +by default, you’ll want a restrict source ... line as well that does not include the nopeer -directive. -

    noserve
    Deny all packets except +directive. +

    +
    noserve
    +

    Deny all packets except ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) -queries. -

    notrap
    Decline to provide mode 6 control message trap service to matching -hosts. +queries. +

    +
    notrap
    +

    Decline to provide mode 6 control message trap service to matching +hosts. The trap service is a subsystem of the ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) control message -protocol which is intended for use by remote event logging programs. -

    notrust
    Deny service unless the packet is cryptographically authenticated. -
    ntpport
    This is actually a match algorithm modifier, rather than a -restriction flag. +protocol which is intended for use by remote event logging programs. +

    +
    notrust
    +

    Deny service unless the packet is cryptographically authenticated. +

    +
    ntpport
    +

    This is actually a match algorithm modifier, rather than a +restriction flag. Its presence causes the restriction entry to be matched only if the source port in the packet is the standard NTP -UDP port (123). +UDP port (123). Both ntpport and non-ntpport may -be specified. +be specified. The ntpport is considered more specific and -is sorted later in the list. -

    version
    Deny packets that do not match the current NTP version. +is sorted later in the list. +

    +
    version
    +

    Deny packets that do not match the current NTP version. +

    -

    Default restriction list entries with the flags ignore, interface, -ntpport, for each of the local host's interface addresses are +

    Default restriction list entries with the flags ignore, interface, +ntpport, for each of the local host’s interface addresses are inserted into the table at startup to prevent the server -from attempting to synchronize to its own time. +from attempting to synchronize to its own time. A default entry is also always present, though if it is otherwise unconfigured; no flags are associated with the default entry (i.e., everything besides your own -NTP server is unrestricted). +NTP server is unrestricted). +

    -
    -

    +
    -
    +
    +

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp.conf Notes  

    - -

    Automatic NTP Configuration Options

    - -
    Manycasting
    - + +

    1.1.5 Automatic NTP Configuration Options

    + +

    1.1.5.1 Manycasting

    Manycasting is a automatic discovery and configuration paradigm -new to NTPv4. +new to NTPv4. It is intended as a means for a multicast client to troll the nearby network neighborhood to find cooperating manycast servers, validate them using cryptographic means and evaluate their time values with respect to other servers -that might be lurking in the vicinity. +that might be lurking in the vicinity. The intended result is that each manycast client mobilizes -client associations with some number of the "best" +client associations with some number of the "best" of the nearby manycast servers, yet automatically reconfigures to sustain this number of servers should one or another fail. - -

    Note that the manycasting paradigm does not coincide +

    +

    Note that the manycasting paradigm does not coincide with the anycast paradigm described in RFC-1546, which is designed to find a single server from a clique -of servers providing the same service. +of servers providing the same service. The manycast paradigm is designed to find a plurality of redundant servers satisfying defined optimality criteria. - -

    Manycasting can be used with either symmetric key -or public key cryptography. +

    +

    Manycasting can be used with either symmetric key +or public key cryptography. The public key infrastructure (PKI) offers the best protection against compromised keys and is generally considered stronger, at least with relatively -large key sizes. +large key sizes. It is implemented using the Autokey protocol and the OpenSSL cryptographic library available from -http://www.openssl.org/. +http://www.openssl.org/. The library can also be used with other NTPv4 modes as well and is highly recommended, especially for broadcast modes. - -

    A persistent manycast client association is configured +

    +

    A persistent manycast client association is configured using the manycastclient command, which is similar to the @@ -1676,62 +1927,62 @@ command but with a multicast (IPv4 class D or IPv6 prefix FF) -group address. +group address. The IANA has designated IPv4 address 224.1.1.1 -and IPv6 address FF05::101 (site local) for NTP. +and IPv6 address FF05::101 (site local) for NTP. When more servers are needed, it broadcasts manycast client messages to this address at the minimum feasible rate and minimum feasible time-to-live (TTL) hops, depending -on how many servers have already been found. +on how many servers have already been found. There can be as many manycast client associations as different group address, each one serving as a template for a future ephemeral unicast client/server association. - -

    Manycast servers configured with the +

    +

    Manycast servers configured with the manycastserver command listen on the specified group address for manycast -client messages. +client messages. Note the distinction between manycast client, which actively broadcasts messages, and manycast server, -which passively responds to them. +which passively responds to them. If a manycast server is in scope of the current TTL and is itself synchronized to a valid source and operating at a stratum level equal to or lower than the manycast client, it replies to the manycast client message with an ordinary unicast server message. - -

    The manycast client receiving this message mobilizes +

    +

    The manycast client receiving this message mobilizes an ephemeral client/server association according to the matching manycast client template, but only if cryptographically authenticated and the server stratum is less than or equal -to the client stratum. +to the client stratum. Authentication is explicitly required -and either symmetric key or public key (Autokey) can be used. +and either symmetric key or public key (Autokey) can be used. Then, the client polls the server at its unicast address in burst mode in order to reliably set the host clock -and validate the source. +and validate the source. This normally results in a volley of eight client/server at 2-s intervals during which both the synchronization and cryptographic -protocols run concurrently. +protocols run concurrently. Following the volley, the client runs the NTP intersection and clustering -algorithms, which act to discard all but the "best" +algorithms, which act to discard all but the "best" associations according to stratum and synchronization -distance. +distance. The surviving associations then continue in ordinary client/server mode. - -

    The manycast client polling strategy is designed to reduce +

    +

    The manycast client polling strategy is designed to reduce as much as possible the volume of manycast client messages and the effects of implosion due to near-simultaneous -arrival of manycast server messages. +arrival of manycast server messages. The strategy is determined by the manycastclient, tos and ttl -configuration commands. +configuration commands. The manycast poll interval is normally eight times the system poll interval, which starts out at the @@ -1740,17 +1991,17 @@ value specified in the manycastclient, command and, under normal circumstances, increments to the maxpolll -value specified in this command. +value specified in this command. Initially, the TTL is set at the minimum hops specified by the ttl -command. +command. At each retransmission the TTL is increased until reaching the maximum hops specified by this command or a sufficient -number client associations have been found. +number client associations have been found. Further retransmissions use the same TTL. - -

    The quality and reliability of the suite of associations +

    +

    The quality and reliability of the suite of associations discovered by the manycast client is determined by the NTP mitigation algorithms and the minclock @@ -1758,66 +2009,66 @@ and minsane values specified in the tos -configuration command. +configuration command. At least minsane candidate servers must be available and the mitigation algorithms produce at least minclock -survivors in order to synchronize the clock. +survivors in order to synchronize the clock. Byzantine agreement principles require at least four -candidates in order to correctly discard a single falseticker. +candidates in order to correctly discard a single falseticker. For legacy purposes, minsane defaults to 1 and minclock -defaults to 3. +defaults to 3. For manycast service minsane should be explicitly set to 4, assuming at least that number of servers are available. - -

    If at least +

    +

    If at least minclock servers are found, the manycast poll interval is immediately set to eight times -maxpoll. +maxpoll. If less than minclock servers are found when the TTL has reached the maximum hops, -the manycast poll interval is doubled. +the manycast poll interval is doubled. For each transmission after that, the poll interval is doubled again until reaching the maximum of eight times -maxpoll. +maxpoll. Further transmissions use the same poll interval and -TTL values. +TTL values. Note that while all this is going on, each client/server association found is operating normally it the system poll interval. - -

    Administratively scoped multicast boundaries are normally +

    +

    Administratively scoped multicast boundaries are normally specified by the network router configuration and, -in the case of IPv6, the link/site scope prefix. +in the case of IPv6, the link/site scope prefix. By default, the increment for TTL hops is 32 starting from 31; however, the ttl configuration command can be used to modify the values to match the scope rules. - -

    It is often useful to narrow the range of acceptable -servers which can be found by manycast client associations. +

    +

    It is often useful to narrow the range of acceptable +servers which can be found by manycast client associations. Because manycast servers respond only when the client stratum is equal to or greater than the server stratum, primary (stratum 1) servers fill find only primary servers -in TTL range, which is probably the most common objective. +in TTL range, which is probably the most common objective. However, unless configured otherwise, all manycast clients in TTL range will eventually find all primary servers in TTL range, which is probably not the most common -objective in large networks. +objective in large networks. The tos -command can be used to modify this behavior. +command can be used to modify this behavior. Servers with stratum below floor or above @@ -1829,270 +2080,283 @@ process; however, these servers may be temporally accepted if the number of servers within TTL range is less than minclock. - -

    The above actions occur for each manycast client message, -which repeats at the designated poll interval. +

    +

    The above actions occur for each manycast client message, +which repeats at the designated poll interval. However, once the ephemeral client association is mobilized, subsequent manycast server replies are discarded, -since that would result in a duplicate association. +since that would result in a duplicate association. If during a poll interval the number of client associations falls below minclock, all manycast client prototype associations are reset to the initial poll interval and TTL hops and operation -resumes from the beginning. +resumes from the beginning. It is important to avoid frequent manycast client messages, since each one requires -all manycast servers in TTL range to respond. +all manycast servers in TTL range to respond. The result could well be an implosion, either minor or major, -depending on the number of servers in range. +depending on the number of servers in range. The recommended value for maxpoll is 12 (4,096 s). - -

    It is possible and frequently useful to configure a host -as both manycast client and manycast server. +

    +

    It is possible and frequently useful to configure a host +as both manycast client and manycast server. A number of hosts configured this way and sharing a common group address will automatically organize themselves in an optimum configuration based on stratum and -synchronization distance. +synchronization distance. For example, consider an NTP subnet of two primary servers and a hundred or more -dependent clients. +dependent clients. With two exceptions, all servers and clients have identical configuration files including both multicastclient and multicastserver commands using, for instance, multicast group address -239.1.1.1. +239.1.1.1. The only exception is that each primary server configuration file must include commands for the primary reference source such as a GPS receiver. - -

    The remaining configuration files for all secondary +

    +

    The remaining configuration files for all secondary servers and clients have the same contents, except for the tos -command, which is specific for each stratum level. +command, which is specific for each stratum level. For stratum 1 and stratum 2 servers, that command is -not necessary. +not necessary. For stratum 3 and above servers the floor -value is set to the intended stratum number. +value is set to the intended stratum number. Thus, all stratum 3 configuration files are identical, all stratum 4 files are identical and so forth. - -

    Once operations have stabilized in this scenario, +

    +

    Once operations have stabilized in this scenario, the primary servers will find the primary reference source and each other, since they both operate at the same stratum (1), but not with any secondary server or client, -since these operate at a higher stratum. +since these operate at a higher stratum. The secondary -servers will find the servers at the same stratum level. +servers will find the servers at the same stratum level. If one of the primary servers loses its GPS receiver, it will continue to operate as a client and other clients will time out the corresponding association and re-associate accordingly. - -

    Some administrators prefer to avoid running +

    +

    Some administrators prefer to avoid running ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) continuously and run either sntp(1sntpmdoc) or ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) -q -as a cron job. +as a cron job. In either case the servers must be configured in advance and the program fails if none are -available when the cron job runs. +available when the cron job runs. A really slick application of manycast is with ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) --q. +-q. The program wakes up, scans the local landscape looking for the usual suspects, selects the best from among -the rascals, sets the clock and then departs. +the rascals, sets the clock and then departs. Servers do not have to be configured in advance and all clients throughout the network can have the same configuration file. - -

    Manycast Interactions with Autokey
    - +

    +

    1.1.5.2 Manycast Interactions with Autokey

    Each time a manycast client sends a client mode packet to a multicast group address, all manycast servers in scope generate a reply including the host name -and status word. +and status word. The manycast clients then run the Autokey protocol, which collects and verifies -all certificates involved. +all certificates involved. Following the burst interval all but three survivors are cast off, -but the certificates remain in the local cache. +but the certificates remain in the local cache. It often happens that several complete signing trails from the client to the primary servers are collected in this way. - -

    About once an hour or less often if the poll interval -exceeds this, the client regenerates the Autokey key list. -This is in general transparent in client/server mode. +

    +

    About once an hour or less often if the poll interval +exceeds this, the client regenerates the Autokey key list. +This is in general transparent in client/server mode. However, about once per day the server private value used to generate cookies is refreshed along with all -manycast client associations. +manycast client associations. In this case all -cryptographic values including certificates is refreshed. +cryptographic values including certificates is refreshed. If a new certificate has been generated since the last refresh epoch, it will automatically revoke all prior certificates that happen to be in the -certificate cache. +certificate cache. At the same time, the manycast scheme starts all over from the beginning and the expanding ring shrinks to the minimum and increments from there while collecting all servers in scope. - -

    Broadcast Options
    - -
    -
    tos [bcpollbstep gate]
    This command provides a way to delay, +

    +

    1.1.5.3 Broadcast Options

    +
    +
    tos [bcpollbstep gate]
    +

    This command provides a way to delay, by the specified number of broadcast poll intervals, -believing backward time steps from a broadcast server. -Broadcast time networks are expected to be trusted. -In the event a broadcast server's time is stepped backwards, +believing backward time steps from a broadcast server. +Broadcast time networks are expected to be trusted. +In the event a broadcast server’s time is stepped backwards, there is clear benefit to having the clients notice this change -as soon as possible. +as soon as possible. Attacks such as replay attacks can happen, however, and even though there are a number of protections built in to -broadcast mode, attempts to perform a replay attack are possible. +broadcast mode, attempts to perform a replay attack are possible. This value defaults to 0, but can be changed -to any number of poll intervals between 0 and 4. +to any number of poll intervals between 0 and 4. +

    - -
    Manycast Options
    - -
    -
    tos [ceiling ceiling | cohort { 0 | 1 } | floor floor | minclock minclock | minsane minsane]
    This command affects the clock selection and clustering -algorithms. + +

    1.1.5.4 Manycast Options

    +
    +
    tos [ceiling ceiling | cohort { 0 | 1 } | floor floor | minclock minclock | minsane minsane]
    +

    This command affects the clock selection and clustering +algorithms. It can be used to select the quality and quantity of peers used to synchronize the system clock -and is most useful in manycast mode. +and is most useful in manycast mode. The variables operate as follows: -

    -
    ceiling ceiling
    Peers with strata above +

    +
    ceiling ceiling
    +

    Peers with strata above ceiling will be discarded if there are at least minclock -peers remaining. +peers remaining. This value defaults to 15, but can be changed -to any number from 1 to 15. -

    cohort {0 | 1}
    This is a binary flag which enables (0) or disables (1) +to any number from 1 to 15. +

    +
    cohort {0 | 1}
    +

    This is a binary flag which enables (0) or disables (1) manycast server replies to manycast clients with the same -stratum level. +stratum level. This is useful to reduce implosions where large numbers of clients with the same stratum level -are present. -The default is to enable these replies. -

    floor floor
    Peers with strata below +are present. +The default is to enable these replies. +

    +
    floor floor
    +

    Peers with strata below floor will be discarded if there are at least minclock -peers remaining. +peers remaining. This value defaults to 1, but can be changed -to any number from 1 to 15. -

    minclock minclock
    The clustering algorithm repeatedly casts out outlier +to any number from 1 to 15. +

    +
    minclock minclock
    +

    The clustering algorithm repeatedly casts out outlier associations until no more than minclock -associations remain. +associations remain. This value defaults to 3, but can be changed to any number from 1 to the number of -configured sources. -

    minsane minsane
    This is the minimum number of candidates available +configured sources. +

    +
    minsane minsane
    +

    This is the minimum number of candidates available to the clock selection algorithm in order to produce -one or more truechimers for the clustering algorithm. +one or more truechimers for the clustering algorithm. If fewer than this number are available, the clock is -undisciplined and allowed to run free. +undisciplined and allowed to run free. The default is 1 -for legacy purposes. +for legacy purposes. However, according to principles of Byzantine agreement, minsane should be at least 4 in order to detect and discard -a single falseticker. +a single falseticker. +

    -
    ttl hop ...
    This command specifies a list of TTL values in increasing -order, up to 8 values can be specified. +
    +
    ttl hop ...
    +

    This command specifies a list of TTL values in increasing +order, up to 8 values can be specified. In manycast mode these values are used in turn -in an expanding-ring search. +in an expanding-ring search. The default is eight -multiples of 32 starting at 31. +multiples of 32 starting at 31. +

    -
    -

    +
    -
    +
    +

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp.conf Notes  

    - -

    Reference Clock Support

    - + +

    1.1.6 Reference Clock Support

    The NTP Version 4 daemon supports some three dozen different radio, satellite and modem reference clocks plus a special pseudo-clock -used for backup or when no other clock source is available. +used for backup or when no other clock source is available. Detailed descriptions of individual device drivers and options can be found in the -"Reference Clock Drivers" +"Reference Clock Drivers" page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp). +/usr/share/doc/ntp). Additional information can be found in the pages linked there, including the -"Debugging Hints for Reference Clock Drivers" +"Debugging Hints for Reference Clock Drivers" and -"How To Write a Reference Clock Driver" +"How To Write a Reference Clock Driver" pages (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp). +/usr/share/doc/ntp). In addition, support for a PPS signal is available as described in the -"Pulse-per-second (PPS) Signal Interfacing" +"Pulse-per-second (PPS) Signal Interfacing" page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp). +/usr/share/doc/ntp). Many drivers support special line discipline/streams modules which can -significantly improve the accuracy using the driver. +significantly improve the accuracy using the driver. These are described in the -"Line Disciplines and Streams Drivers" +"Line Disciplines and Streams Drivers" page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp). - -

    A reference clock will generally (though not always) be a radio +/usr/share/doc/ntp). +

    +

    A reference clock will generally (though not always) be a radio timecode receiver which is synchronized to a source of standard time such as the services offered by the NRC in Canada and NIST and -USNO in the US. +USNO in the US. The interface between the computer and the timecode -receiver is device dependent, but is usually a serial port. +receiver is device dependent, but is usually a serial port. A device driver specific to each reference clock must be selected and compiled in the distribution; however, most common radio, satellite -and modem clocks are included by default. +and modem clocks are included by default. Note that an attempt to configure a reference clock when the driver has not been compiled or the hardware port has not been appropriately configured results in a scalding remark to the system log file, but is otherwise non hazardous. - -

    For the purposes of configuration, +

    +

    For the purposes of configuration, ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) treats reference clocks in a manner analogous to normal NTP peers as much -as possible. +as possible. Reference clocks are identified by a syntactically correct but invalid IP address, in order to distinguish them from -normal NTP peers. +normal NTP peers. Reference clock addresses are of the form 127.127.t.u, where @@ -2101,199 +2365,222 @@ is an integer denoting the clock type and u indicates the unit -number in the range 0-3. +number in the range 0-3. While it may seem overkill, it is in fact sometimes useful to configure multiple reference clocks of the same type, in which case the unit numbers must be unique. - -

    The +

    +

    The server command is used to configure a reference clock, where the address argument in that command -is the clock address. +is the clock address. The key, version and ttl -options are not used for reference clock support. +options are not used for reference clock support. The mode option is added for reference clock support, as -described below. +described below. The prefer option can be useful to persuade the server to cherish a reference clock with somewhat more -enthusiasm than other reference clocks or peers. +enthusiasm than other reference clocks or peers. Further information on this option can be found in the -"Mitigation Rules and the prefer Keyword" +"Mitigation Rules and the prefer Keyword" (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp) -page. +/usr/share/doc/ntp) +page. The minpoll and maxpoll options have -meaning only for selected clock drivers. +meaning only for selected clock drivers. See the individual clock driver document pages for additional information. - -

    The +

    +

    The fudge command is used to provide additional information for individual clock drivers and normally follows immediately after the server -command. +command. The address -argument specifies the clock address. +argument specifies the clock address. The refid and stratum options can be used to -override the defaults for the device. +override the defaults for the device. There are two optional device-dependent time offsets and four flags that can be included in the fudge command as well. - -

    The stratum number of a reference clock is by default zero. +

    +

    The stratum number of a reference clock is by default zero. Since the ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) daemon adds one to the stratum of each peer, a primary server ordinarily displays an external stratum of -one. +one. In order to provide engineered backups, it is often useful to -specify the reference clock stratum as greater than zero. +specify the reference clock stratum as greater than zero. The stratum -option is used for this purpose. +option is used for this purpose. Also, in cases involving both a reference clock and a pulse-per-second (PPS) discipline signal, it is useful to specify the reference clock -identifier as other than the default, depending on the driver. +identifier as other than the default, depending on the driver. The refid -option is used for this purpose. +option is used for this purpose. Except where noted, these options apply to all clock drivers. - -

    Reference Clock Commands
    - -
    -
    server 127.127.t.u [prefer] [mode int] [minpoll int] [maxpoll int]
    This command can be used to configure reference clocks in -special ways. +

    +

    1.1.6.1 Reference Clock Commands

    +
    +
    server 127.127.t.u [prefer] [mode int] [minpoll int] [maxpoll int]
    +

    This command can be used to configure reference clocks in +special ways. The options are interpreted as follows: -

    -
    prefer
    Marks the reference clock as preferred. +

    +
    prefer
    +

    Marks the reference clock as preferred. All other things being equal, this host will be chosen for synchronization among a set of -correctly operating hosts. +correctly operating hosts. See the -"Mitigation Rules and the prefer Keyword" +"Mitigation Rules and the prefer Keyword" page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp) -for further information. -

    mode int
    Specifies a mode number which is interpreted in a -device-specific fashion. +/usr/share/doc/ntp) +for further information. +

    +
    mode int
    +

    Specifies a mode number which is interpreted in a +device-specific fashion. For instance, it selects a dialing protocol in the ACTS driver and a device subtype in the parse -drivers. -

    minpoll int
    maxpoll int
    These options specify the minimum and maximum polling interval +drivers. +

    +
    minpoll int
    +
    maxpoll int
    +

    These options specify the minimum and maximum polling interval for reference clock messages, as a power of 2 in seconds For most directly connected reference clocks, both minpoll and maxpoll -default to 6 (64 s). +default to 6 (64 s). For modem reference clocks, minpoll defaults to 10 (17.1 m) and maxpoll -defaults to 14 (4.5 h). -The allowable range is 4 (16 s) to 17 (36.4 h) inclusive. +defaults to 14 (4.5 h). +The allowable range is 4 (16 s) to 17 (36.4 h) inclusive. +

    -
    fudge 127.127.t.u [time1 sec] [time2 sec] [stratum int] [refid string] [mode int] [flag1 0 | 1] [flag2 0 | 1] [flag3 0 | 1] [flag4 0 | 1]
    This command can be used to configure reference clocks in -special ways. +
    +
    fudge 127.127.t.u [time1 sec] [time2 sec] [stratum int] [refid string] [mode int] [flag1 0 | 1] [flag2 0 | 1] [flag3 0 | 1] [flag4 0 | 1]
    +

    This command can be used to configure reference clocks in +special ways. It must immediately follow the server -command which configures the driver. +command which configures the driver. Note that the same capability is possible at run time using the ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) -program. +program. The options are interpreted as follows: -

    -
    time1 sec
    Specifies a constant to be added to the time offset produced by -the driver, a fixed-point decimal number in seconds. +

    +
    time1 sec
    +

    Specifies a constant to be added to the time offset produced by +the driver, a fixed-point decimal number in seconds. This is used as a calibration constant to adjust the nominal time offset of a particular clock to agree with an external standard, such as a -precision PPS signal. +precision PPS signal. It also provides a way to correct a systematic error or bias due to serial port or operating system -latencies, different cable lengths or receiver internal delay. +latencies, different cable lengths or receiver internal delay. The specified offset is in addition to the propagation delay provided -by other means, such as internal DIPswitches. +by other means, such as internal DIPswitches. Where a calibration for an individual system and driver is available, an approximate -correction is noted in the driver documentation pages. +correction is noted in the driver documentation pages. Note: in order to facilitate calibration when more than one radio clock or PPS signal is supported, a special calibration -feature is available. +feature is available. It takes the form of an argument to the enable command described in Miscellaneous Options page and operates as described in the -"Reference Clock Drivers" +"Reference Clock Drivers" page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp). -

    time2 secs
    Specifies a fixed-point decimal number in seconds, which is -interpreted in a driver-dependent way. +/usr/share/doc/ntp). +

    +
    time2 secs
    +

    Specifies a fixed-point decimal number in seconds, which is +interpreted in a driver-dependent way. See the descriptions of specific drivers in the -"Reference Clock Drivers" +"Reference Clock Drivers" page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp ). -

    stratum int
    Specifies the stratum number assigned to the driver, an integer -between 0 and 15. +/usr/share/doc/ntp ). +

    +
    stratum int
    +

    Specifies the stratum number assigned to the driver, an integer +between 0 and 15. This number overrides the default stratum number -ordinarily assigned by the driver itself, usually zero. -

    refid string
    Specifies an ASCII string of from one to four characters which -defines the reference identifier used by the driver. +ordinarily assigned by the driver itself, usually zero. +

    +
    refid string
    +

    Specifies an ASCII string of from one to four characters which +defines the reference identifier used by the driver. This string overrides the default identifier ordinarily assigned by the driver -itself. -

    mode int
    Specifies a mode number which is interpreted in a -device-specific fashion. +itself. +

    +
    mode int
    +

    Specifies a mode number which is interpreted in a +device-specific fashion. For instance, it selects a dialing protocol in the ACTS driver and a device subtype in the parse -drivers. -

    flag1 0 | 1
    flag2 0 | 1
    flag3 0 | 1
    flag4 0 | 1
    These four flags are used for customizing the clock driver. +drivers. +

    +
    flag1 0 | 1
    +
    flag2 0 | 1
    +
    flag3 0 | 1
    +
    flag4 0 | 1
    +

    These four flags are used for customizing the clock driver. The interpretation of these values, and whether they are used at all, -is a function of the particular clock driver. +is a function of the particular clock driver. However, by convention flag4 @@ -2302,155 +2589,186 @@ data to the clockstats file configured with the filegen -command. +command. Further information on the filegen command can be found in -Monitoring Options. +‘Monitoring Options’. +

    +
    +
    -
    -
    -

    +
    -
    +
    +

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp.conf Notes  

    - -

    Miscellaneous Options

    - -
    -
    broadcastdelay seconds
    The broadcast and multicast modes require a special calibration + +

    1.1.7 Miscellaneous Options

    +
    +
    broadcastdelay seconds
    +

    The broadcast and multicast modes require a special calibration to determine the network delay between the local and remote -servers. +servers. Ordinarily, this is done automatically by the initial -protocol exchanges between the client and server. +protocol exchanges between the client and server. In some cases, the calibration procedure may fail due to network or server access -controls, for example. +controls, for example. This command specifies the default delay to -be used under these circumstances. +be used under these circumstances. Typically (for Ethernet), a -number between 0.003 and 0.007 seconds is appropriate. +number between 0.003 and 0.007 seconds is appropriate. The default -when this command is not used is 0.004 seconds. -

    calldelay delay
    This option controls the delay in seconds between the first and second +when this command is not used is 0.004 seconds. +

    +
    calldelay delay
    +

    This option controls the delay in seconds between the first and second packets sent in burst or iburst mode to allow additional time for a modem -or ISDN call to complete. -

    driftfile driftfile
    This command specifies the complete path and name of the file used to -record the frequency of the local clock oscillator. +or ISDN call to complete. +

    +
    driftfile driftfile
    +

    This command specifies the complete path and name of the file used to +record the frequency of the local clock oscillator. This is the same operation as the -f -command line option. +command line option. If the file exists, it is read at startup in order to set the initial frequency and then updated once per -hour with the current frequency computed by the daemon. +hour with the current frequency computed by the daemon. If the file name is specified, but the file itself does not exist, the starts with an initial -frequency of zero and creates the file when writing it for the first time. +frequency of zero and creates the file when writing it for the first time. If this command is not given, the daemon will always start with an initial frequency of zero. - -

    The file format consists of a single line containing a single +

    +

    The file format consists of a single line containing a single floating point number, which records the frequency offset measured -in parts-per-million (PPM). +in parts-per-million (PPM). The file is updated by first writing the current drift value into a temporary file and then renaming -this file to replace the old version. +this file to replace the old version. This implies that ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) must have write permission for the directory the drift file is located in, and that file system links, symbolic or -otherwise, should be avoided. -

    dscp value
    This option specifies the Differentiated Services Control Point (DSCP) value, -a 6-bit code. -The default value is 46, signifying Expedited Forwarding. -
    enable [auth | bclient | calibrate | kernel | mode7 | monitor | ntp | stats | peer_clear_digest_early | unpeer_crypto_early | unpeer_crypto_nak_early | unpeer_digest_early]
    disable [auth | bclient | calibrate | kernel | mode7 | monitor | ntp | stats | peer_clear_digest_early | unpeer_crypto_early | unpeer_crypto_nak_early | unpeer_digest_early]
    Provides a way to enable or disable various server options. -Flags not mentioned are unaffected. +otherwise, should be avoided. +

    +
    dscp value
    +

    This option specifies the Differentiated Services Control Point (DSCP) value, +a 6-bit code. +The default value is 46, signifying Expedited Forwarding. +

    +
    enable [auth | bclient | calibrate | kernel | mode7 | monitor | ntp | stats | peer_clear_digest_early | unpeer_crypto_early | unpeer_crypto_nak_early | unpeer_digest_early]
    +
    disable [auth | bclient | calibrate | kernel | mode7 | monitor | ntp | stats | peer_clear_digest_early | unpeer_crypto_early | unpeer_crypto_nak_early | unpeer_digest_early]
    +

    Provides a way to enable or disable various server options. +Flags not mentioned are unaffected. Note that all of these flags can be controlled remotely using the ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) utility program. -

    -
    auth
    Enables the server to synchronize with unconfigured peers only if the +

    +
    auth
    +

    Enables the server to synchronize with unconfigured peers only if the peer has been correctly authenticated using either public key or -private key cryptography. +private key cryptography. The default for this flag is -enable. -

    bclient
    Enables the server to listen for a message from a broadcast or +enable. +

    +
    bclient
    +

    Enables the server to listen for a message from a broadcast or multicast server, as in the multicastclient command with default -address. +address. The default for this flag is -disable. -

    calibrate
    Enables the calibrate feature for reference clocks. +disable. +

    +
    calibrate
    +

    Enables the calibrate feature for reference clocks. The default for this flag is -disable. -

    kernel
    Enables the kernel time discipline, if available. +disable. +

    +
    kernel
    +

    Enables the kernel time discipline, if available. The default for this flag is enable if support is available, otherwise -disable. -

    mode7
    Enables processing of NTP mode 7 implementation-specific requests +disable. +

    +
    mode7
    +

    Enables processing of NTP mode 7 implementation-specific requests which are used by the deprecated ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) -program. -The default for this flag is disable. +program. +The default for this flag is disable. This flag is excluded from runtime configuration using -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc). +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc). The ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) program provides the same capabilities as ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) -using standard mode 6 requests. -

    monitor
    Enables the monitoring facility. +using standard mode 6 requests. +

    +
    monitor
    +

    Enables the monitoring facility. See the ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) program and the monlist -command or further information. +command or further information. The default for this flag is -enable. -

    ntp
    Enables time and frequency discipline. +enable. +

    +
    ntp
    +

    Enables time and frequency discipline. In effect, this switch opens and -closes the feedback loop, which is useful for testing. +closes the feedback loop, which is useful for testing. The default for this flag is -enable. -

    peer_clear_digest_early
    By default, if +enable. +

    +
    peer_clear_digest_early
    +

    By default, if ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) is using autokey and it receives a crypto-NAK packet that passes the duplicate packet and origin timestamp checks -the peer variables are immediately cleared. +the peer variables are immediately cleared. While this is generally a feature as it allows for quick recovery if a server key has changed, a properly forged and appropriately delivered crypto-NAK packet -can be used in a DoS attack. +can be used in a DoS attack. If you have active noticable problems with this type of DoS attack then you should consider -disabling this option. +disabling this option. You can check your peerstats -file for evidence of any of these attacks. +file for evidence of any of these attacks. The default for this flag is -enable. -

    stats
    Enables the statistics facility. +enable. +

    +
    stats
    +

    Enables the statistics facility. See the -Monitoring Options -section for further information. +‘Monitoring Options’ +section for further information. The default for this flag is -disable. -

    unpeer_crypto_early
    By default, if +disable. +

    +
    unpeer_crypto_early
    +

    By default, if ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) receives an autokey packet that fails TEST9, a crypto failure, -the association is immediately cleared. +the association is immediately cleared. This is almost certainly a feature, but if, in spite of the current recommendation of not using autokey, you are @@ -2460,84 +2778,93 @@ using autokey you are seeing this sort of DoS attack disabling this flag will delay tearing down the association until the reachability counter -becomes zero. +becomes zero. You can check your peerstats -file for evidence of any of these attacks. +file for evidence of any of these attacks. The default for this flag is -enable. -

    unpeer_crypto_nak_early
    By default, if +enable. +

    +
    unpeer_crypto_nak_early
    +

    By default, if ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) receives a crypto-NAK packet that passes the duplicate packet and origin timestamp checks -the association is immediately cleared. +the association is immediately cleared. While this is generally a feature as it allows for quick recovery if a server key has changed, a properly forged and appropriately delivered crypto-NAK packet -can be used in a DoS attack. +can be used in a DoS attack. If you have active noticable problems with this type of DoS attack then you should consider -disabling this option. +disabling this option. You can check your peerstats -file for evidence of any of these attacks. +file for evidence of any of these attacks. The default for this flag is -enable. -

    unpeer_digest_early
    By default, if +enable. +

    +
    unpeer_digest_early
    +

    By default, if ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) receives what should be an authenticated packet that passes other packet sanity checks but contains an invalid digest -the association is immediately cleared. +the association is immediately cleared. While this is generally a feature as it allows for quick recovery, if this type of packet is carefully forged and sent -during an appropriate window it can be used for a DoS attack. +during an appropriate window it can be used for a DoS attack. If you have active noticable problems with this type of DoS attack then you should consider -disabling this option. +disabling this option. You can check your peerstats -file for evidence of any of these attacks. +file for evidence of any of these attacks. The default for this flag is -enable. +enable. +

    -
    includefile includefile
    This command allows additional configuration commands -to be included from a separate file. +
    +
    includefile includefile
    +

    This command allows additional configuration commands +to be included from a separate file. Include files may be nested to a depth of five; upon reaching the end of any include file, command processing resumes in the previous -configuration file. +configuration file. This option is useful for sites that run ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) on multiple hosts, with (mostly) common options (e.g., a -restriction list). -

    interface [listen | ignore | drop] [all | ipv4 | ipv6 | wildcard name | address [/ prefixlen]]
    The +restriction list). +

    +
    interface [listen | ignore | drop] [all | ipv4 | ipv6 | wildcard name | address [/ prefixlen]]
    +

    The interface directive controls which network addresses ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) -opens, and whether input is dropped without processing. +opens, and whether input is dropped without processing. The first parameter determines the action for addresses -which match the second parameter. +which match the second parameter. The second parameter specifies a class of addresses, or a specific interface name, -or an address. +or an address. In the address case, prefixlen -determines how many bits must match for this rule to apply. +determines how many bits must match for this rule to apply. ignore prevents opening matching addresses, drop causes ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) -to open the address and drop all received packets without examination. +to open the address and drop all received packets without examination. Multiple interface -directives can be used. -The last rule which matches a particular address determines the action for it. +directives can be used. +The last rule which matches a particular address determines the action for it. interface directives are disabled if any -I, @@ -2546,18 +2873,20 @@ directives are disabled if any or --novirtualips command-line options are specified in the configuration file, -all available network addresses are opened. +all available network addresses are opened. The nic directive is an alias for -interface. -

    leapfile leapfile
    This command loads the IERS leapseconds file and initializes the +interface. +

    +
    leapfile leapfile
    +

    This command loads the IERS leapseconds file and initializes the leapsecond values for the next leapsecond event, leapfile expiration -time, and TAI offset. +time, and TAI offset. The file can be obtained directly from the IERS at https://hpiers.obspm.fr/iers/bul/bulc/ntp/leap-seconds.list or -ftp://hpiers.obspm.fr/iers/bul/bulc/ntp/leap-seconds.list. +ftp://hpiers.obspm.fr/iers/bul/bulc/ntp/leap-seconds.list. The leapfile is scanned when @@ -2566,56 +2895,60 @@ processes the leapfile directive or when ntpd detects that the leapfile -has changed. +has changed. ntpd checks once a day to see if the leapfile -has changed. +has changed. The update-leap(1update_leapmdoc) script can be run to see if the leapfile -should be updated. -

    leapsmearinterval seconds
    This EXPERIMENTAL option is only available if +should be updated. +

    +
    leapsmearinterval seconds
    +

    This EXPERIMENTAL option is only available if ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) was built with the --enable-leap-smear option to the configure -script. -It specifies the interval over which a leap second correction will be applied. +script. +It specifies the interval over which a leap second correction will be applied. Recommended values for this option are between -7200 (2 hours) and 86400 (24 hours). -.Sy DO NOT USE THIS OPTION ON PUBLIC-ACCESS SERVERS! -See http://bugs.ntp.org/2855 for more information. -

    logconfig configkeyword
    This command controls the amount and type of output written to +7200 (2 hours) and 86400 (24 hours). +.Sy DO NOT USE THIS OPTION ON PUBLIC-ACCESS SERVERS! +See http://bugs.ntp.org/2855 for more information. +

    +
    logconfig configkeyword
    +

    This command controls the amount and type of output written to the system syslog(3) facility or the alternate logfile -log file. -By default, all output is turned on. +log file. +By default, all output is turned on. All configkeyword keywords can be prefixed with -=, -+ +‘=’, +‘+’ and --, +‘-’, where -= +‘=’ sets the syslog(3) priority mask, -+ +‘+’ adds and -- +‘-’ removes -messages. +messages. syslog(3) messages can be controlled in four classes -(clock, peer, sys and sync). +(clock, peer, sys and sync). Within these classes four types of messages can be controlled: informational messages (info), @@ -2626,383 +2959,464 @@ statistics messages and status messages (status). - -

    Configuration keywords are formed by concatenating the message class with -the event class. +

    +

    Configuration keywords are formed by concatenating the message class with +the event class. The all -prefix can be used instead of a message class. +prefix can be used instead of a message class. A message class may also be followed by the all keyword to enable/disable all -messages of the respective message class. +messages of the respective message class. Thus, a minimal log configuration could look like this: -

         
-     logconfig =syncstatus +sysevents
+
    logconfig =syncstatus +sysevents
 
    
-
-     
    This would just list the synchronizations state of
+
    This would just list the synchronizations state of
 ntpd(1ntpdmdoc)
-and the major system events. 
+and the major system events.
 For a simple reference server, the
 following minimum message configuration could be useful:
-
         
-     logconfig =syncall +clockall
+
    logconfig =syncall +clockall
 
    
-
-     
    This configuration will list all clock information and
-synchronization information. 
+
    This configuration will list all clock information and
+synchronization information.
 All other events and messages about
-peers, system events and so on is suppressed. 
-
    logfile logfile
    This command specifies the location of an alternate log file to
+peers, system events and so on is suppressed.
+
    
+
    logfile logfile
    
+
    This command specifies the location of an alternate log file to
 be used instead of the default system
 syslog(3)
-facility. 
+facility.
 This is the same operation as the
 -l
-command line option. 
-
    mru [maxdepth count | maxmem kilobytes | mindepth count | maxage seconds | initialloc count | initmem kilobytes | incalloc count | incmem kilobytes]
    Controls size limite of the monitoring facility's Most Recently Used
+command line option.
+
    
+
    mru [maxdepth count | maxmem kilobytes | mindepth count | maxage seconds | initialloc count | initmem kilobytes | incalloc count | incmem kilobytes]
    
+
    Controls size limite of the monitoring facility’s Most Recently Used
 (MRU) list
 of client addresses, which is also used by the
 rate control facility.
-          
    
-
    maxdepth count
    maxmem kilobytes
    Equivalent upper limits on the size of the MRU list, in terms of entries or kilobytes. 
+
    
+
    maxdepth count
    
+
    maxmem kilobytes
    
+
    Equivalent upper limits on the size of the MRU list, in terms of entries or kilobytes.
 The acutal limit will be up to
 incalloc
 entries or
 incmem
-kilobytes larger. 
+kilobytes larger.
 As with all of the
 mru
 options offered in units of entries or kilobytes, if both
 maxdepth
 and
 maxmem are used, the last one used controls.
-The default is 1024 kilobytes. 
-
    mindepth count
    Lower limit on the MRU list size. 
+The default is 1024 kilobytes.
+
    
+
    mindepth count
    
+
    Lower limit on the MRU list size.
 When the MRU list has fewer than
 mindepth
 entries, existing entries are never removed to make room for newer ones,
-regardless of their age. 
-The default is 600 entries. 
-
    maxage seconds
    Once the MRU list has
+regardless of their age.
+The default is 600 entries.
+
    
+
    maxage seconds
    
+
    Once the MRU list has
 mindepth
 entries and an additional client is to ba added to the list,
 if the oldest entry was updated more than
 maxage
-seconds ago, that entry is removed and its storage is reused. 
+seconds ago, that entry is removed and its storage is reused.
 If the oldest entry was updated more recently the MRU list is grown,
-subject to
-maxdepth / moxmem. 
-The default is 64 seconds. 
-
    initalloc count
    initmem kilobytes
    Initial memory allocation at the time the monitoringfacility is first enabled,
-in terms of the number of entries or kilobytes. 
-The default is 4 kilobytes. 
-
    incalloc count
    incmem kilobytes
    Size of additional memory allocations when growing the MRU list, in entries or kilobytes. 
-The default is 4 kilobytes. 
+subject to 
+maxdepth / moxmem.
+The default is 64 seconds.
+
    
+
    initalloc count
    
+
    initmem kilobytes
    
+
    Initial memory allocation at the time the monitoringfacility is first enabled,
+in terms of the number of entries or kilobytes.
+The default is 4 kilobytes.
+
    
+
    incalloc count
    
+
    incmem kilobytes
    
+
    Size of additional memory allocations when growing the MRU list, in entries or kilobytes.
+The default is 4 kilobytes.
+
    
 
    
-     
    nonvolatile threshold
    Specify the
+
    
+
    nonvolatile threshold
    
+
    Specify the
 threshold
 delta in seconds before an hourly change to the
 driftfile
-(frequency file) will be written, with a default value of 1e-7 (0.1 PPM). 
-The frequency file is inspected each hour. 
+(frequency file) will be written, with a default value of 1e-7 (0.1 PPM).
+The frequency file is inspected each hour.
 If the difference between the current frequency and the last value written
 exceeds the threshold, the file is written and the
 threshold
-becomes the new threshold value. 
-If the threshold is not exceeeded, it is reduced by half. 
-This is intended to reduce the number of file writes
-for embedded systems with nonvolatile memory. 
-
    phone dial ...
    This command is used in conjunction with
+becomes the new threshold value.
+If the threshold is not exceeeded, it is reduced by half.
+This is intended to reduce the number of file writes 
+for embedded systems with nonvolatile memory.
+
    
+
    phone dial ...
    
+
    This command is used in conjunction with
 the ACTS modem driver (type 18)
-or the JJY driver (type 40, mode 100 - 180). 
+or the JJY driver (type 40, mode 100 - 180).
 For the ACTS modem driver (type 18), the arguments consist of
 a maximum of 10 telephone numbers used to dial USNO, NIST, or European
-time service. 
-For the JJY driver (type 40 mode 100 - 180), the argument is
-one telephone number used to dial the telephone JJY service. 
-The Hayes command ATDT is normally prepended to the number. 
-The number can contain other modem control codes as well. 
-
    reset [allpeers] [auth] [ctl] [io] [mem] [sys] [timer]
    Reset one or more groups of counters maintained by
+time service.
+For the JJY driver (type 40 mode 100 - 180), the argument is 
+one telephone number used to dial the telephone JJY service.
+The Hayes command ATDT is normally prepended to the number.
+The number can contain other modem control codes as well.
+
    
+
    reset [allpeers] [auth] [ctl] [io] [mem] [sys] [timer]
    
+
    Reset one or more groups of counters maintained by
 ntpd
 and exposed by
 ntpq
 and
-ntpdc. 
-
    rlimit [memlock Nmegabytes | stacksize N4kPages filenum Nfiledescriptors]
    
-          
    
-
    memlock Nmegabytes
    Specify the number of megabytes of memory that should be
-allocated and locked. 
+ntpdc.
+
    
+
    rlimit [memlock Nmegabytes | stacksize N4kPages filenum Nfiledescriptors]
    
+
    
+
    memlock Nmegabytes
    
+
    Specify the number of megabytes of memory that should be
+allocated and locked.
 Probably only available under Linux, this option may be useful
 when dropping root (the
 -i
-option). 
-The default is 32 megabytes on non-Linux machines, and -1 under Linux. 
--1 means "do not lock the process into memory". 
-0 means "lock whatever memory the process wants into memory". 
-
    stacksize N4kPages
    Specifies the maximum size of the process stack on systems with the
+option).
+The default is 32 megabytes on non-Linux machines, and -1 under Linux.
+-1 means "do not lock the process into memory".
+0 means "lock whatever memory the process wants into memory".
+
    
+
    stacksize N4kPages
    
+
    Specifies the maximum size of the process stack on systems with the
 mlockall()
-function. 
-Defaults to 50 4k pages (200 4k pages in OpenBSD). 
-
    filenum Nfiledescriptors
    Specifies the maximum number of file descriptors ntpd may have open at once. 
-Defaults to the system default. 
+function.
+Defaults to 50 4k pages (200 4k pages in OpenBSD).
+
    
+
    filenum Nfiledescriptors
    
+
    Specifies the maximum number of file descriptors ntpd may have open at once.
+Defaults to the system default.
+
    
 
    
-     
    saveconfigdir directory_path
    Specify the directory in which to write configuration snapshots
+
    
+
    saveconfigdir directory_path
    
+
    Specify the directory in which to write configuration snapshots
 requested with
-.Cm ntpq 's
+.Cm ntpq ’s
 saveconfig
-command. 
+command.
 If
 saveconfigdir
 does not appear in the configuration file,
 saveconfig
 requests are rejected by
-ntpd. 
-
    saveconfig filename
    Write the current configuration, including any runtime
+ntpd.
+
    
+
    saveconfig filename
    
+
    Write the current configuration, including any runtime
 modifications given with
 :config
 or
 config-from-file
 to the
 ntpd
-host's
+host’s
 filename
 in the
-saveconfigdir. 
+saveconfigdir.
 This command will be rejected unless the
 saveconfigdir
 directive appears in
-.Cm ntpd 's
-configuration file. 
+.Cm ntpd ’s
+configuration file.
 filename
 can use
 strftime(3)
 format directives to substitute the current date and time,
 for example,
-saveconfig\ ntp-%Y%m%d-%H%M%S.conf. 
+saveconfig\ ntp-%Y%m%d-%H%M%S.conf.
 The filename used is stored in the system variable
-savedconfig. 
-Authentication is required. 
-
    setvar variable [default]
    This command adds an additional system variable. 
+savedconfig.
+Authentication is required.
+
    
+
    setvar variable [default]
    
+
    This command adds an additional system variable.
 These
 variables can be used to distribute additional information such as
-the access policy. 
+the access policy.
 If the variable of the form
 name=value
 is followed by the
 default
 keyword, the
 variable will be listed as part of the default system variables
-(rv command)). 
+(rv command)).
 These additional variables serve
-informational purposes only. 
+informational purposes only.
 They are not related to the protocol
-other that they can be listed. 
+other that they can be listed.
 The known protocol variables will
 always override any variables defined via the
 setvar
-mechanism. 
+mechanism.
 There are three special variables that contain the names
-of all variable of the same group. 
+of all variable of the same group.
 The
 sys_var_list
 holds
-the names of all system variables. 
+the names of all system variables.
 The
 peer_var_list
 holds
 the names of all peer variables and the
 clock_var_list
-holds the names of the reference clock variables. 
-
    sysinfo
    Display operational summary. 
-
    sysstats
    Show statistics counters maintained in the protocol module. 
-
    tinker [allan allan | dispersion dispersion | freq freq | huffpuff huffpuff | panic panic | step step | stepback stepback | stepfwd stepfwd | stepout stepout]
    This command can be used to alter several system variables in
-very exceptional circumstances. 
+holds the names of the reference clock variables.
+
    
+
    sysinfo
    
+
    Display operational summary.
+
    
+
    sysstats
    
+
    Show statistics counters maintained in the protocol module.
+
    
+
    tinker [allan allan | dispersion dispersion | freq freq | huffpuff huffpuff | panic panic | step step | stepback stepback | stepfwd stepfwd | stepout stepout]
    
+
    This command can be used to alter several system variables in
+very exceptional circumstances.
 It should occur in the
-configuration file before any other configuration options. 
+configuration file before any other configuration options.
 The
 default values of these variables have been carefully optimized for
-a wide range of network speeds and reliability expectations. 
+a wide range of network speeds and reliability expectations.
 In
 general, they interact in intricate ways that are hard to predict
-and some combinations can result in some very nasty behavior. 
+and some combinations can result in some very nasty behavior.
 Very
 rarely is it necessary to change the default values; but, some
 folks cannot resist twisting the knobs anyway and this command is
-for them. 
+for them.
 Emphasis added: twisters are on their own and can expect
 no help from the support group.
-
-     
    The variables operate as follows:
-          
    
-
    allan allan
    The argument becomes the new value for the minimum Allan
+
    
+
    The variables operate as follows:
+
    
+
    allan allan
    
+
    The argument becomes the new value for the minimum Allan
 intercept, which is a parameter of the PLL/FLL clock discipline
-algorithm. 
+algorithm.
 The value in log2 seconds defaults to 7 (1024 s), which is also the lower
-limit. 
-
    dispersion dispersion
    The argument becomes the new value for the dispersion increase rate,
-normally .000015 s/s. 
-
    freq freq
    The argument becomes the initial value of the frequency offset in
-parts-per-million. 
+limit.
+
    
+
    dispersion dispersion
    
+
    The argument becomes the new value for the dispersion increase rate,
+normally .000015 s/s.
+
    
+
    freq freq
    
+
    The argument becomes the initial value of the frequency offset in
+parts-per-million.
 This overrides the value in the frequency file, if
-present, and avoids the initial training state if it is not. 
-
    huffpuff huffpuff
    The argument becomes the new value for the experimental
-huff-n'-puff filter span, which determines the most recent interval
-the algorithm will search for a minimum delay. 
+present, and avoids the initial training state if it is not.
+
    
+
    huffpuff huffpuff
    
+
    The argument becomes the new value for the experimental
+huff-n’-puff filter span, which determines the most recent interval
+the algorithm will search for a minimum delay.
 The lower limit is
-900 s (15 m), but a more reasonable value is 7200 (2 hours). 
+900 s (15 m), but a more reasonable value is 7200 (2 hours).
 There
 is no default, since the filter is not enabled unless this command
-is given. 
-
    panic panic
    The argument is the panic threshold, normally 1000 s. 
+is given.
+
    
+
    panic panic
    
+
    The argument is the panic threshold, normally 1000 s.
 If set to zero,
 the panic sanity check is disabled and a clock offset of any value will
-be accepted. 
-
    step step
    The argument is the step threshold, which by default is 0.128 s. 
+be accepted.
+
    
+
    step step
    
+
    The argument is the step threshold, which by default is 0.128 s.
 It can
-be set to any positive number in seconds. 
+be set to any positive number in seconds.
 If set to zero, step
-adjustments will never occur. 
+adjustments will never occur.
 Note: The kernel time discipline is
 disabled if the step threshold is set to zero or greater than the
-default. 
-
    stepback stepback
    The argument is the step threshold for the backward direction,
-which by default is 0.128 s. 
+default.
+
    
+
    stepback stepback
    
+
    The argument is the step threshold for the backward direction,
+which by default is 0.128 s.
 It can
-be set to any positive number in seconds. 
+be set to any positive number in seconds.
 If both the forward and backward step thresholds are set to zero, step
-adjustments will never occur. 
+adjustments will never occur.
 Note: The kernel time discipline is
 disabled if
 each direction of step threshold are either
-set to zero or greater than .5 second. 
-
    stepfwd stepfwd
    As for stepback, but for the forward direction. 
-
    stepout stepout
    The argument is the stepout timeout, which by default is 900 s. 
+set to zero or greater than .5 second.
+
    
+
    stepfwd stepfwd
    
+
    As for stepback, but for the forward direction.
+
    
+
    stepout stepout
    
+
    The argument is the stepout timeout, which by default is 900 s.
 It can
-be set to any positive number in seconds. 
+be set to any positive number in seconds.
 If set to zero, the stepout
-pulses will not be suppressed. 
+pulses will not be suppressed.
+
    
 
    
-     
    writevar assocID\ name = value [,...]
    Write (create or update) the specified variables. 
+
    
+
    writevar assocID\ name = value [,...]
    
+
    Write (create or update) the specified variables.
 If the
 assocID
 is zero, the variablea re from the
 system variables
 name space, otherwise they are from the
 peer variables
-name space. 
+name space.
 The
 assocID
-is required, as the same name can occur in both name spaces. 
-
    trap host_address [port port_number] [interface interface_address]
    This command configures a trap receiver at the given host
+is required, as the same name can occur in both name spaces.
+
    
+
    trap host_address [port port_number] [interface interface_address]
    
+
    This command configures a trap receiver at the given host
 address and port number for sending messages with the specified
-local interface address. 
+local interface address.
 If the port number is unspecified, a value
-of 18447 is used. 
+of 18447 is used.
 If the interface address is not specified, the
 message is sent with a source address of the local interface the
-message is sent through. 
+message is sent through.
 Note that on a multihomed host the
-interface used may vary from time to time with routing changes. 
-
    ttl hop ...
    This command specifies a list of TTL values in increasing order. 
-Up to 8 values can be specified. 
+interface used may vary from time to time with routing changes.
+
    
+
    ttl hop ...
    
+
    This command specifies a list of TTL values in increasing order.
+Up to 8 values can be specified.
 In
 manycast
-mode these values are used in-turn in an expanding-ring search. 
+mode these values are used in-turn in an expanding-ring search.
 The default is eight multiples of 32 starting at 31.
-
-     
    The trap receiver will generally log event messages and other
-information from the server in a log file. 
+
    
+
    The trap receiver will generally log event messages and other
+information from the server in a log file.
 While such monitor
 programs may also request their own trap dynamically, configuring a
 trap receiver will ensure that no messages are lost when the server
-is started. 
-
    hop ...
    This command specifies a list of TTL values in increasing order, up to 8
-values can be specified. 
+is started.
+
    
+
    hop ...
    
+
    This command specifies a list of TTL values in increasing order, up to 8
+values can be specified.
 In manycast mode these values are used in turn in
-an expanding-ring search. 
+an expanding-ring search.
 The default is eight multiples of 32 starting at
-31. 
+31.
+
    
 
    
 
-  
    This section was generated by AutoGen,
-using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntp.conf program. 
+
    This section was generated by AutoGen,
+using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntp.conf program.
 This software is released under the NTP license, <http://ntp.org/license>.
-
-
    
-
-
    
-
    
+
    
+
+
+
+
+
+
    • ntp.conf Files:  Files
+
    • ntp.conf See Also:  See Also
+
    • ntp.conf Bugs:  Bugs
+
    • ntp.conf Notes:  Notes
+
    
+
+
    
 
-
    
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp.conf Notes   
    
 
    
-
-
    ntp.conf Files
    
-
-     
    
-
    /etc/ntp.conf
    the default name of the configuration file
-
    ntp.keys
    private MD5 keys
-
    ntpkey
    RSA private key
-
    ntpkey_host
    RSA public key
-
    ntp_dh
    Diffie-Hellman agreement parameters
+
+
    1.1.8 ntp.conf Files
    
+
    
+
    /etc/ntp.conf
    
+
    the default name of the configuration file
+
    
+
    ntp.keys
    
+
    private MD5 keys
+
    
+
    ntpkey
    
+
    RSA private key
+
    
+
    ntpkey_host
    
+
    RSA public key
+
    
+
    ntp_dh
    
+
    Diffie-Hellman agreement parameters
+
    
 
    
-
    
-
    
+
    
 
-
    
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp.conf Notes   
    
 
    
-
-
    ntp.conf See Also
    
-
+
+
    1.1.9 ntp.conf See Also
    
 
    ntpd(1ntpdmdoc),
 ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc),
 ntpq(1ntpqmdoc)
-
-  
    In addition to the manual pages provided,
+
    
+
    In addition to the manual pages provided,
 comprehensive documentation is available on the world wide web
 at
-http://www.ntp.org/. 
+http://www.ntp.org/.
 A snapshot of this documentation is available in HTML format in
-/usr/share/doc/ntp. 
+/usr/share/doc/ntp.
 
    
-
-  

    
-David L. Mills, Network Time Protocol (Version 4), RFC5905
-
    
-
    
-
+
    
 
    
+
    David L. Mills, Network Time Protocol (Version 4), RFC5905
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Previous: , Up: ntp.conf Notes   
    
 
    
-
-
    ntp.conf Bugs
    
-
+
+
    1.1.10 ntp.conf Bugs
    
 
    The syntax checking is not picky; some combinations of
 ridiculous and even hilarious options and modes may not be
 detected.
-
-  
    The
-ntpkey_host
+
    
+
    The
+ntpkey_host
 files are really digital
-certificates. 
+certificates.
 These should be obtained via secure directory
-services when they become universally available. 
-
    
-
    
-
-
    
+services when they become universally available.
+
    
+
    
+
    
+   
    
 
    
-
-
    ntp.conf Notes
    
-
+
+
    1.1.11 ntp.conf Notes
    
 
    This document was derived from FreeBSD.
+
    
+
 
-
 
+
+
diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.conf.man.in b/ntpd/ntp.conf.man.in
index 8f6c99c98..d1d9ca562 100644
--- a/ntpd/ntp.conf.man.in
+++ b/ntpd/ntp.conf.man.in
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH ntp.conf 5 "14 Aug 2018" "4.2.8p12" "File Formats"
+.TH ntp.conf 5 "20 Feb 2019" "4.2.8p13" "File Formats"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-2caiQA/ag-bdaaPA)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:28:54 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:56:43 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions ntp.conf.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.conf.mdoc.in b/ntpd/ntp.conf.mdoc.in
index 3fa7f8d34..a1c795da2 100644
--- a/ntpd/ntp.conf.mdoc.in
+++ b/ntpd/ntp.conf.mdoc.in
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt NTP_CONF 5 File Formats
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntp.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:29:15 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:56:34 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    ntp.conf.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.keys.5man b/ntpd/ntp.keys.5man
index e52d94d3e..2642c5660 100644
--- a/ntpd/ntp.keys.5man
+++ b/ntpd/ntp.keys.5man
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-.TH ntp.keys 5man "14 Aug 2018" "4.2.8p12" "File Formats"
+.TH ntp.keys 5man "20 Feb 2019" "4.2.8p13" "File Formats"
 .\"
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntp.man)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:28:59 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:56:44 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    ntp.keys.def
 .\"  and the template file   agman-file.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.keys.5mdoc b/ntpd/ntp.keys.5mdoc
index 8f4190c81..8a2dbcbc8 100644
--- a/ntpd/ntp.keys.5mdoc
+++ b/ntpd/ntp.keys.5mdoc
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt NTP_KEYS 5mdoc File Formats
-.Os SunOS 5.10
+.Os FreeBSD 11.2-RELEASE_SI
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntp.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:29:18 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:56:35 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    ntp.keys.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-file.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.keys.html b/ntpd/ntp.keys.html
index 25fb763f1..08d89221c 100644
--- a/ntpd/ntp.keys.html
+++ b/ntpd/ntp.keys.html
@@ -1,101 +1,143 @@
-
+
+
+
 
+
 NTP Symmetric Key
-
+
 
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
 
-
-
    NTP Symmetric Key
    
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: (dir),
-Up: (dir)
-
    
-
    
 
-
    NTP's Symmetric Key File User Manual
    
+
+
    NTP Symmetric Key
    
 
-
    This document describes the symmetric key file for the NTP Project's
-ntpd program.
 
-  
    This document applies to version 4.2.8p12 of ntp.keys.
 
-  
    
-
    Short Contents
    
-
+
+
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: (dir)   
    
 
    
+
+
    NTP’s Symmetric Key File User Manual
    
 
-
+
    This document describes the symmetric key file for the NTP Project’s
+ntpd program.
+
    
+
    This document applies to version 4.2.8p13 of ntp.keys.
+
    
+
+
    Short Table of Contents
    
 
-
    
-
    
-Previous: Top,
-Up: Top
-
    
+
    
+
 
    
 
-
-
    Description
    
+
+
+
+
+
    • ntp.keys Description:  
+
    • ntp.keys Notes:  
+
    
+
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Previous: , Up: Top   
    
+
    
+
+
    1 Description
    
 
 
    The name and location of the symmetric key file for ntpd can
 be specified in a configuration file, by default /etc/ntp.keys.
+
    
+
+
+
    • ntp.keys Notes:  
+
    
 
-
    
-
    
+
    
 
-
    
+
    
+
    
+Previous: , Up: ntp.keys Description   
    
 
    
+
+
    1.1 Notes about ntp.keys
    
+
+
 
-
    Notes about ntp.keys
    
 
-
    
 
-  
    This document describes the format of an NTP symmetric key file. 
+
    This document describes the format of an NTP symmetric key file.
 For a description of the use of this type of file, see the
-"Authentication Support"
+"Authentication Support"
 section of the
 ntp.conf(5)
 page.
-
-  
    ntpd(8)
+
    
+
    ntpd(8)
 reads its keys from a file specified using the
 -k
 command line option or the
 keys
-statement in the configuration file. 
+statement in the configuration file.
 While key number 0 is fixed by the NTP standard
 (as 56 zero bits)
 and may not be changed,
 one or more keys numbered between 1 and 65535
 may be arbitrarily set in the keys file.
-
-  
    The key file uses the same comment conventions
-as the configuration file. 
+
    
+
    The key file uses the same comment conventions
+as the configuration file.
 Key entries use a fixed format of the form
+
    
+
    
+
    keyno type key opt_IP_list
+
    
 
-
         keyno type key opt_IP_list
-
    
-  
    where
+
    where
 keyno
 is a positive integer (between 1 and 65535),
 type
@@ -106,111 +148,120 @@ is the key itself, and
 is an optional comma-separated list of IPs
 where the
 keyno
-should be trusted. 
-that are allowed to serve time. 
+should be trusted.
+that are allowed to serve time.
 Each IP in
 opt_IP_list
 may contain an optional
 /subnetbits
 specification which identifies the number of bits for
-the desired subnet of trust. 
+the desired subnet of trust.
 If
 opt_IP_list
 is empty,
 any properly-authenticated message will be
 accepted.
-
-  
    The
+
    
+
    The
 key
 may be given in a format
 controlled by the
 type
-field. 
+field.
 The
 type
 MD5
-is always supported. 
+is always supported.
 If
 ntpd
 was built with the OpenSSL library
-then any digest library supported by that library may be specified. 
+then any digest library supported by that library may be specified.
 However, if compliance with FIPS 140-2 is required the
 type
 must be either
 SHA
 or
 SHA1.
-
-  
    What follows are some key types, and corresponding formats:
-
-     
    
-
    MD5
    The key is 1 to 16 printable characters terminated by
+
    
+
    What follows are some key types, and corresponding formats:
+
    
+
    
+
    MD5
    
+
    The key is 1 to 16 printable characters terminated by
 an EOL,
 whitespace,
 or
 a
 #
-(which is the "start of comment" character).
-
-     
    SHA
    SHA1
    RMD160
    The key is a hex-encoded ASCII string of 40 characters,
-which is truncated as necessary. 
+(which is the "start of comment" character).
+
    
+
    
+
    SHA
    
+
    SHA1
    
+
    RMD160
    
+
    The key is a hex-encoded ASCII string of 40 characters,
+which is truncated as necessary.
+
    
 
    
 
-  
    Note that the keys used by the
+
    Note that the keys used by the
 ntpq(8)
 and
 ntpdc(8)
 programs are checked against passwords
 requested by the programs and entered by hand,
 so it is generally appropriate to specify these keys in ASCII format.
-
-  
    This section was generated by AutoGen,
-using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntp.keys program. 
+
    
+
    This section was generated by AutoGen,
+using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntp.keys program.
 This software is released under the NTP license, <http://ntp.org/license>.
+
    
+
+
+
+
+
    • ntp.keys Files:  Files
+
    • ntp.keys See Also:  See Also
+
    • ntp.keys Notes:  Notes
+
    
 
-
-
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Up: ntp.keys Notes
-
    
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Up: ntp.keys Notes   
    
 
    
-
-
    ntp.keys Files
    
-
-     
    
-
    /etc/ntp.keys
    the default name of the configuration file
+
+
    1.1.1 ntp.keys Files
    
+
    
+
    /etc/ntp.keys
    
+
    the default name of the configuration file
+
    
 
    
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntp.keys Files,
-Up: ntp.keys Notes
-
    
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Previous: , Up: ntp.keys Notes   
    
 
    
-
-
    ntp.keys See Also
    
-
+
+
    1.1.2 ntp.keys See Also
    
 
    ntp.conf(5),
 ntpd(1ntpdmdoc),
 ntpdate(1ntpdatemdoc),
 ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc),
 sntp(1sntpmdoc)
-
    
-
    
-Previous: ntp.keys See Also,
-Up: ntp.keys Notes
-
    
+
    
+
    
+
    
+   
    
 
    
-
-
    ntp.keys Notes
    
-
+
+
    1.1.3 ntp.keys Notes
    
 
    This document was derived from FreeBSD.
+
    
+
 
-
 
+
+
diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.keys.man.in b/ntpd/ntp.keys.man.in
index fd85bb8f5..9d8b995ca 100644
--- a/ntpd/ntp.keys.man.in
+++ b/ntpd/ntp.keys.man.in
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-.TH ntp.keys 5 "14 Aug 2018" "4.2.8p12" "File Formats"
+.TH ntp.keys 5 "20 Feb 2019" "4.2.8p13" "File Formats"
 .\"
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntp.man)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:28:59 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:56:44 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    ntp.keys.def
 .\"  and the template file   agman-file.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.keys.mdoc.in b/ntpd/ntp.keys.mdoc.in
index 26bb78ece..1bc36e3ef 100644
--- a/ntpd/ntp.keys.mdoc.in
+++ b/ntpd/ntp.keys.mdoc.in
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt NTP_KEYS 5 File Formats
-.Os SunOS 5.10
+.Os FreeBSD 11.2-RELEASE_SI
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntp.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:29:18 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:56:35 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    ntp.keys.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-file.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/ntpd/ntp_control.c b/ntpd/ntp_control.c
index 63f9980ac..49a197ed7 100644
--- a/ntpd/ntp_control.c
+++ b/ntpd/ntp_control.c
@@ -3448,11 +3448,11 @@ write_variables(
 	 * Look through the variables. Dump out at the first sign of
 	 * trouble.
 	 */
-	while ((v = ctl_getitem(sys_var, &valuep)) != 0) {
+	while ((v = ctl_getitem(sys_var, &valuep)) != NULL) {
 		ext_var = 0;
 		if (v->flags & EOV) {
-			if ((v = ctl_getitem(ext_sys_var, &valuep)) !=
-			    0) {
+			v = ctl_getitem(ext_sys_var, &valuep);
+			if (v != NULL) {
 				if (v->flags & EOV) {
 					ctl_error(CERR_UNKNOWNVAR);
 					return;
@@ -3466,16 +3466,24 @@ write_variables(
 			ctl_error(CERR_PERMISSION);
 			return;
 		}
-		if (!ext_var && (*valuep == '\0' || !atoint(valuep,
-							    &val))) {
+		/* [bug 3565] writing makes sense only if we *have* a
+		 * value in the packet!
+		 */
+		if (valuep == NULL) {
 			ctl_error(CERR_BADFMT);
 			return;
 		}
-		if (!ext_var && (val & ~LEAP_NOTINSYNC) != 0) {
-			ctl_error(CERR_BADVALUE);
-			return;
+		if (!ext_var) {
+			if ( !(*valuep && atoint(valuep, &val))) {
+				ctl_error(CERR_BADFMT);
+				return;
+			}
+			if ((val & ~LEAP_NOTINSYNC) != 0) {
+				ctl_error(CERR_BADVALUE);
+				return;
+			}
 		}
-
+		
 		if (ext_var) {
 			octets = strlen(v->text) + strlen(valuep) + 2;
 			vareqv = emalloc(octets);
diff --git a/ntpd/ntpd-opts.c b/ntpd/ntpd-opts.c
index 82656cf61..f07269d00 100644
--- a/ntpd/ntpd-opts.c
+++ b/ntpd/ntpd-opts.c
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
 /*
  *  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntpd-opts.c)
  *
- *  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:27:45 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+ *  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:56:15 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
  *  From the definitions    ntpd-opts.def
  *  and the template file   options
  *
- * Generated from AutoOpts 41:0:16 templates.
+ * Generated from AutoOpts 41:1:16 templates.
  *
  *  AutoOpts is a copyrighted work.  This source file is not encumbered
  *  by AutoOpts licensing, but is provided under the licensing terms chosen
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ extern FILE * option_usage_fp;
  *  static const strings for ntpd options
  */
 static char const ntpd_opt_strs[3132] =
-/*     0 */ "ntpd 4.2.8p12\n"
+/*     0 */ "ntpd 4.2.8p13\n"
             "Copyright (C) 1992-2017 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n"
             "This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n"
             "redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n"
@@ -205,12 +205,12 @@ static char const ntpd_opt_strs[3132] =
 /*  2901 */ "output version information and exit\0"
 /*  2937 */ "version\0"
 /*  2945 */ "NTPD\0"
-/*  2950 */ "ntpd - NTP daemon program - Ver. 4.2.8p12\n"
+/*  2950 */ "ntpd - NTP daemon program - Ver. 4.2.8p13\n"
             "Usage:  %s [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]... \\\n"
             "\t\t[  ...  ]\n\0"
 /*  3082 */ "http://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org\0"
 /*  3116 */ "\n\0"
-/*  3118 */ "ntpd 4.2.8p12";
+/*  3118 */ "ntpd 4.2.8p13";
 
 /**
  *  ipv4 option description with
@@ -1529,7 +1529,7 @@ static void bogus_function(void) {
      translate option names.
    */
   /* referenced via ntpdOptions.pzCopyright */
-  puts(_("ntpd 4.2.8p12\n\
+  puts(_("ntpd 4.2.8p13\n\
 Copyright (C) 1992-2017 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n\
 This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n\
 redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n\
@@ -1670,7 +1670,7 @@ implied warranty.\n"));
   puts(_("output version information and exit"));
 
   /* referenced via ntpdOptions.pzUsageTitle */
-  puts(_("ntpd - NTP daemon program - Ver. 4.2.8p12\n\
+  puts(_("ntpd - NTP daemon program - Ver. 4.2.8p13\n\
 Usage:  %s [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]... \\\n\
 \t\t[  ...  ]\n"));
 
@@ -1678,7 +1678,7 @@ Usage:  %s [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]... \\\n\
   puts(_("\n"));
 
   /* referenced via ntpdOptions.pzFullVersion */
-  puts(_("ntpd 4.2.8p12"));
+  puts(_("ntpd 4.2.8p13"));
 
   /* referenced via ntpdOptions.pzFullUsage */
   puts(_("<<>>"));
diff --git a/ntpd/ntpd-opts.h b/ntpd/ntpd-opts.h
index 60299c6bb..e7e8a608d 100644
--- a/ntpd/ntpd-opts.h
+++ b/ntpd/ntpd-opts.h
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
 /*
  *  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntpd-opts.h)
  *
- *  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:27:44 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+ *  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:56:15 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
  *  From the definitions    ntpd-opts.def
  *  and the template file   options
  *
- * Generated from AutoOpts 41:0:16 templates.
+ * Generated from AutoOpts 41:1:16 templates.
  *
  *  AutoOpts is a copyrighted work.  This header file is not encumbered
  *  by AutoOpts licensing, but is provided under the licensing terms chosen
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
  *  tolerable version is at least as old as what was current when the header
  *  template was released.
  */
-#define AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION 167936
+#define AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION 167937
 #if (AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION < OPTIONS_MINIMUM_VERSION) \
  || (AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION > OPTIONS_STRUCT_VERSION)
 # error option template version mismatches autoopts/options.h header
@@ -106,9 +106,9 @@ typedef enum {
 /** count of all options for ntpd */
 #define OPTION_CT    38
 /** ntpd version */
-#define NTPD_VERSION       "4.2.8p12"
+#define NTPD_VERSION       "4.2.8p13"
 /** Full ntpd version text */
-#define NTPD_FULL_VERSION  "ntpd 4.2.8p12"
+#define NTPD_FULL_VERSION  "ntpd 4.2.8p13"
 
 /**
  *  Interface defines for all options.  Replace "n" with the UPPER_CASED
diff --git a/ntpd/ntpd.1ntpdman b/ntpd/ntpd.1ntpdman
index c9e93181e..92d053e40 100644
--- a/ntpd/ntpd.1ntpdman
+++ b/ntpd/ntpd.1ntpdman
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH ntpd 1ntpdman "14 Aug 2018" "4.2.8p12" "User Commands"
+.TH ntpd 1ntpdman "20 Feb 2019" "4.2.8p13" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-jbaWTB/ag-ubaOSB)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:29:02 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:56:46 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions ntpd-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/ntpd/ntpd.1ntpdmdoc b/ntpd/ntpd.1ntpdmdoc
index 33a903248..962089892 100644
--- a/ntpd/ntpd.1ntpdmdoc
+++ b/ntpd/ntpd.1ntpdmdoc
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt NTPD 1ntpdmdoc User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntpd-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:29:20 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:56:37 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    ntpd-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/ntpd/ntpd.html b/ntpd/ntpd.html
index 64198eff7..50a3ac868 100644
--- a/ntpd/ntpd.html
+++ b/ntpd/ntpd.html
@@ -1,128 +1,179 @@
-
+
+
+
 
-ntpd: Network Time Protocol (NTP) Daemon User's Manual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+ntpd: Network Time Protocol (NTP) Daemon User’s Manual
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
 
-
-
    ntpd: Network Time Protocol (NTP) Daemon User's Manual
    
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: (dir),
-Up: (dir)
-
    
-
    
 
-
    ntpd: Network Time Protocol (NTP) Daemon User Manual
    
+
+
    ntpd: Network Time Protocol (NTP) Daemon User’s Manual
    
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: (dir)   
    
+
    
+
+
    ntpd: Network Time Protocol (NTP) Daemon User Manual
    
 
 
    The ntpd program is an operating system daemon that synchronizes the
-system clock to remote NTP time servers or local reference clocks. 
+system clock to remote NTP time servers or local reference clocks.
 It is a complete implementation of NTP version 4 defined by RFC-5905, but
 also retains compatible with version 3 defined by RFC-1305 and versions
-1 and 2, defined by RFC-1059 and RFC-1119, respectively. 
+1 and 2, defined by RFC-1059 and RFC-1119, respectively.
 The program can operate in any of several modes, including client/server,
 symmetric and broadcast modes, and with both symmetric-key and public-key
 cryptography.
+
    
+
    This document applies to version 4.2.8p13 of ntpd.
+
    
+
+
    Short Table of Contents
    
+
+
    
+
+
    
 
-  
    This document applies to version 4.2.8p12 of ntpd.
 
-
    
+
+
+
+
+
    • ntpd Description:  Description
+
    • ntpd Invocation:  Invoking ntpd
+
    • Usage:  Usage
+
    
 
-
    
-
    
+
    
 
-
    
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Up: Top   
    
 
    
-
-
-
    Description
    
+
+
    1 Description
    
 
 
    The ntpd program ordinarily requires
-a configuration file described at ntp.conf. 
+a configuration file described at ‘ntp.conf’.
 This configuration file contains configuration commands described on
-the pages listed above. 
+the pages listed above.
 However a client can discover remote servers and configure them
-automatically. 
+automatically.
 This makes it possible to deploy a fleet of workstations without
 specifying configuration details specific to the local environment.
-
-  
    The ntpd program normally operates continuously while adjusting the
+
    
+
    The ntpd program normally operates continuously while adjusting the
 system time and frequency, but in some cases this might not be
-practical. 
+practical.
 With the -q option ntpd operates as in continuous mode, but
-exits just after setting the clock for the first time. 
+exits just after setting the clock for the first time.
 Most applications will probably want to specify the iburst
-option with the server command. 
+option with the server command.
 With this option an initial volley of messages is exchanged to
-groom the data and set the clock in about ten seconds' time. 
-If nothing is heard after a few minutes' time,
+groom the data and set the clock in about ten seconds’ time.
+If nothing is heard after a few minutes’ time,
 the daemon times out and exits without setting the clock.
-
-
    
-
    
+
    
+
+
+
+
    • ntpd Invocation:  
+
    • Usage:  
+
    
+
+
    
 
-
    
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Description   
    
 
    
+
+
    1.1 Invoking ntpd
    
+
+
 
-
    Invoking ntpd
    
 
-
    
 
-  
    The
+
    The
 ntpd
 utility is an operating system daemon which sets
 and maintains the system time of day in synchronism with Internet
-standard time servers. 
+standard time servers.
 It is a complete implementation of the
 Network Time Protocol (NTP) version 4, as defined by RFC-5905,
 but also retains compatibility with
 version 3, as defined by RFC-1305, and versions 1
 and 2, as defined by RFC-1059 and RFC-1119, respectively.
-
-  
    The
+
    
+
    The
 ntpd
 utility does most computations in 64-bit floating point
 arithmetic and does relatively clumsy 64-bit fixed point operations
 only when necessary to preserve the ultimate precision, about 232
-picoseconds. 
+picoseconds.
 While the ultimate precision is not achievable with
 ordinary workstations and networks of today, it may be required
 with future gigahertz CPU clocks and gigabit LANs.
-
-  
    Ordinarily,
+
    
+
    Ordinarily,
 ntpd
 reads the
 ntp.conf(5)
 configuration file at startup time in order to determine the
-synchronization sources and operating modes. 
+synchronization sources and operating modes.
 It is also possible to
 specify a working, although limited, configuration entirely on the
-command line, obviating the need for a configuration file. 
+command line, obviating the need for a configuration file.
 This may
 be particularly useful when the local host is to be configured as a
 broadcast/multicast client, with all peers being determined by
 listening to broadcasts at run time.
-
-  
    If NetInfo support is built into
+
    
+
    If NetInfo support is built into
 ntpd
 then
 ntpd
@@ -133,8 +184,8 @@ file cannot be read and no file is
 specified by the
 -c
 option.
-
-  
    Various internal
+
    
+
    Various internal
 ntpd
 variables can be displayed and
 configuration options altered while the
@@ -145,8 +196,8 @@ using the
 and
 ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc)
 utility programs.
-
-  
    When
+
    
+
    When
 ntpd
 starts it looks at the value of
 umask(2),
@@ -155,72 +206,110 @@ and if zero
 will set the
 umask(2)
 to 022.
-
-  
    This section was generated by AutoGen,
-using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntpd program. 
+
    
+
    This section was generated by AutoGen,
+using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntpd program.
 This software is released under the NTP license, <http://ntp.org/license>.
-
-
    
-
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+
    
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    • ntpd usage:  ntpd help/usage (--help)
+
    • ntpd ipv4:  ipv4 option (-4)
+
    • ntpd ipv6:  ipv6 option (-6)
+
    • ntpd authreq:  authreq option (-a)
+
    • ntpd authnoreq:  authnoreq option (-A)
+
    • ntpd configfile:  configfile option (-c)
+
    • ntpd driftfile:  driftfile option (-f)
+
    • ntpd panicgate:  panicgate option (-g)
+
    • ntpd force-step-once:  force-step-once option (-G)
+
    • ntpd jaildir:  jaildir option (-i)
+
    • ntpd interface:  interface option (-I)
+
    • ntpd keyfile:  keyfile option (-k)
+
    • ntpd logfile:  logfile option (-l)
+
    • ntpd novirtualips:  novirtualips option (-L)
+
    • ntpd modifymmtimer:  modifymmtimer option (-M)
+
    • ntpd nice:  nice option (-N)
+
    • ntpd pidfile:  pidfile option (-p)
+
    • ntpd priority:  priority option (-P)
+
    • ntpd quit:  quit option (-q)
+
    • ntpd propagationdelay:  propagationdelay option (-r)
+
    • ntpd saveconfigquit:  saveconfigquit option
+
    • ntpd statsdir:  statsdir option (-s)
+
    • ntpd trustedkey:  trustedkey option (-t)
+
    • ntpd user:  user option (-u)
+
    • ntpd updateinterval:  updateinterval option (-U)
+
    • ntpd wait-sync:  wait-sync option (-w)
+
    • ntpd slew:  slew option (-x)
+
    • ntpd usepcc:  usepcc option
+
    • ntpd pccfreq:  pccfreq option
+
    • ntpd mdns:  mdns option (-m)
+
    • ntpd config:  presetting/configuring ntpd
+
    • ntpd exit status:  exit status
+
    • ntpd Usage:  Usage
+
    • ntpd Files:  Files
+
    • ntpd See Also:  See Also
+
    • ntpd Bugs:  Bugs
+
    • ntpd Notes:  Notes
+
    
+
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
-
-
    ntpd help/usage (--help)
    
-
-
    
-This is the automatically generated usage text for ntpd.
-
-  
    The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
-(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
-the usage text by passing it through a pager program. 
+
+
    1.1.1 ntpd help/usage (--help)
    
+
+
+
    This is the automatically generated usage text for ntpd.
+
    
+
    The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
+(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
+the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
 more-help is disabled on platforms without a working
 fork(2) function.  The PAGER environment variable is
-used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
+used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
 with a status code of 0.
-
-
    ntpd - NTP daemon program - Ver. 4.2.8p11
+
    
+
    
+
    ntpd - NTP daemon program - Ver. 4.2.8p12
 Usage:  ntpd [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... \
                 [ <server1> ... <serverN> ]
   Flg Arg Option-Name    Description
@@ -289,149 +378,143 @@ The following option preset mechanisms are supported:
  - examining environment variables named NTPD_*
 
 Please send bug reports to:  <http://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org>
-
    
-  
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd usage,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
-
    
-
-
    ipv4 option (-4)
    
+
    
 
-
    
-This is the “force ipv4 dns name resolution” option.
-
-
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
      
-
    • must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
-ipv6. 
-
    
-
-  
    Force DNS resolution of following host names on the command line
-to the IPv4 namespace. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd ipv4,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
-
-
    ipv6 option (-6)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “force ipv6 dns name resolution” option.
-
-
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
      
-
    • must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
-ipv4. 
-
    
-
-  
    Force DNS resolution of following host names on the command line
-to the IPv6 namespace. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd ipv6,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+
+
    1.1.2 ipv4 option (-4)
    
+
+
+
    This is the “force ipv4 dns name resolution” option.
+
    
+
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
      
+
    •  must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
+ipv6.
+
    
+
+
    Force DNS resolution of following host names on the command line
+to the IPv4 namespace.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
-
-
    authreq option (-a)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “require crypto authentication” option.
-
-
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
      
-
    • must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
-authnoreq. 
-
    
-
-  
    Require cryptographic authentication for broadcast client,
-multicast client and symmetric passive associations. 
-This is the default. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd authreq,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+
+
    1.1.3 ipv6 option (-6)
    
+
+
+
    This is the “force ipv6 dns name resolution” option.
+
    
+
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
      
+
    •  must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
+ipv4.
+
    
+
+
    Force DNS resolution of following host names on the command line
+to the IPv6 namespace.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
-
-
    authnoreq option (-A)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “do not require crypto authentication” option.
-
-
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
      
-
    • must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
-authreq. 
-
    
-
-  
    Do not require cryptographic authentication for broadcast client,
-multicast client and symmetric passive associations. 
-This is almost never a good idea. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd authnoreq,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+
+
    1.1.4 authreq option (-a)
    
+
+
+
    This is the “require crypto authentication” option.
+
    
+
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
      
+
    •  must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
+authnoreq.
+
    
+
+
    Require cryptographic authentication for broadcast client,
+multicast client and symmetric passive associations.
+This is the default.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
+
+
    1.1.5 authnoreq option (-A)
    
+
+
+
    This is the “do not require crypto authentication” option.
+
    
+
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
      
+
    •  must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
+authreq.
+
    
+
+
    Do not require cryptographic authentication for broadcast client,
+multicast client and symmetric passive associations.
+This is almost never a good idea.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
+
    
+
+
    1.1.6 configfile option (-c)
    
+
 
-
    configfile option (-c)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “configuration file name” option. 
-This option takes a string argument. 
+
    This is the “configuration file name” option.
+This option takes a string argument.
 The name and path of the configuration file,
-/etc/ntp.conf
-by default. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd configfile,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+/etc/ntp.conf
+by default.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
+
+
    1.1.7 driftfile option (-f)
    
+
 
-
    driftfile option (-f)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “frequency drift file name” option. 
-This option takes a string argument. 
+
    This is the “frequency drift file name” option.
+This option takes a string argument.
 The name and path of the frequency file,
-/etc/ntp.drift
-by default. 
+/etc/ntp.drift
+by default.
 This is the same operation as the
 driftfile driftfile
 configuration specification in the
-/etc/ntp.conf
-file. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd driftfile,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+/etc/ntp.conf
+file.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
-
-
    panicgate option (-g)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “allow the first adjustment to be big” option.
-
-
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
      
-
    • may appear an unlimited number of times. 
-
    
-
-  
    Normally,
+
+
    1.1.8 panicgate option (-g)
    
+
+
+
    This is the “allow the first adjustment to be big” option.
+
    
+
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
      
+
    •  may appear an unlimited number of times.
+
    
+
+
    Normally,
 ntpd
 exits with a message to the system log if the offset exceeds the panic threshold, which is 1000 s by default. This option allows the time to be set to any value without restriction; however, this can happen only once. If the threshold is exceeded after that,
 ntpd
@@ -439,581 +522,579 @@ will exit with a message to the system log. This option can be used with the
 -q
 and
 -x
-options. 
+options.
 See the
 tinker
-configuration file directive for other options. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd panicgate,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+configuration file directive for other options.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
+
+
    1.1.9 force-step-once option (-G)
    
+
 
-
    force-step-once option (-G)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “step any initial offset correction.” option. 
+
    This is the “step any initial offset correction.” option.
 Normally,
 ntpd
 steps the time if the time offset exceeds the step threshold,
-which is 128 ms by default, and otherwise slews the time. 
+which is 128 ms by default, and otherwise slews the time.
 This option forces the initial offset correction to be stepped,
-so the highest time accuracy can be achieved quickly. 
+so the highest time accuracy can be achieved quickly.
 However, this may also cause the time to be stepped back
 so this option must not be used if
-applications requiring monotonic time are running. 
-See the tinker configuration file directive for other options. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd force-step-once,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+applications requiring monotonic time are running.
+See the tinker configuration file directive for other options.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
+
+
    1.1.10 jaildir option (-i)
    
+
 
-
    jaildir option (-i)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “jail directory” option. 
+
    This is the “jail directory” option.
 This option takes a string argument.
+
    
+
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
      
+
    •  must be compiled in by defining HAVE_DROPROOT during the compilation.
+
    
 
-
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
      
-
    • must be compiled in by defining HAVE_DROPROOT during the compilation. 
-
    
-
-  
    Chroot the server to the directory
+
    Chroot the server to the directory
 jaildir
-. 
-This option also implies that the server attempts to drop root privileges at startup. 
+.
+This option also implies that the server attempts to drop root privileges at startup.
 You may need to also specify a
 -u
-option. 
+option.
 This option is only available if the OS supports adjusting the clock
-without full root privileges. 
+without full root privileges.
 This option is supported under NetBSD (configure with
 --enable-clockctl) or Linux (configure with
---enable-linuxcaps) or Solaris (configure with --enable-solarisprivs). 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd jaildir,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+--enable-linuxcaps) or Solaris (configure with --enable-solarisprivs).
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
-
-
    interface option (-I)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “listen on an interface name or address” option. 
-This option takes a string argument iface.
-
-
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
      
-
    • may appear an unlimited number of times. 
-
    
-
-  
    Open the network address given, or all the addresses associated with the
+
+
    1.1.11 interface option (-I)
    
+
+
+
    This is the “listen on an interface name or address” option.
+This option takes a string argument iface.
+
    
+
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
      
+
    •  may appear an unlimited number of times.
+
    
+
+
    Open the network address given, or all the addresses associated with the
 given interface name.  This option may appear multiple times.  This option
-also implies not opening other addresses, except wildcard and localhost. 
+also implies not opening other addresses, except wildcard and localhost.
 This option is deprecated. Please consider using the configuration file
-interface command, which is more versatile. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd interface,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
-
    
-
-
    keyfile option (-k)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “path to symmetric keys” option. 
-This option takes a string argument. 
-Specify the name and path of the symmetric key file. 
-/etc/ntp.keys
-is the default. 
+interface command, which is more versatile.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
+
    
+
+
    1.1.12 keyfile option (-k)
    
+
+
+
    This is the “path to symmetric keys” option.
+This option takes a string argument.
+Specify the name and path of the symmetric key file.
+/etc/ntp.keys
+is the default.
 This is the same operation as the
 keys keyfile
-configuration file directive. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd keyfile,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
-
    
-
-
    logfile option (-l)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “path to the log file” option. 
-This option takes a string argument. 
-Specify the name and path of the log file. 
-The default is the system log file. 
+configuration file directive.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
+
    
+
+
    1.1.13 logfile option (-l)
    
+
+
+
    This is the “path to the log file” option.
+This option takes a string argument.
+Specify the name and path of the log file.
+The default is the system log file.
 This is the same operation as the
 logfile logfile
-configuration file directive. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd logfile,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+configuration file directive.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
+
+
    1.1.14 novirtualips option (-L)
    
+
 
-
    novirtualips option (-L)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “do not listen to virtual interfaces” option. 
+
    This is the “do not listen to virtual interfaces” option.
 Do not listen to virtual interfaces, defined as those with
 names containing a colon.  This option is deprecated.  Please
 consider using the configuration file interface command, which
-is more versatile. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd novirtualips,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+is more versatile.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
-
-
    modifymmtimer option (-M)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “modify multimedia timer (windows only)” option.
-
-
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
      
-
    • must be compiled in by defining SYS_WINNT during the compilation. 
-
    
-
-  
    Set the Windows Multimedia Timer to highest resolution.  This
+
+
    1.1.15 modifymmtimer option (-M)
    
+
+
+
    This is the “modify multimedia timer (windows only)” option.
+
    
+
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
      
+
    •  must be compiled in by defining SYS_WINNT during the compilation.
+
    
+
+
    Set the Windows Multimedia Timer to highest resolution.  This
 ensures the resolution does not change while ntpd is running,
-avoiding timekeeping glitches associated with changes. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd modifymmtimer,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+avoiding timekeeping glitches associated with changes.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
+
+
    1.1.16 nice option (-N)
    
+
 
-
    nice option (-N)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “run at high priority” option. 
+
    This is the “run at high priority” option.
 To the extent permitted by the operating system, run
 ntpd
-at the highest priority. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd nice,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+at the highest priority.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
+
+
    1.1.17 pidfile option (-p)
    
+
 
-
    pidfile option (-p)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “path to the pid file” option. 
-This option takes a string argument. 
+
    This is the “path to the pid file” option.
+This option takes a string argument.
 Specify the name and path of the file used to record
-ntpd's
-process ID. 
+ntpd’s
+process ID.
 This is the same operation as the
 pidfile pidfile
-configuration file directive. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd pidfile,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+configuration file directive.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
+
+
    1.1.18 priority option (-P)
    
+
 
-
    priority option (-P)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “process priority” option. 
-This option takes a number argument. 
+
    This is the “process priority” option.
+This option takes a number argument.
 To the extent permitted by the operating system, run
 ntpd
 at the specified
 sched_setscheduler(SCHED_FIFO)
-priority. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd priority,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+priority.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
-
-
    quit option (-q)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “set the time and quit” option.
-
-
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
      
-
    • must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
-saveconfigquit, wait-sync. 
-
    
-
-  
    ntpd
+
+
    1.1.19 quit option (-q)
    
+
+
+
    This is the “set the time and quit” option.
+
    
+
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
      
+
    •  must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
+saveconfigquit, wait-sync.
+
    
+
+
    ntpd
 will not daemonize and will exit after the clock is first
 synchronized.  This behavior mimics that of the
 ntpdate
-program, which will soon be replaced with a shell script. 
+program, which will soon be replaced with a shell script.
 The
 -g
 and
 -x
-options can be used with this option. 
-Note: The kernel time discipline is disabled with this option. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd quit,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
-
    
-
-
    propagationdelay option (-r)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “broadcast/propagation delay” option. 
-This option takes a string argument. 
-Specify the default propagation delay from the broadcast/multicast server to this client. This is necessary only if the delay cannot be computed automatically by the protocol. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd propagationdelay,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
-
    
-
-
    saveconfigquit option
    
-
-
    
-This is the “save parsed configuration and quit” option. 
-This option takes a string argument.
+options can be used with this option.
+Note: The kernel time discipline is disabled with this option.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
+
    
+
+
    1.1.20 propagationdelay option (-r)
    
+
 
-
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
      
-
    • must be compiled in by defining SAVECONFIG during the compilation. 
-
    • must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
-quit, wait-sync. 
-
    
+
    This is the “broadcast/propagation delay” option.
+This option takes a string argument.
+Specify the default propagation delay from the broadcast/multicast server to this client. This is necessary only if the delay cannot be computed automatically by the protocol.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
+
    
+
+
    1.1.21 saveconfigquit option
    
+
 
-  
    Cause ntpd to parse its startup configuration file and save an
+
    This is the “save parsed configuration and quit” option.
+This option takes a string argument.
+
    
+
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
      
+
    •  must be compiled in by defining SAVECONFIG during the compilation.
+
    •  must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
+quit, wait-sync.
+
    
+
+
    Cause ntpd to parse its startup configuration file and save an
 equivalent to the given filename and exit.  This option was
-designed for automated testing. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd saveconfigquit,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+designed for automated testing.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
+
+
    1.1.22 statsdir option (-s)
    
+
 
-
    statsdir option (-s)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “statistics file location” option. 
-This option takes a string argument. 
-Specify the directory path for files created by the statistics facility. 
+
    This is the “statistics file location” option.
+This option takes a string argument.
+Specify the directory path for files created by the statistics facility.
 This is the same operation as the
 statsdir statsdir
-configuration file directive. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd statsdir,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+configuration file directive.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
-
-
    trustedkey option (-t)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “trusted key number” option. 
-This option takes a string argument tkey.
-
-
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
      
-
    • may appear an unlimited number of times. 
-
    
-
-  
    Add the specified key number to the trusted key list. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd trustedkey,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+
+
    1.1.23 trustedkey option (-t)
    
+
+
+
    This is the “trusted key number” option.
+This option takes a string argument tkey.
+
    
+
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
      
+
    •  may appear an unlimited number of times.
+
    
+
+
    Add the specified key number to the trusted key list.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
+
+
    1.1.24 user option (-u)
    
+
 
-
    user option (-u)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “run as userid (or userid:groupid)” option. 
+
    This is the “run as userid (or userid:groupid)” option.
 This option takes a string argument.
+
    
+
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
      
+
    •  must be compiled in by defining HAVE_DROPROOT during the compilation.
+
    
 
-
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
      
-
    • must be compiled in by defining HAVE_DROPROOT during the compilation. 
-
    
-
-  
    Specify a user, and optionally a group, to switch to. 
+
    Specify a user, and optionally a group, to switch to.
 This option is only available if the OS supports adjusting the clock
-without full root privileges. 
+without full root privileges.
 This option is supported under NetBSD (configure with
 --enable-clockctl) or Linux (configure with
---enable-linuxcaps) or Solaris (configure with --enable-solarisprivs). 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd user,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+--enable-linuxcaps) or Solaris (configure with --enable-solarisprivs).
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
+
+
    1.1.25 updateinterval option (-U)
    
+
 
-
    updateinterval option (-U)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “interval in seconds between scans for new or dropped interfaces” option. 
-This option takes a number argument. 
-Give the time in seconds between two scans for new or dropped interfaces. 
+
    This is the “interval in seconds between scans for new or dropped interfaces” option.
+This option takes a number argument.
+Give the time in seconds between two scans for new or dropped interfaces.
 For systems with routing socket support the scans will be performed shortly after the interface change
-has been detected by the system. 
-Use 0 to disable scanning. 60 seconds is the minimum time between scans. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd updateinterval,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+has been detected by the system.
+Use 0 to disable scanning. 60 seconds is the minimum time between scans.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
+
+
    1.1.26 wait-sync option (-w)
    
+
 
-
    wait-sync option (-w)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “seconds to wait for first clock sync” option. 
+
    This is the “seconds to wait for first clock sync” option.
 This option takes a number argument.
-
-
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
      
-
    • must be compiled in by defining HAVE_WORKING_FORK during the compilation. 
-
    • must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
-nofork, quit, saveconfigquit. 
-
    
-
-  
    If greater than zero, alters ntpd's behavior when forking to
+
    
+
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
      
+
    •  must be compiled in by defining HAVE_WORKING_FORK during the compilation.
+
    •  must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
+nofork, quit, saveconfigquit.
+
    
+
+
    If greater than zero, alters ntpd’s behavior when forking to
 daemonize.  Instead of exiting with status 0 immediately after
 the fork, the parent waits up to the specified number of
 seconds for the child to first synchronize the clock.  The exit
 status is zero (success) if the clock was synchronized,
-otherwise it is ETIMEDOUT. 
+otherwise it is ETIMEDOUT.
 This provides the option for a script starting ntpd to easily
-wait for the first set of the clock before proceeding. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd wait-sync,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
-
    
-
-
    slew option (-x)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “slew up to 600 seconds” option. 
-Normally, the time is slewed if the offset is less than the step threshold, which is 128 ms by default, and stepped if above the threshold. 
-This option sets the threshold to 600 s, which is well within the accuracy window to set the clock manually. 
-Note: Since the slew rate of typical Unix kernels is limited to 0.5 ms/s, each second of adjustment requires an amortization interval of 2000 s. 
-Thus, an adjustment as much as 600 s will take almost 14 days to complete. 
+wait for the first set of the clock before proceeding.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
+
    
+
+
    1.1.27 slew option (-x)
    
+
+
+
    This is the “slew up to 600 seconds” option.
+Normally, the time is slewed if the offset is less than the step threshold, which is 128 ms by default, and stepped if above the threshold.
+This option sets the threshold to 600 s, which is well within the accuracy window to set the clock manually.
+Note: Since the slew rate of typical Unix kernels is limited to 0.5 ms/s, each second of adjustment requires an amortization interval of 2000 s.
+Thus, an adjustment as much as 600 s will take almost 14 days to complete.
 This option can be used with the
 -g
 and
 -q
-options. 
+options.
 See the
 tinker
-configuration file directive for other options. 
-Note: The kernel time discipline is disabled with this option. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd slew,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+configuration file directive for other options.
+Note: The kernel time discipline is disabled with this option.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
-
-
    usepcc option
    
-
-
    
-This is the “use cpu cycle counter (windows only)” option.
-
-
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
      
-
    • must be compiled in by defining SYS_WINNT during the compilation. 
-
    
-
-  
    Attempt to substitute the CPU counter for QueryPerformanceCounter. 
+
+
    1.1.28 usepcc option
    
+
+
+
    This is the “use cpu cycle counter (windows only)” option.
+
    
+
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
      
+
    •  must be compiled in by defining SYS_WINNT during the compilation.
+
    
+
+
    Attempt to substitute the CPU counter for QueryPerformanceCounter.
 The CPU counter and QueryPerformanceCounter are compared, and if
 they have the same frequency, the CPU counter (RDTSC on x86) is
-used directly, saving the overhead of a system call. 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd usepcc,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+used directly, saving the overhead of a system call.
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
+
+
    1.1.29 pccfreq option
    
+
 
-
    pccfreq option
    
-
-
    
-This is the “force cpu cycle counter use (windows only)” option. 
+
    This is the “force cpu cycle counter use (windows only)” option.
 This option takes a string argument.
+
    
+
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
      
+
    •  must be compiled in by defining SYS_WINNT during the compilation.
+
    
 
-
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
      
-
    • must be compiled in by defining SYS_WINNT during the compilation. 
-
    
-
-  
    Force substitution the CPU counter for QueryPerformanceCounter. 
+
    Force substitution the CPU counter for QueryPerformanceCounter.
 The CPU counter (RDTSC on x86) is used unconditionally with the
-given frequency (in Hz). 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd pccfreq,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+given frequency (in Hz).
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
-
-
    mdns option (-m)
    
-
-
    
-This is the “register with mdns as a ntp server” option.
-
-
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
      
-
    • must be compiled in by defining HAVE_DNSREGISTRATION during the compilation. 
-
    
-
-  
    Registers as an NTP server with the local mDNS server which allows
+
+
    1.1.30 mdns option (-m)
    
+
+
+
    This is the “register with mdns as a ntp server” option.
+
    
+
    This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
      
+
    •  must be compiled in by defining HAVE_DNSREGISTRATION during the compilation.
+
    
+
+
    Registers as an NTP server with the local mDNS server which allows
 the server to be discovered via mDNS client lookup.
+
    
 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd mdns,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
-
-
    presetting/configuring ntpd
    
+
+
    1.1.31 presetting/configuring ntpd
    
 
 
    Any option that is not marked as not presettable may be preset by
 loading values from environment variables named NTPD and NTPD_<OPTION_NAME>.  <OPTION_NAME> must be one of
-the options listed above in upper case and segmented with underscores. 
+the options listed above in upper case and segmented with underscores.
 The NTPD variable will be tokenized and parsed like
 the command line.  The remaining variables are tested for existence and their
 values are treated like option arguments.
+
    
 
-  
    The command line options relating to configuration and/or usage help are:
-
-
    version (-)
    
+
    The command line options relating to configuration and/or usage help are:
+
    
+
+
    version (-)
    
 
 
    Print the program version to standard out, optionally with licensing
 information, then exit 0.  The optional argument specifies how much licensing
-detail to provide.  The default is to print just the version.  The licensing infomation may be selected with an option argument. 
+detail to provide.  The default is to print just the version.  The licensing infomation may be selected with an option argument.
 Only the first letter of the argument is examined:
-
-     
    
-
    version
    Only print the version.  This is the default. 
-
    copyright
    Name the copyright usage licensing terms. 
-
    verbose
    Print the full copyright usage licensing terms. 
+
    
+
    
+
    ‘version’
    
+
    Only print the version.  This is the default.
+
    
+
    ‘copyright’
    
+
    Name the copyright usage licensing terms.
+
    
+
    ‘verbose’
    
+
    Print the full copyright usage licensing terms.
+
    
 
    
 
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd config,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
-
-
    ntpd exit status
    
+
+
    1.1.32 ntpd exit status
    
 
 
    One of the following exit values will be returned:
-     
    
-
    0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)
    Successful program execution. 
-
    1 (EXIT_FAILURE)
    The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid. 
+
    
+
    ‘0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)’
    
+
    Successful program execution.
+
    
+
    ‘1 (EXIT_FAILURE)’
    
+
    The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.
+
    
 
    
-  
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd exit status,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
-
-
    ntpd Usage
    
-
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd Usage,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+
+
    1.1.33 ntpd Usage
    
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
-
-
    ntpd Files
    
-
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd Files,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+
+
    1.1.34 ntpd Files
    
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
-
-
    ntpd See Also
    
-
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpd See Also,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+
+
    1.1.35 ntpd See Also
    
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
-
-
    ntpd Bugs
    
-
-
    
-
    
-Previous: ntpd Bugs,
-Up: ntpd Invocation
-
    
+
+
    1.1.36 ntpd Bugs
    
+
    
+
+
    
+
    
+Previous: , Up: ntpd Invocation   
    
 
    
+
+
    1.1.37 ntpd Notes
    
 
-
    ntpd Notes
    
-
-
    
-
    
+
    
 
-
    
+
    
+
    
+Previous: , Up: ntpd Description   
    
 
    
-
-
-
    Usage
    
-
+
+
    1.2 Usage
    
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    WhatDefaultFlagOption
    configuration file/etc/ntp.conf-cconffile
    frequency filenone-fdriftfile
    leapseconds filenoneleapfile
    process ID filenone-ppidfile
    log filesystem log-llogfile
    include filenonenoneincludefile
    statistics path/var/NTP-sstatsdir
    keys path/usr/local/etc-kkeysdir
    
+
    
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/ntpd/ntpd.man.in b/ntpd/ntpd.man.in
index c32ceb3c8..ed5a2f0bb 100644
--- a/ntpd/ntpd.man.in
+++ b/ntpd/ntpd.man.in
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH ntpd @NTPD_MS@ "14 Aug 2018" "4.2.8p12" "User Commands"
+.TH ntpd @NTPD_MS@ "20 Feb 2019" "4.2.8p13" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-jbaWTB/ag-ubaOSB)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:29:02 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:56:46 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions ntpd-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/ntpd/ntpd.mdoc.in b/ntpd/ntpd.mdoc.in
index a9383b128..8e3d42799 100644
--- a/ntpd/ntpd.mdoc.in
+++ b/ntpd/ntpd.mdoc.in
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt NTPD @NTPD_MS@ User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntpd-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:29:20 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:56:37 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    ntpd-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/ntpdc/invoke-ntpdc.texi b/ntpdc/invoke-ntpdc.texi
index bd1f7cd14..737083477 100644
--- a/ntpdc/invoke-ntpdc.texi
+++ b/ntpdc/invoke-ntpdc.texi
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 #
 # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (invoke-ntpdc.texi)
 #
-# It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:29:40 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+# It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:56:51 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 # From the definitions    ntpdc-opts.def
 # and the template file   agtexi-cmd.tpl
 @end ignore
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ with a status code of 0.
 
 @exampleindent 0
 @example
-ntpdc - vendor-specific NTPD control program - Ver. 4.2.8p12
+ntpdc - vendor-specific NTPD control program - Ver. 4.2.8p13
 Usage:  ntpdc [ - [] | --[@{=| @}] ]... [ host ...]
   Flg Arg Option-Name    Description
    -4 no  ipv4           Force IPv4 DNS name resolution
diff --git a/ntpdc/ntpdc-opts.c b/ntpdc/ntpdc-opts.c
index 4f4ac440b..2125040e0 100644
--- a/ntpdc/ntpdc-opts.c
+++ b/ntpdc/ntpdc-opts.c
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
 /*
  *  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntpdc-opts.c)
  *
- *  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:29:29 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+ *  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:56:48 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
  *  From the definitions    ntpdc-opts.def
  *  and the template file   options
  *
- * Generated from AutoOpts 41:0:16 templates.
+ * Generated from AutoOpts 41:1:16 templates.
  *
  *  AutoOpts is a copyrighted work.  This source file is not encumbered
  *  by AutoOpts licensing, but is provided under the licensing terms chosen
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ extern FILE * option_usage_fp;
  *  static const strings for ntpdc options
  */
 static char const ntpdc_opt_strs[1914] =
-/*     0 */ "ntpdc 4.2.8p12\n"
+/*     0 */ "ntpdc 4.2.8p13\n"
             "Copyright (C) 1992-2017 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n"
             "This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n"
             "redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n"
@@ -128,14 +128,14 @@ static char const ntpdc_opt_strs[1914] =
 /*  1695 */ "no-load-opts\0"
 /*  1708 */ "no\0"
 /*  1711 */ "NTPDC\0"
-/*  1717 */ "ntpdc - vendor-specific NTPD control program - Ver. 4.2.8p12\n"
+/*  1717 */ "ntpdc - vendor-specific NTPD control program - Ver. 4.2.8p13\n"
             "Usage:  %s [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]... [ host ...]\n\0"
 /*  1848 */ "$HOME\0"
 /*  1854 */ ".\0"
 /*  1856 */ ".ntprc\0"
 /*  1863 */ "http://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org\0"
 /*  1897 */ "\n\0"
-/*  1899 */ "ntpdc 4.2.8p12";
+/*  1899 */ "ntpdc 4.2.8p13";
 
 /**
  *  ipv4 option description with
@@ -796,7 +796,7 @@ static void bogus_function(void) {
      translate option names.
    */
   /* referenced via ntpdcOptions.pzCopyright */
-  puts(_("ntpdc 4.2.8p12\n\
+  puts(_("ntpdc 4.2.8p13\n\
 Copyright (C) 1992-2017 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n\
 This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n\
 redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n\
@@ -862,14 +862,14 @@ implied warranty.\n"));
   puts(_("load options from a config file"));
 
   /* referenced via ntpdcOptions.pzUsageTitle */
-  puts(_("ntpdc - vendor-specific NTPD control program - Ver. 4.2.8p12\n\
+  puts(_("ntpdc - vendor-specific NTPD control program - Ver. 4.2.8p13\n\
 Usage:  %s [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]... [ host ...]\n"));
 
   /* referenced via ntpdcOptions.pzExplain */
   puts(_("\n"));
 
   /* referenced via ntpdcOptions.pzFullVersion */
-  puts(_("ntpdc 4.2.8p12"));
+  puts(_("ntpdc 4.2.8p13"));
 
   /* referenced via ntpdcOptions.pzFullUsage */
   puts(_("<<>>"));
diff --git a/ntpdc/ntpdc-opts.h b/ntpdc/ntpdc-opts.h
index 3c3a67ad0..5af0193c6 100644
--- a/ntpdc/ntpdc-opts.h
+++ b/ntpdc/ntpdc-opts.h
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
 /*
  *  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntpdc-opts.h)
  *
- *  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:29:28 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+ *  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:56:48 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
  *  From the definitions    ntpdc-opts.def
  *  and the template file   options
  *
- * Generated from AutoOpts 41:0:16 templates.
+ * Generated from AutoOpts 41:1:16 templates.
  *
  *  AutoOpts is a copyrighted work.  This header file is not encumbered
  *  by AutoOpts licensing, but is provided under the licensing terms chosen
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
  *  tolerable version is at least as old as what was current when the header
  *  template was released.
  */
-#define AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION 167936
+#define AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION 167937
 #if (AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION < OPTIONS_MINIMUM_VERSION) \
  || (AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION > OPTIONS_STRUCT_VERSION)
 # error option template version mismatches autoopts/options.h header
@@ -83,9 +83,9 @@ typedef enum {
 /** count of all options for ntpdc */
 #define OPTION_CT    15
 /** ntpdc version */
-#define NTPDC_VERSION       "4.2.8p12"
+#define NTPDC_VERSION       "4.2.8p13"
 /** Full ntpdc version text */
-#define NTPDC_FULL_VERSION  "ntpdc 4.2.8p12"
+#define NTPDC_FULL_VERSION  "ntpdc 4.2.8p13"
 
 /**
  *  Interface defines for all options.  Replace "n" with the UPPER_CASED
diff --git a/ntpdc/ntpdc.1ntpdcman b/ntpdc/ntpdc.1ntpdcman
index 2f86d8c16..e74529e1b 100644
--- a/ntpdc/ntpdc.1ntpdcman
+++ b/ntpdc/ntpdc.1ntpdcman
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH ntpdc 1ntpdcman "14 Aug 2018" "4.2.8p12" "User Commands"
+.TH ntpdc 1ntpdcman "20 Feb 2019" "4.2.8p13" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-uwaqJD/ag-GwaiID)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:29:36 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:56:53 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions ntpdc-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/ntpdc/ntpdc.1ntpdcmdoc b/ntpdc/ntpdc.1ntpdcmdoc
index 7fa961c82..fc6f55fbb 100644
--- a/ntpdc/ntpdc.1ntpdcmdoc
+++ b/ntpdc/ntpdc.1ntpdcmdoc
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt NTPDC 1ntpdcmdoc User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntpdc-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:29:43 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:56:50 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    ntpdc-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/ntpdc/ntpdc.html b/ntpdc/ntpdc.html
index 42049927a..0d550eb7f 100644
--- a/ntpdc/ntpdc.html
+++ b/ntpdc/ntpdc.html
@@ -1,158 +1,220 @@
-
+
+
+
 
-ntpdc: NTPD Control User's Manual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+ntpdc: NTPD Control User’s Manual
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
 
-
-
    ntpdc: NTPD Control User's Manual
    
-
    
-
    
-Next: ,
-Previous: (dir),
-Up: (dir)
-
    
-
    
 
-
    ntpdc: NTPD Control User Manual
    
+
+
    ntpdc: NTPD Control User’s Manual
    
+
+
 
-
    This document describes the use of the NTP Project's ntpdc program,
+
+
+
+
    
+
    
+Next: , Previous: , Up: (dir)   
    
+
    
+
+
    ntpdc: NTPD Control User Manual
    
+
+
    This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s ntpdc program,
 that can be used to query a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server and
 display the time offset of the system clock relative to the server
 clock.  Run as root, it can correct the system clock to this offset as
 well.  It can be run as an interactive command or from a cron job.
-
-  
    This document applies to version 4.2.8p12 of ntpdc.
-
-  
    The program implements the SNTP protocol as defined by RFC 5905, the NTPv4
+
    
+
    This document applies to version 4.2.8p13 of ntpdc.
+
    
+
    The program implements the SNTP protocol as defined by RFC 5905, the NTPv4
 IETF specification.
+
    
+
+
    Short Table of Contents
    
 
-  
    
-
    Short Contents
    
-
      
-ntpdc: NTPD Control User Manual
+
      
+
 
      
 
-
 
-
      
-
      
+
+
+
+
+
      • ntpdc Description:  Description
+
      • ntpdc Invocation:  Invoking ntpdc
+
      • Usage:  Usage
+
      
+
+
      
 
-
      
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Up: Top   
      
 
      
-
-
-
      Description
      
+
+
      1 Description
      
 
 
      By default, ntpdc writes the local data and time (i.e., not UTC) to the
 standard output in the format:
+
      
+
      
+
      1996-10-15 20:17:25.123 (+0800) +4.567 +/- 0.089 secs
+
      
 
-
           1996-10-15 20:17:25.123 (+0800) +4.567 +/- 0.089 secs
-
      
-  
      where
+
      where
 YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS.SUBSEC is the local date and time,
 (+0800) is the local timezone adjustment (so we would add 8 hours and 0 minutes to convert the reported local time to UTC),
 and
 the +4.567 +/- 0.089 secs indicates the time offset and
 error bound of the system clock relative to the server clock.
-
-
      
-
      
+
      
+
+
+
+
      • ntpdc Invocation:  
+
      • Usage:  
+
      
+
+
      
 
-
      
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpdc Description   
      
 
      
+
+
      1.1 Invoking ntpdc
      
+
+
 
-
      Invoking ntpdc
      
 
-
      
 
-  
      ntpdc
-is deprecated. 
+
      ntpdc
+is deprecated.
 Please use
 ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) instead - it can do everything
 ntpdc
 used to do, and it does so using a much more sane interface.
-
-  
      ntpdc
+
      
+
      ntpdc
 is a utility program used to query
 ntpd(1ntpdmdoc)
 about its
-current state and to request changes in that state. 
-It uses NTP mode 7 control message formats described in the source code. 
+current state and to request changes in that state.
+It uses NTP mode 7 control message formats described in the source code.
 The program may
 be run either in interactive mode or controlled using command line
-arguments. 
+arguments.
 Extensive state and statistics information is available
 through the
 ntpdc
-interface. 
+interface.
 In addition, nearly all the
 configuration options which can be specified at startup using
-ntpd's configuration file may also be specified at run time using
+ntpd’s configuration file may also be specified at run time using
 ntpdc
-
-  
      This section was generated by AutoGen,
-using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntpdc program. 
+
      
+
      This section was generated by AutoGen,
+using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntpdc program.
 This software is released under the NTP license, <http://ntp.org/license>.
-
-
      
-
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Up: ntpdc Invocation
-
      
+
      
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
      • ntpdc usage:  ntpdc help/usage (--help)
+
      • ntpdc ipv4:  ipv4 option (-4)
+
      • ntpdc ipv6:  ipv6 option (-6)
+
      • ntpdc command:  command option (-c)
+
      • ntpdc interactive:  interactive option (-i)
+
      • ntpdc listpeers:  listpeers option (-l)
+
      • ntpdc numeric:  numeric option (-n)
+
      • ntpdc peers:  peers option (-p)
+
      • ntpdc showpeers:  showpeers option (-s)
+
      • ntpdc config:  presetting/configuring ntpdc
+
      • ntpdc exit status:  exit status
+
      • ntpdc Usage:  Usage
+
      • ntpdc See Also:  See Also
+
      • ntpdc Authors:  Authors
+
      • ntpdc Bugs:  Bugs
+
      
+
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Up: ntpdc Invocation   
      
 
      
-
-
      ntpdc help/usage (--help)
      
-
-
      
-This is the automatically generated usage text for ntpdc.
-
-  
      The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
-(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
-the usage text by passing it through a pager program. 
+
+
      1.1.1 ntpdc help/usage (--help)
      
+
+
+
      This is the automatically generated usage text for ntpdc.
+
      
+
      The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
+(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
+the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
 more-help is disabled on platforms without a working
 fork(2) function.  The PAGER environment variable is
-used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
+used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
 with a status code of 0.
-
-
      ntpdc - vendor-specific NTPD control program - Ver. 4.2.8p12
+
      
+
      
+
      ntpdc - vendor-specific NTPD control program - Ver. 4.2.8p13
 Usage:  ntpdc [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... [ host ...]
   Flg Arg Option-Name    Description
    -4 no  ipv4           Force IPv4 DNS name resolution
@@ -196,320 +258,333 @@ The following option preset mechanisms are supported:
  - examining environment variables named NTPDC_*
 
 Please send bug reports to:  <http://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org>
-
      
-  
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpdc usage,
-Up: ntpdc Invocation
-
      
-
      
+
      
 
-
      ipv4 option (-4)
      
-
-
      
-This is the “force ipv4 dns name resolution” option.
-
-
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
        
-
      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
-ipv6. 
-
      
-
-  
      Force DNS resolution of following host names on the command line
-to the IPv4 namespace. 
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpdc ipv4,
-Up: ntpdc Invocation
-
      
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpdc Invocation   
      
 
      
-
-
      ipv6 option (-6)
      
-
-
      
-This is the “force ipv6 dns name resolution” option.
-
-
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
        
-
      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
-ipv4. 
-
      
-
-  
      Force DNS resolution of following host names on the command line
-to the IPv6 namespace. 
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpdc ipv6,
-Up: ntpdc Invocation
-
      
+
+
      1.1.2 ipv4 option (-4)
      
+
+
+
      This is the “force ipv4 dns name resolution” option.
+
      
+
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
        
+
      •  must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
+ipv6.
+
      
+
+
      Force DNS resolution of following host names on the command line
+to the IPv4 namespace.
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpdc Invocation   
      
 
      
-
-
      command option (-c)
      
-
-
      
-This is the “run a command and exit” option. 
-This option takes a string argument cmd.
-
-
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
        
-
      • may appear an unlimited number of times. 
-
      
-
-  
      The following argument is interpreted as an interactive format command
+
+
      1.1.3 ipv6 option (-6)
      
+
+
+
      This is the “force ipv6 dns name resolution” option.
+
      
+
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
        
+
      •  must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
+ipv4.
+
      
+
+
      Force DNS resolution of following host names on the command line
+to the IPv6 namespace.
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpdc Invocation   
      
+
      
+
+
      1.1.4 command option (-c)
      
+
+
+
      This is the “run a command and exit” option.
+This option takes a string argument cmd.
+
      
+
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
        
+
      •  may appear an unlimited number of times.
+
      
+
+
      The following argument is interpreted as an interactive format command
 and is added to the list of commands to be executed on the specified
-host(s). 
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpdc command,
-Up: ntpdc Invocation
-
      
+host(s).
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpdc Invocation   
      
 
      
-
-
      interactive option (-i)
      
-
-
      
-This is the “force ntpq to operate in interactive mode” option.
-
-
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
        
-
      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
-command, listpeers, peers, showpeers. 
-
      
-
-  
      Force ntpq to operate in interactive mode.  Prompts will be written
-to the standard output and commands read from the standard input. 
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpdc interactive,
-Up: ntpdc Invocation
-
      
+
+
      1.1.5 interactive option (-i)
      
+
+
+
      This is the “force ntpq to operate in interactive mode” option.
+
      
+
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
        
+
      •  must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
+command, listpeers, peers, showpeers.
+
      
+
+
      Force ntpq to operate in interactive mode.  Prompts will be written
+to the standard output and commands read from the standard input.
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpdc Invocation   
      
 
      
-
-
      listpeers option (-l)
      
-
-
      
-This is the “print a list of the peers” option.
-
-
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
        
-
      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
-command. 
-
      
-
-  
      Print a list of the peers known to the server as well as a summary of
-their state. This is equivalent to the 'listpeers' interactive command. 
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpdc listpeers,
-Up: ntpdc Invocation
-
      
+
+
      1.1.6 listpeers option (-l)
      
+
+
+
      This is the “print a list of the peers” option.
+
      
+
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
        
+
      •  must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
+command.
+
      
+
+
      Print a list of the peers known to the server as well as a summary of
+their state. This is equivalent to the ’listpeers’ interactive command.
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpdc Invocation   
      
 
      
+
+
      1.1.7 numeric option (-n)
      
+
 
-
      numeric option (-n)
      
-
-
      
-This is the “numeric host addresses” option. 
+
      This is the “numeric host addresses” option.
 Output all host addresses in dotted-quad numeric format rather than
 converting to the canonical host names. 
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpdc numeric,
-Up: ntpdc Invocation
-
      
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpdc Invocation   
      
 
      
-
-
      peers option (-p)
      
-
-
      
-This is the “print a list of the peers” option.
-
-
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
        
-
      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
-command. 
-
      
-
-  
      Print a list of the peers known to the server as well as a summary
-of their state. This is equivalent to the 'peers' interactive command. 
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpdc peers,
-Up: ntpdc Invocation
-
      
+
+
      1.1.8 peers option (-p)
      
+
+
+
      This is the “print a list of the peers” option.
+
      
+
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
        
+
      •  must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
+command.
+
      
+
+
      Print a list of the peers known to the server as well as a summary
+of their state. This is equivalent to the ’peers’ interactive command.
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpdc Invocation   
      
 
      
-
-
      showpeers option (-s)
      
-
-
      
-This is the “show a list of the peers” option.
-
-
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
        
-
      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
-command. 
-
      
-
-  
      Print a list of the peers known to the server as well as a summary
-of their state. This is equivalent to the 'dmpeers' interactive command.
-
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpdc showpeers,
-Up: ntpdc Invocation
-
      
+
+
      1.1.9 showpeers option (-s)
      
+
+
+
      This is the “show a list of the peers” option.
+
      
+
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
        
+
      •  must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
+command.
+
      
+
+
      Print a list of the peers known to the server as well as a summary
+of their state. This is equivalent to the ’dmpeers’ interactive command.
+
      
+
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpdc Invocation   
      
 
      
-
-
      presetting/configuring ntpdc
      
+
+
      1.1.10 presetting/configuring ntpdc
      
 
 
      Any option that is not marked as not presettable may be preset by
-loading values from configuration ("rc" or "ini") files, and values from environment variables named NTPDC and NTPDC_<OPTION_NAME>.  <OPTION_NAME> must be one of
-the options listed above in upper case and segmented with underscores. 
+loading values from configuration ("rc" or "ini") files, and values from environment variables named NTPDC and NTPDC_<OPTION_NAME>.  <OPTION_NAME> must be one of
+the options listed above in upper case and segmented with underscores.
 The NTPDC variable will be tokenized and parsed like
 the command line.  The remaining variables are tested for existence and their
 values are treated like option arguments.
-
-
      libopts will search in 2 places for configuration files:
-     
        
-
      • $HOME
-
      • $PWD
-
      
-  The environment variables HOME, and PWD
-are expanded and replaced when ntpdc runs. 
-For any of these that are plain files, they are simply processed. 
-For any that are directories, then a file named .ntprc is searched for
+
      
+
+
      libopts will search in 2 places for configuration files:
+
        
+
      •  $HOME
+
      •  $PWD
+
      
+
      The environment variables HOME, and PWD
+are expanded and replaced when ntpdc runs.
+For any of these that are plain files, they are simply processed.
+For any that are directories, then a file named .ntprc is searched for
 within that directory and processed.
-
-  
      Configuration files may be in a wide variety of formats. 
+
      
+
      Configuration files may be in a wide variety of formats.
 The basic format is an option name followed by a value (argument) on the
 same line.  Values may be separated from the option name with a colon,
 equal sign or simply white space.  Values may be continued across multiple
 lines by escaping the newline with a backslash.
-
-  
      Multiple programs may also share the same initialization file. 
+
      
+
      Multiple programs may also share the same initialization file.
 Common options are collected at the top, followed by program specific
 segments.  The segments are separated by lines like:
-
          [NTPDC]
-
      
-  
      or by
-
          <?program ntpdc>
-
      
-  
      Do not mix these styles within one configuration file.
-
-  
      Compound values and carefully constructed string values may also be
+
      
+
      [NTPDC]
+
      
+
      or by
+
      
+
      <?program ntpdc>
+
      
+
      Do not mix these styles within one configuration file.
+
      
+
      Compound values and carefully constructed string values may also be
 specified using XML syntax:
-
          <option-name>
-       <sub-opt>...&lt;...&gt;...</sub-opt>
-    </option-name>
-
      
-  
      yielding an option-name.sub-opt string value of
-
          "...<...>..."
-
      
-  
      AutoOpts does not track suboptions.  You simply note that it is a
+
      
+
      <option-name>
+   <sub-opt>...&lt;...&gt;...</sub-opt>
+</option-name>
+
      
+
      yielding an option-name.sub-opt string value of
+
      
+
      "...<...>..."
+
      
+
      AutoOpts does not track suboptions.  You simply note that it is a
 hierarchicly valued option.  AutoOpts does provide a means for searching
 the associated name/value pair list (see: optionFindValue).
-
-  
      The command line options relating to configuration and/or usage help are:
-
-
      version (-)
      
+
      
+
      The command line options relating to configuration and/or usage help are:
+
      
+
+
      version (-)
      
 
 
      Print the program version to standard out, optionally with licensing
 information, then exit 0.  The optional argument specifies how much licensing
-detail to provide.  The default is to print just the version.  The licensing infomation may be selected with an option argument. 
+detail to provide.  The default is to print just the version.  The licensing infomation may be selected with an option argument.
 Only the first letter of the argument is examined:
-
-     
      
-
      version
      Only print the version.  This is the default. 
-
      copyright
      Name the copyright usage licensing terms. 
-
      verbose
      Print the full copyright usage licensing terms. 
+
      
+
      
+
      ‘version’
      
+
      Only print the version.  This is the default.
+
      
+
      ‘copyright’
      
+
      Name the copyright usage licensing terms.
+
      
+
      ‘verbose’
      
+
      Print the full copyright usage licensing terms.
+
      
 
      
 
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpdc config,
-Up: ntpdc Invocation
-
      
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpdc Invocation   
      
 
      
-
-
      ntpdc exit status
      
+
+
      1.1.11 ntpdc exit status
      
 
 
      One of the following exit values will be returned:
-     
      
-
      0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)
      Successful program execution. 
-
      1 (EXIT_FAILURE)
      The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid. 
-
      66 (EX_NOINPUT)
      A specified configuration file could not be loaded. 
-
      70 (EX_SOFTWARE)
      libopts had an internal operational error.  Please report
-it to autogen-users@lists.sourceforge.net.  Thank you. 
+
      
+
      ‘0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)’
      
+
      Successful program execution.
+
      
+
      ‘1 (EXIT_FAILURE)’
      
+
      The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.
+
      
+
      ‘66 (EX_NOINPUT)’
      
+
      A specified configuration file could not be loaded.
+
      
+
      ‘70 (EX_SOFTWARE)’
      
+
      libopts had an internal operational error.  Please report
+it to autogen-users@lists.sourceforge.net.  Thank you.
+
      
 
      
-  
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpdc exit status,
-Up: ntpdc Invocation
-
      
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpdc Invocation   
      
 
      
-
-
      ntpdc Usage
      
-
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpdc Usage,
-Up: ntpdc Invocation
-
      
+
+
      1.1.12 ntpdc Usage
      
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpdc Invocation   
      
 
      
-
-
      ntpdc See Also
      
-
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpdc See Also,
-Up: ntpdc Invocation
-
      
+
+
      1.1.13 ntpdc See Also
      
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpdc Invocation   
      
 
      
-
-
      ntpdc Authors
      
-
-
      
-
      
-Previous: ntpdc Authors,
-Up: ntpdc Invocation
-
      
+
+
      1.1.14 ntpdc Authors
      
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Previous: , Up: ntpdc Invocation   
      
 
      
+
+
      1.1.15 ntpdc Bugs
      
 
-
      ntpdc Bugs
      
-
-
      
-
      
+
      
 
-
      
+
      
+
      
+Previous: , Up: ntpdc Description   
      
 
      
-
-
-
      Usage
      
+
+
      1.2 Usage
      
 
 
      The simplest use of this program is as an unprivileged command to
-check the current time, offset, and error in the local clock. 
+check the current time, offset, and error in the local clock.
 For example:
+
      
+
      
+
      ntpdc ntpserver.somewhere
+
      
 
-
          ntpdc ntpserver.somewhere
-
      
-  
      With suitable privilege, it can be run as a command or in a
+
      With suitable privilege, it can be run as a command or in a
 cron job to reset the local clock from a reliable server, like
-the ntpdate and rdate commands. 
+the ntpdate and rdate commands.
 For example:
+
      
+
      
+
      ntpdc -a ntpserver.somewhere
+
      
+
      
+
 
-
          ntpdc -a ntpserver.somewhere
-
      
-  
 
+
+
diff --git a/ntpdc/ntpdc.man.in b/ntpdc/ntpdc.man.in
index f26cf234d..801439049 100644
--- a/ntpdc/ntpdc.man.in
+++ b/ntpdc/ntpdc.man.in
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH ntpdc @NTPDC_MS@ "14 Aug 2018" "4.2.8p12" "User Commands"
+.TH ntpdc @NTPDC_MS@ "20 Feb 2019" "4.2.8p13" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-uwaqJD/ag-GwaiID)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:29:36 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:56:53 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions ntpdc-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/ntpdc/ntpdc.mdoc.in b/ntpdc/ntpdc.mdoc.in
index 0cd97be06..73f60c1f3 100644
--- a/ntpdc/ntpdc.mdoc.in
+++ b/ntpdc/ntpdc.mdoc.in
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt NTPDC @NTPDC_MS@ User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntpdc-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:29:43 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:56:50 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    ntpdc-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/ntpq/invoke-ntpq.texi b/ntpq/invoke-ntpq.texi
index ebd4affd7..bba6be6a1 100644
--- a/ntpq/invoke-ntpq.texi
+++ b/ntpq/invoke-ntpq.texi
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 #
 # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (invoke-ntpq.texi)
 #
-# It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:30:02 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+# It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:01 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 # From the definitions    ntpq-opts.def
 # and the template file   agtexi-cmd.tpl
 @end ignore
@@ -944,7 +944,7 @@ with a status code of 0.
 
 @exampleindent 0
 @example
-ntpq - standard NTP query program - Ver. 4.2.8p12
+ntpq - standard NTP query program - Ver. 4.2.8p13
 Usage:  ntpq [ - [] | --[@{=| @}] ]... [ host ...]
   Flg Arg Option-Name    Description
    -4 no  ipv4           Force IPv4 name resolution
diff --git a/ntpq/ntpq-opts.c b/ntpq/ntpq-opts.c
index 15723d68b..987b6f6e4 100644
--- a/ntpq/ntpq-opts.c
+++ b/ntpq/ntpq-opts.c
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
 /*
  *  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntpq-opts.c)
  *
- *  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:29:47 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+ *  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:56:54 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
  *  From the definitions    ntpq-opts.def
  *  and the template file   options
  *
- * Generated from AutoOpts 41:0:16 templates.
+ * Generated from AutoOpts 41:1:16 templates.
  *
  *  AutoOpts is a copyrighted work.  This source file is not encumbered
  *  by AutoOpts licensing, but is provided under the licensing terms chosen
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ extern FILE * option_usage_fp;
  *  static const strings for ntpq options
  */
 static char const ntpq_opt_strs[1977] =
-/*     0 */ "ntpq 4.2.8p12\n"
+/*     0 */ "ntpq 4.2.8p13\n"
             "Copyright (C) 1992-2017 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n"
             "This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n"
             "redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n"
@@ -132,13 +132,13 @@ static char const ntpq_opt_strs[1977] =
 /*  1768 */ "no-load-opts\0"
 /*  1781 */ "no\0"
 /*  1784 */ "NTPQ\0"
-/*  1789 */ "ntpq - standard NTP query program - Ver. 4.2.8p12\n"
+/*  1789 */ "ntpq - standard NTP query program - Ver. 4.2.8p13\n"
             "Usage:  %s [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]... [ host ...]\n\0"
 /*  1909 */ "$HOME\0"
 /*  1915 */ ".\0"
 /*  1917 */ ".ntprc\0"
 /*  1924 */ "http://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org\0"
-/*  1958 */ "ntpq 4.2.8p12\0"
+/*  1958 */ "ntpq 4.2.8p13\0"
 /*  1972 */ "hash";
 
 /**
@@ -841,7 +841,7 @@ static void bogus_function(void) {
      translate option names.
    */
   /* referenced via ntpqOptions.pzCopyright */
-  puts(_("ntpq 4.2.8p12\n\
+  puts(_("ntpq 4.2.8p13\n\
 Copyright (C) 1992-2017 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n\
 This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n\
 redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n\
@@ -910,11 +910,11 @@ implied warranty.\n"));
   puts(_("load options from a config file"));
 
   /* referenced via ntpqOptions.pzUsageTitle */
-  puts(_("ntpq - standard NTP query program - Ver. 4.2.8p12\n\
+  puts(_("ntpq - standard NTP query program - Ver. 4.2.8p13\n\
 Usage:  %s [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]... [ host ...]\n"));
 
   /* referenced via ntpqOptions.pzFullVersion */
-  puts(_("ntpq 4.2.8p12"));
+  puts(_("ntpq 4.2.8p13"));
 
   /* referenced via ntpqOptions.pzFullUsage */
   puts(_("<<>>"));
diff --git a/ntpq/ntpq-opts.h b/ntpq/ntpq-opts.h
index 1ff3a0af6..5564ee303 100644
--- a/ntpq/ntpq-opts.h
+++ b/ntpq/ntpq-opts.h
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
 /*
  *  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntpq-opts.h)
  *
- *  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:29:47 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+ *  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:56:54 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
  *  From the definitions    ntpq-opts.def
  *  and the template file   options
  *
- * Generated from AutoOpts 41:0:16 templates.
+ * Generated from AutoOpts 41:1:16 templates.
  *
  *  AutoOpts is a copyrighted work.  This header file is not encumbered
  *  by AutoOpts licensing, but is provided under the licensing terms chosen
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
  *  tolerable version is at least as old as what was current when the header
  *  template was released.
  */
-#define AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION 167936
+#define AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION 167937
 #if (AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION < OPTIONS_MINIMUM_VERSION) \
  || (AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION > OPTIONS_STRUCT_VERSION)
 # error option template version mismatches autoopts/options.h header
@@ -84,9 +84,9 @@ typedef enum {
 /** count of all options for ntpq */
 #define OPTION_CT    16
 /** ntpq version */
-#define NTPQ_VERSION       "4.2.8p12"
+#define NTPQ_VERSION       "4.2.8p13"
 /** Full ntpq version text */
-#define NTPQ_FULL_VERSION  "ntpq 4.2.8p12"
+#define NTPQ_FULL_VERSION  "ntpq 4.2.8p13"
 
 /**
  *  Interface defines for all options.  Replace "n" with the UPPER_CASED
diff --git a/ntpq/ntpq.1ntpqman b/ntpq/ntpq.1ntpqman
index 11d2883f8..ce2af8cfa 100644
--- a/ntpq/ntpq.1ntpqman
+++ b/ntpq/ntpq.1ntpqman
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH ntpq 1ntpqman "14 Aug 2018" "4.2.8p12" "User Commands"
+.TH ntpq 1ntpqman "20 Feb 2019" "4.2.8p13" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-_XaWRE/ag-lYaOQE)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:29:58 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:02 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions ntpq-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/ntpq/ntpq.1ntpqmdoc b/ntpq/ntpq.1ntpqmdoc
index ca3f206ff..9589e223b 100644
--- a/ntpq/ntpq.1ntpqmdoc
+++ b/ntpq/ntpq.1ntpqmdoc
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt NTPQ 1ntpqmdoc User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntpq-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:30:05 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:56:59 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    ntpq-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/ntpq/ntpq.html b/ntpq/ntpq.html
index d9daed6de..7d465c969 100644
--- a/ntpq/ntpq.html
+++ b/ntpq/ntpq.html
@@ -1,202 +1,294 @@
-
+
+
+
 
-ntpq: Network Time Protocol Query User's Manual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+ntpq: Network Time Protocol Query User’s Manual
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
 
-
-
      ntpq: Network Time Protocol Query User's Manual
      
-  
      
-
      Short Contents
      
-
-
      
 
+
+
      ntpq: Network Time Protocol Query User’s Manual
      
 
 
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: (dir),
-Up: (dir)
-
      
+
+
+
+
+
      Short Table of Contents
      
+
+
      
+
 
      
 
-
      ntpq: Network Time Protocol Query User Manual
      
+
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: (dir)   
      
+
      
+
+
      ntpq: Network Time Protocol Query User Manual
      
 
 
      The ntpq utility program is used to
 monitor the operational status
 and determine the performance of
 ntpd, the NTP daemon.
-
-  
      This document applies to version 4.2.8p12 of ntpq.
-
-
      
-
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: Top,
-Up: Top
-
      
+
      
+
      This document applies to version 4.2.8p13 of ntpq.
+
      
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
      • ntpq Description:  
+
      • ntpq Invocation:  Invoking ntpq
+
      • Usage:  
+
      • Internal Commands:  
+
      • Control Message Commands:  
+
      • Status Words and Kiss Codes:  
+
      • System Variables:  
+
      • Peer Variables:  
+
      • Clock Variables:  
+
      
+
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   
      
 
      
+
+
      1 Description
      
 
-
-
      Description
      
-
-
      The ntpq utility program is used to monitor NTP daemon ntpd operations and determine performance. 
+
      The ntpq utility program is used to monitor NTP daemon ntpd operations and determine performance.
 It uses the standard NTP mode 6 control message formats defined in
-Appendix B of the NTPv3 specification RFC1305. 
-The same formats are used in NTPv4, although some of the variable names have changed and new ones added. 
+Appendix B of the NTPv3 specification RFC1305.
+The same formats are used in NTPv4, although some of the variable names have changed and new ones added.
 The description on this page is for the NTPv4 variables.
-
-  
      The program can be run either in interactive mode or controlled using command line arguments.  Requests to read and write arbitrary variables can be assembled, with raw and pretty-printed output options being available.  The ntpq can also obtain and print a list of peers in a common format by sending multiple queries to the server.
-
-  
      If one or more request options is included on the command line when ntpq is executed, each of the requests will be sent to the NTP servers running on each of the hosts given as command line arguments, or on localhost by default.  If no request options are given, ntpq will attempt to read commands from the standard input and execute these on the NTP server running on the first host given on the command line, again defaulting to localhost when no other host is specified.  ntpq will prompt for commands if the standard input is a terminal device.
-
-  
      ntpq uses NTP mode 6 packets to communicate with the NTP server, and hence can be used to query any compatible server on the network which permits it.  Note that since NTP is a UDP protocol this communication will be somewhat unreliable, especially over large distances in terms of network topology.  ntpq makes one attempt to retransmit requests, and will time requests out if the remote host is not heard from within a suitable timeout time.
-
-  
      Note that in contexts where a host name is expected, a -4 qualifier preceding the host name forces DNS resolution to the IPv4 namespace, while a -6 qualifier forces DNS resolution to the IPv6 namespace.
-
-  
      For examples and usage, see the NTP Debugging Techniques page.
-
-
      
-
      
+
      
+
      The program can be run either in interactive mode or controlled using command line arguments.  Requests to read and write arbitrary variables can be assembled, with raw and pretty-printed output options being available.  The ntpq can also obtain and print a list of peers in a common format by sending multiple queries to the server.
+
      
+
      If one or more request options is included on the command line when ntpq is executed, each of the requests will be sent to the NTP servers running on each of the hosts given as command line arguments, or on localhost by default.  If no request options are given, ntpq will attempt to read commands from the standard input and execute these on the NTP server running on the first host given on the command line, again defaulting to localhost when no other host is specified.  ntpq will prompt for commands if the standard input is a terminal device.
+
      
+
      ntpq uses NTP mode 6 packets to communicate with the NTP server, and hence can be used to query any compatible server on the network which permits it.  Note that since NTP is a UDP protocol this communication will be somewhat unreliable, especially over large distances in terms of network topology.  ntpq makes one attempt to retransmit requests, and will time requests out if the remote host is not heard from within a suitable timeout time.
+
      
+
      Note that in contexts where a host name is expected, a -4 qualifier preceding the host name forces DNS resolution to the IPv4 namespace, while a -6 qualifier forces DNS resolution to the IPv6 namespace.
+
      
+
      For examples and usage, see the NTP Debugging Techniques page.
+
      
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
      • ntpq Invocation:  
+
      • Usage:  
+
      • Internal Commands:  
+
      • Control Message Commands:  
+
      • Status Words and Kiss Codes:  
+
      • System Variables:  
+
      • Peer Variables:  
+
      • Clock Variables:  
+
      
+
+
      
 
-
      
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpq Description   
      
 
      
+
+
      1.1 Invoking ntpq
      
+
+
 
-
      Invoking ntpq
      
-
-
      
 
-  
      The
+
      The
 ntpq
 utility program is used to query NTP servers to monitor NTP operations
 and performance, requesting
-information about current state and/or changes in that state. 
+information about current state and/or changes in that state.
 The program may be run either in interactive mode or controlled using
-command line arguments. 
+command line arguments.
 Requests to read and write arbitrary
 variables can be assembled, with raw and pretty-printed output
-options being available. 
+options being available.
 The
 ntpq
 utility can also obtain and print a
 list of peers in a common format by sending multiple queries to the
 server.
-
-  
      If one or more request options is included on the command line
+
      
+
      If one or more request options is included on the command line
 when
 ntpq
 is executed, each of the requests will be sent
 to the NTP servers running on each of the hosts given as command
-line arguments, or on localhost by default. 
+line arguments, or on localhost by default.
 If no request options
 are given,
 ntpq
 will attempt to read commands from the
 standard input and execute these on the NTP server running on the
 first host given on the command line, again defaulting to localhost
-when no other host is specified. 
+when no other host is specified.
 The
 ntpq
 utility will prompt for
 commands if the standard input is a terminal device.
-
-  
      ntpq
+
      
+
      ntpq
 uses NTP mode 6 packets to communicate with the
 NTP server, and hence can be used to query any compatible server on
-the network which permits it. 
+the network which permits it.
 Note that since NTP is a UDP protocol
 this communication will be somewhat unreliable, especially over
-large distances in terms of network topology. 
+large distances in terms of network topology.
 The
 ntpq
 utility makes
 one attempt to retransmit requests, and will time requests out if
 the remote host is not heard from within a suitable timeout
 time.
-
-  
      Note that in contexts where a host name is expected, a
+
      
+
      Note that in contexts where a host name is expected, a
 -4
 qualifier preceding the host name forces resolution to the IPv4
 namespace, while a
 -6
-qualifier forces resolution to the IPv6 namespace. 
+qualifier forces resolution to the IPv6 namespace.
 For examples and usage, see the
-NTP Debugging Techniques
+“NTP Debugging Techniques”
 page.
-
-  
      Specifying a
+
      
+
      Specifying a
 command line option other than
 -i
 or
 -n
 will
 cause the specified query (queries) to be sent to the indicated
-host(s) immediately. 
+host(s) immediately.
 Otherwise,
 ntpq
 will attempt to read
 interactive format commands from the standard input.
-
-
      Internal Commands
      
+
      
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
      • ntpq usage:  
+
      • ntpq ipv4:  
+
      • ntpq ipv6:  
+
      • ntpq command:  
+
      • ntpq interactive:  
+
      • ntpq numeric:  
+
      • ntpq old-rv:  
+
      • ntpq peers:  
+
      • ntpq refid:  
+
      • ntpq wide:  
+
      • ntpq config:  
+
      • ntpq exit status:  
+
      
+
+
+
      1.1.1 Internal Commands
      
 
 
      Interactive format commands consist of a keyword followed by zero
-to four arguments. 
+to four arguments.
 Only enough characters of the full keyword to
 uniquely identify the command need be typed.
-
-  
      A
+
      
+
      A
 number of interactive format commands are executed entirely within
 the
 ntpq
 utility itself and do not result in NTP
-requests being sent to a server. 
+requests being sent to a server.
 These are described following.
-     
      
-
      ? [command]
      help [command]
      A
-? 
+
      
+
      ? [command]
      
+
      help [command]
      
+
      A
+‘?’
 by itself will print a list of all the commands
 known to
 ntpq
 A
-? 
+‘?’
 followed by a command name will print function and usage
-information about the command. 
-
      addvars name[=value][,...]
      rmvars name[,...]
      clearvars
      showvars
      The arguments to this command consist of a list of
+information about the command.
+
      
+
      addvars name[=value][,...]
      
+
      rmvars name[,...]
      
+
      clearvars
      
+
      showvars
      
+
      The arguments to this command consist of a list of
 items of the form
-name[=value],
+name[=value],
 where the
 .No = Ns Ar value
 is ignored, and can be omitted,
-in requests to the server to read variables. 
+in requests to the server to read variables.
 The
 ntpq
 utility maintains an internal list in which data to be included in
@@ -204,155 +296,190 @@ messages can be assembled, and displayed or set using the
 readlist
 and
 writelist
-commands described below. 
+commands described below.
 The
 addvars
 command allows variables and their optional values to be added to
-the list. 
+the list.
 If more than one variable is to be added, the list should
-be comma-separated and not contain white space. 
+be comma-separated and not contain white space.
 The
 rmvars
 command can be used to remove individual variables from the list,
 while the
 clearvars
 command removes all variables from the
-list. 
+list.
 The
 showvars
-command displays the current list of optional variables. 
-
      authenticate [yes|no]
      Normally
+command displays the current list of optional variables.
+
      
+
      authenticate [yes|no]
      
+
      Normally
 ntpq
 does not authenticate requests unless
-they are write requests. 
+they are write requests.
 The command
 authenticate yes
 causes
 ntpq
 to send authentication with all requests it
-makes. 
+makes.
 Authenticated requests causes some servers to handle
-requests slightly differently. 
+requests slightly differently.
 The command
 authenticate
 causes
 ntpq
 to display whether or not
-it is currently authenticating requests. 
-
      cooked
      Causes output from query commands to be "cooked", so that
+it is currently authenticating requests.
+
      
+
      cooked
      
+
      Causes output from query commands to be "cooked", so that
 variables which are recognized by
 ntpq
 will have their
-values reformatted for human consumption. 
+values reformatted for human consumption.
 Variables which
 ntpq
 could not decode completely are
 marked with a trailing
-?. 
-
      debug [more|less|off]
      With no argument, displays the current debug level. 
-Otherwise, the debugging level is changed as indicated. 
-
      delay [milliseconds]
      Specify a time interval to be added to timestamps included in
-requests which require authentication. 
+‘?’.
+
      
+
      debug [more|less|off]
      
+
      With no argument, displays the current debug level.
+Otherwise, the debugging level is changed as indicated.
+
      
+
      delay [milliseconds]
      
+
      Specify a time interval to be added to timestamps included in
+requests which require authentication.
 This is used to enable
 (unreliable) server reconfiguration over long delay network paths
-or between machines whose clocks are unsynchronized. 
+or between machines whose clocks are unsynchronized.
 Actually the
 server does not now require timestamps in authenticated requests,
-so this command may be obsolete. 
-Without any arguments, displays the current delay. 
-
      drefid [hash|ipv4]
      Display refids as IPv4 or hash. 
+so this command may be obsolete.
+Without any arguments, displays the current delay.
+
      
+
      drefid [hash|ipv4]
      
+
      Display refids as IPv4 or hash.
 Without any arguments, displays whether refids are shown as IPv4
-addresses or hashes. 
-
      exit
      Exit
+addresses or hashes.
+
      
+
      exit
      
+
      Exit
 ntpq
-
      host [name]
      Set the host to which future queries will be sent. 
+
      
+
      host [name]
      
+
      Set the host to which future queries will be sent.
 The
 name
-may be either a host name or a numeric address. 
-Without any arguments, displays the current host. 
-
      hostnames [yes|no]
      If
+may be either a host name or a numeric address.
+Without any arguments, displays the current host.
+
      
+
      hostnames [yes|no]
      
+
      If
 yes
 is specified, host names are printed in
-information displays. 
+information displays.
 If
 no
 is specified, numeric
-addresses are printed instead. 
+addresses are printed instead.
 The default is
 yes,
 unless
 modified using the command line
 -n
-switch. 
+switch.
 Without any arguments, displays whether host names or numeric addresses
-are shown. 
-
      keyid [keyid]
      This command allows the specification of a key number to be
-used to authenticate configuration requests. 
+are shown.
+
      
+
      keyid [keyid]
      
+
      This command allows the specification of a key number to be
+used to authenticate configuration requests.
 This must correspond
 to the
 controlkey
 key number the server has been configured to use for this
-purpose. 
+purpose.
 Without any arguments, displays the current
-keyid. 
-
      keytype [digest]
      Specify the digest algorithm to use for authenticating requests, with default
-MD5. 
+keyid.
+
      
+
      keytype [digest]
      
+
      Specify the digest algorithm to use for authenticating requests, with default
+MD5.
 If
 ntpq
 was built with OpenSSL support, and OpenSSL is installed,
 digest
-can be any message digest algorithm supported by OpenSSL. 
+can be any message digest algorithm supported by OpenSSL.
 If no argument is given, the current
 keytype digest
-algorithm used is displayed. 
-
      ntpversion [1|2|3|4]
      Sets the NTP version number which
+algorithm used is displayed.
+
      
+
      ntpversion [1|2|3|4]
      
+
      Sets the NTP version number which
 ntpq
 claims in
-packets. 
+packets.
 Defaults to 3, and note that mode 6 control messages (and
-modes, for that matter) didn't exist in NTP version 1. 
+modes, for that matter) didn’t exist in NTP version 1.
 There appear
-to be no servers left which demand version 1. 
+to be no servers left which demand version 1.
 With no argument, displays the current NTP version that will be used
-when communicating with servers. 
-
      passwd
      This command prompts you to type in a password (which will not
+when communicating with servers.
+
      
+
      passwd
      
+
      This command prompts you to type in a password (which will not
 be echoed) which will be used to authenticate configuration
-requests. 
+requests.
 The password must correspond to the key configured for
 use by the NTP server for this purpose if such requests are to be
-successful. 
-
      poll [n] [verbose]
      Poll an NTP server in client mode
+successful.
+
      
+
      poll [n] [verbose]
      
+
      Poll an NTP server in client mode
 n
-times. 
-Poll not implemented yet. 
-
      quit
      Exit
+times.
+Poll not implemented yet.
+
      
+
      quit
      
+
      Exit
 ntpq
-
      raw
      Causes all output from query commands is printed as received
-from the remote server. 
+
      
+
      raw
      
+
      Causes all output from query commands is printed as received
+from the remote server.
 The only formating/interpretation done on
 the data is to transform nonascii data into a printable (but barely
-understandable) form. 
-
      timeout [milliseconds]
      Specify a timeout period for responses to server queries. 
+understandable) form.
+
      
+
      timeout [milliseconds]
      
+
      Specify a timeout period for responses to server queries.
 The
-default is about 5000 milliseconds. 
-Without any arguments, displays the current timeout period. 
+default is about 5000 milliseconds.
+Without any arguments, displays the current timeout period.
 Note that since
 ntpq
 retries each query once after a timeout, the total waiting time for
-a timeout will be twice the timeout value set. 
-
      version
      Display the version of the
+a timeout will be twice the timeout value set.
+
      
+
      version
      
+
      Display the version of the
 ntpq
-program. 
+program.
+
      
 
      
 
-
      Control Message Commands
      
-
-
      Association ids are used to identify system, peer and clock variables. 
+
+
      1.1.1.1 Control Message Commands
      
+
      Association ids are used to identify system, peer and clock variables.
 System variables are assigned an association id of zero and system name
 space, while each association is assigned a nonzero association id and
-peer namespace. 
+peer namespace.
 Most control commands send a single message to the server and expect a
-single response message. 
+single response message.
 The exceptions are the
 peers
 command, which sends a series of messages,
@@ -361,172 +488,262 @@ and the
 and
 mreadvar
 commands, which iterate over a range of associations.
-     
      
-
      apeers
      Display a list of peers in the form:
-     
                [tally]remote refid assid st t when pool reach delay offset jitter
-     
      
-     
      where the output is just like the
+
      
+
      apeers
      
+
      Display a list of peers in the form:
+
      
+
      [tally]remote refid assid st t when pool reach delay offset jitter
+
      
+
      where the output is just like the
 peers
 command except that the
 refid
-is displayed in hex format and the association number is also displayed. 
-
      associations
      Display a list of mobilized associations in the form:
-     
                ind assid status conf reach auth condition last_event cnt
-     
      
-          
      
-
      Sy Variable Ta Sy Description
      ind Ta index on this list
      assid Ta association id
      status Ta peer status word
      conf Ta yes: No persistent, no: No ephemeral
      reach Ta yes: No reachable, no: No unreachable
      auth Ta ok, yes, bad No and none
      condition Ta selection status (see the select No field of the peer status word)
      last_event Ta event report (see the event No field of the peer status word)
      cnt Ta event count (see the count No field of the peer status word)
      
-     
      authinfo
      Display the authentication statistics counters:
+is displayed in hex format and the association number is also displayed.
+
      
+
      associations
      
+
      Display a list of mobilized associations in the form:
+
      
+
      ind assid status conf reach auth condition last_event cnt
+
      
+
      
+
      Sy Variable Ta Sy Description
      
+
      ind Ta index on this list
      
+
      assid Ta association id
      
+
      status Ta peer status word
      
+
      conf Ta yes: No persistent, no: No ephemeral
      
+
      reach Ta yes: No reachable, no: No unreachable
      
+
      auth Ta ok, yes, bad No and none
      
+
      condition Ta selection status (see the select No field of the peer status word)
      
+
      last_event Ta event report (see the event No field of the peer status word)
      
+
      cnt Ta event count (see the count No field of the peer status word)
      
+
      
+
      
+
      authinfo
      
+
      Display the authentication statistics counters:
 time since reset, stored keys, free keys, key lookups, keys not found,
-uncached keys, expired keys, encryptions, decryptions. 
-
      clocklist [associd]
      cl [associd]
      Display all clock variables in the variable list for those associations
-supporting a reference clock. 
-
      clockvar [associd] [name[=value]][,...]
      cv [associd] [name[=value]][,...]
      Display a list of clock variables for those associations supporting a
-reference clock. 
-
      :config configuration command line
      Send the remainder of the command line, including whitespace, to the
+uncached keys, expired keys, encryptions, decryptions.
+
      
+
      clocklist [associd]
      
+
      cl [associd]
      
+
      Display all clock variables in the variable list for those associations
+supporting a reference clock.
+
      
+
      clockvar [associd] [name[=value]][,...]
      
+
      cv [associd] [name[=value]][,...]
      
+
      Display a list of clock variables for those associations supporting a
+reference clock.
+
      
+
      :config configuration command line
      
+
      Send the remainder of the command line, including whitespace, to the
 server as a run-time configuration command in the same format as a line
-in the configuration file. 
-This command is experimental until further notice and clarification. 
-Authentication is of course required. 
-
      config-from-file filename
      Send each line of
+in the configuration file.
+This command is experimental until further notice and clarification.
+Authentication is of course required.
+
      
+
      config-from-file filename
      
+
      Send each line of
 filename
 to the server as run-time configuration commands in the same format as
-lines in the configuration file. 
-This command is experimental until further notice and clarification. 
-Authentication is required. 
-
      ifstats
      Display status and statistics counters for each local network interface address:
+lines in the configuration file.
+This command is experimental until further notice and clarification.
+Authentication is required.
+
      
+
      ifstats
      
+
      Display status and statistics counters for each local network interface address:
 interface number, interface name and address or broadcast, drop, flag,
-ttl, mc, received, sent, send failed, peers, uptime. 
-Authentication is required. 
-
      iostats
      Display network and reference clock I/O statistics:
+ttl, mc, received, sent, send failed, peers, uptime.
+Authentication is required.
+
      
+
      iostats
      
+
      Display network and reference clock I/O statistics:
 time since reset, receive buffers, free receive buffers, used receive buffers,
 low water refills, dropped packets, ignored packets, received packets,
-packets sent, packet send failures, input wakeups, useful input wakeups. 
-
      kerninfo
      Display kernel loop and PPS statistics:
+packets sent, packet send failures, input wakeups, useful input wakeups.
+
      
+
      kerninfo
      
+
      Display kernel loop and PPS statistics:
 associd, status, pll offset, pll frequency, maximum error,
 estimated error, kernel status, pll time constant, precision,
 frequency tolerance, pps frequency, pps stability, pps jitter,
 calibration interval, calibration cycles, jitter exceeded,
-stability exceeded, calibration errors. 
+stability exceeded, calibration errors.
 As with other ntpq output, times are in milliseconds; very small values
-may be shown as exponentials. 
+may be shown as exponentials.
 The precision value displayed is in milliseconds as well, unlike the
-precision system variable. 
-
      lassociations
      Perform the same function as the associations command, except display
-mobilized and unmobilized associations, including all clients. 
-
      lopeers [-4|-6]
      Display a list of all peers and clients showing
+precision system variable.
+
      
+
      lassociations
      
+
      Perform the same function as the associations command, except display
+mobilized and unmobilized associations, including all clients.
+
      
+
      lopeers [-4|-6]
      
+
      Display a list of all peers and clients showing
 dstadr
-(associated with the given IP version). 
-
      lpassociations
      Display the last obtained list of associations, including all clients. 
-
      lpeers [-4|-6]
      Display a list of all peers and clients (associated with the given IP version). 
-
      monstats
      Display monitor facility status, statistics, and limits:
+(associated with the given IP version).
+
      
+
      lpassociations
      
+
      Display the last obtained list of associations, including all clients.
+
      
+
      lpeers [-4|-6]
      
+
      Display a list of all peers and clients (associated with the given IP version).
+
      
+
      monstats
      
+
      Display monitor facility status, statistics, and limits:
 enabled, addresses, peak addresses, maximum addresses,
-reclaim above count, reclaim older than, kilobytes, maximum kilobytes. 
-
      mreadlist associdlo associdhi
      mrl associdlo associdhi
      Perform the same function as the
+reclaim above count, reclaim older than, kilobytes, maximum kilobytes.
+
      
+
      mreadlist associdlo associdhi
      
+
      mrl associdlo associdhi
      
+
      Perform the same function as the
 readlist
-command for a range of association ids. 
-
      mreadvar associdlo associdhi [name][,...]
      This range may be determined from the list displayed by any
-command showing associations. 
-
      mrv associdlo associdhi [name][,...]
      Perform the same function as the
+command for a range of association ids.
+
      
+
      mreadvar associdlo associdhi [name][,...]
      
+
      This range may be determined from the list displayed by any
+command showing associations.
+
      
+
      mrv associdlo associdhi [name][,...]
      
+
      Perform the same function as the
 readvar
-command for a range of association ids. 
+command for a range of association ids.
 This range may be determined from the list displayed by any
-command showing associations. 
-
      mrulist [limited | kod | mincount=count | laddr=localaddr | sort=[-]sortorder | resany=hexmask | resall=hexmask]
      Display traffic counts of the most recently seen source addresses
-collected and maintained by the monitor facility. 
+command showing associations.
+
      
+
      mrulist [limited | kod | mincount=count | laddr=localaddr | sort=[-]sortorder | resany=hexmask | resall=hexmask]
      
+
      Display traffic counts of the most recently seen source addresses
+collected and maintained by the monitor facility.
 With the exception of
 sort=[-]sortorder,
 the options filter the list returned by
-ntpd(8). 
+ntpd(8).
 The
 limited
 and
 kod
 options return only entries representing client addresses from which the
-last packet received triggered either discarding or a KoD response. 
+last packet received triggered either discarding or a KoD response.
 The
 mincount=count
 option filters entries representing less than
 count
-packets. 
+packets.
 The
 laddr=localaddr
 option filters entries for packets received on any local address other than
-localaddr. 
+localaddr.
 resany=hexmask
 and
 resall=hexmask
 filter entries containing none or less than all, respectively, of the bits in
 hexmask,
 which must begin with
-0x. 
+0x.
 The
 sortorder
 defaults to
 lstint
-and may be
+and may be 
 addr,
 avgint,
 count,
 lstint,
 or any of those preceded by
--
-to reverse the sort order. 
+‘-’
+to reverse the sort order.
 The output columns are:
-          
      
-
      Column
      Description
-
      lstint
      Interval in seconds between the receipt of the most recent packet from
+
      
+
      Column
      
+
      Description
+
      
+
      lstint
      
+
      Interval in seconds between the receipt of the most recent packet from
 this address and the completion of the retrieval of the MRU list by
 ntpq
-
      avgint
      Average interval in s between packets from this address. 
-
      rstr
      Restriction flags associated with this address. 
+
      
+
      avgint
      
+
      Average interval in s between packets from this address.
+
      
+
      rstr
      
+
      Restriction flags associated with this address.
 Most are copied unchanged from the matching
 restrict
 command, however 0x400 (kod) and 0x20 (limited) flags are cleared unless
-the last packet from this address triggered a rate control response. 
-
      r
      Rate control indicator, either
+the last packet from this address triggered a rate control response.
+
      
+
      r
      
+
      Rate control indicator, either
 a period,
 L
 or
 K
 for no rate control response,
-rate limiting by discarding, or rate limiting with a KoD response, respectively. 
-
      m
      Packet mode. 
-
      v
      Packet version number. 
-
      count
      Packets received from this address. 
-
      rport
      Source port of last packet from this address. 
-
      remote address
      host or DNS name, numeric address, or address followed by
-claimed DNS name which could not be verified in parentheses. 
+rate limiting by discarding, or rate limiting with a KoD response, respectively.
+
      
+
      m
      
+
      Packet mode.
+
      
+
      v
      
+
      Packet version number.
+
      
+
      count
      
+
      Packets received from this address.
+
      
+
      rport
      
+
      Source port of last packet from this address.
+
      
+
      remote address
      
+
      host or DNS name, numeric address, or address followed by
+claimed DNS name which could not be verified in parentheses.
+
      
 
      
-     
      opeers [-4 | -6]
      Obtain and print the old-style list of all peers and clients showing
+
      
+
      opeers [-4 | -6]
      
+
      Obtain and print the old-style list of all peers and clients showing
 dstadr
 (associated with the given IP version),
 rather than the
-refid. 
-
      passociations
      Perform the same function as the
+refid.
+
      
+
      passociations
      
+
      Perform the same function as the
 associations
 command,
-except that it uses previously stored data rather than making a new query. 
-
      peers
      Display a list of peers in the form:
-     
                [tally]remote refid st t when pool reach delay offset jitter
-     
      
-          
      
-
      Variable
      Description
-
      [tally]
      single-character code indicating current value of the
+except that it uses previously stored data rather than making a new query.
+
      
+
      peers
      
+
      Display a list of peers in the form:
+
      
+
      [tally]remote refid st t when pool reach delay offset jitter
+
      
+
      
+
      Variable
      
+
      Description
+
      
+
      [tally]
      
+
      single-character code indicating current value of the
 select
 field of the
-.Lk decode.html#peer "peer status word"
-
      remote
      host name (or IP number) of peer. 
+.Lk decode.html#peer "peer status word"
+
      
+
      remote
      
+
      host name (or IP number) of peer.
 The value displayed will be truncated to 15 characters unless the
 ntpq
 -w
 option is given, in which case the full value will be displayed
 on the first line, and if too long,
-the remaining data will be displayed on the next line. 
-
      refid
      source IP address or
-.Lk decode.html#kiss "'kiss code"
-
      st
      stratum: 0 for local reference clocks, 1 for servers with local
+the remaining data will be displayed on the next line.
+
      
+
      refid
      
+
      source IP address or
+.Lk decode.html#kiss "’kiss code"
+
      
+
      st
      
+
      stratum: 0 for local reference clocks, 1 for servers with local
 reference clocks, ..., 16 for unsynchronized server clocks
-
      t
      u:
+
      
+
      t
      
+
      u:
 unicast or manycast client,
 b:
 broadcast or multicast client,
@@ -542,46 +759,67 @@ manycast server,
 broadcast server,
 M:
 multicast server
-
      when
      time in seconds, minutes, hours, or days since the last packet
+
      
+
      when
      
+
      time in seconds, minutes, hours, or days since the last packet
 was received, or
--
+‘-’
 if a packet has never been received
-
      poll
      poll interval (s)
-
      reach
      reach shift register (octal)
-
      delay
      roundtrip delay
-
      offset
      offset of server relative to this host
-
      jitter
      offset RMS error estimate. 
+
      
+
      poll
      
+
      poll interval (s)
+
      
+
      reach
      
+
      reach shift register (octal)
+
      
+
      delay
      
+
      roundtrip delay
+
      
+
      offset
      
+
      offset of server relative to this host
+
      
+
      jitter
      
+
      offset RMS error estimate.
+
      
 
      
-     
      pstats associd
      Display the statistics for the peer with the given
+
      
+
      pstats associd
      
+
      Display the statistics for the peer with the given
 associd:
 associd, status, remote host, local address, time last received,
 time until next send, reachability change, packets sent,
 packets received, bad authentication, bogus origin, duplicate,
-bad dispersion, bad reference time, candidate order. 
-
      readlist [associd]
      rl [associd]
      Display all system or peer variables. 
+bad dispersion, bad reference time, candidate order.
+
      
+
      readlist [associd]
      
+
      rl [associd]
      
+
      Display all system or peer variables.
 If the
 associd
-is omitted, it is assumed to be zero. 
-
      readvar [associd name[=value] [, ...]]
      rv [associd name[=value] [, ...]]
      Display the specified system or peer variables. 
+is omitted, it is assumed to be zero.
+
      
+
      readvar [associd name[=value] [, ...]]
      
+
      rv [associd name[=value] [, ...]]
      
+
      Display the specified system or peer variables.
 If
 associd
 is zero, the variables are from the
 System Variables
 name space, otherwise they are from the
 Peer Variables
-name space. 
+name space.
 The
 associd
-is required, as the same name can occur in both spaces. 
+is required, as the same name can occur in both spaces.
 If no
 name
-is included, all operative variables in the name space are displayed. 
+is included, all operative variables in the name space are displayed.
 In this case only, if the
 associd
-is omitted, it is assumed to be zero. 
-Multiple names are specified with comma separators and without whitespace. 
+is omitted, it is assumed to be zero.
+Multiple names are specified with comma separators and without whitespace.
 Note that time values are represented in milliseconds
-and frequency values in parts-per-million (PPM). 
+and frequency values in parts-per-million (PPM).
 Some NTP timestamps are represented in the format
 YYYYMM DD TTTT,
 where
@@ -592,270 +830,470 @@ the month of year,
 DD
 the day of month and
 TTTT
-the time of day. 
-
      reslist
      Display the access control (restrict) list for
+the time of day.
+
      
+
      reslist
      
+
      Display the access control (restrict) list for
 ntpq
-Authentication is required. 
-
      saveconfig filename
      Save the current configuration,
+Authentication is required.
+
      
+
      saveconfig filename
      
+
      Save the current configuration,
 including any runtime modifications made by
 :config
 or
 config-from-file,
 to the NTP server host file
-filename. 
+filename.
 This command will be rejected by the server unless
-.Lk miscopt.html#saveconfigdir "saveconfigdir"
+.Lk miscopt.html#saveconfigdir "saveconfigdir"
 appears in the
 ntpd(8)
-configuration file. 
+configuration file.
 filename
 can use
 date(1)
 format specifiers to substitute the current date and time, for
 example,
-     
                saveconfig ntp-%Y%m%d-%H%M%S.conf.
-     
      
-     
      The filename used is stored in system variable
-savedconfig. 
-Authentication is required. 
-
      sysinfo
      Display system operational summary:
+
      
+
      saveconfig ntp-%Y%m%d-%H%M%S.conf. 
+
      
+
      The filename used is stored in system variable
+savedconfig.
+Authentication is required.
+
      
+
      sysinfo
      
+
      Display system operational summary:
 associd, status, system peer, system peer mode, leap indicator,
 stratum, log2 precision, root delay, root dispersion,
 reference id, reference time, system jitter, clock jitter,
-clock wander, broadcast delay, symm. auth. delay. 
-
      sysstats
      Display system uptime and packet counts maintained in the
+clock wander, broadcast delay, symm. auth. delay.
+
      
+
      sysstats
      
+
      Display system uptime and packet counts maintained in the
 protocol module:
 uptime, sysstats reset, packets received, current version,
 older version, bad length or format, authentication failed,
 declined, restricted, rate limited, KoD responses,
-processed for time. 
-
      timerstats
      Display interval timer counters:
-time since reset, timer overruns, calls to transmit. 
-
      writelist associd
      Set all system or peer variables included in the variable list. 
-
      writevar associd name=value [, ...]
      Set the specified variables in the variable list. 
+processed for time.
+
      
+
      timerstats
      
+
      Display interval timer counters:
+time since reset, timer overruns, calls to transmit.
+
      
+
      writelist associd
      
+
      Set all system or peer variables included in the variable list.
+
      
+
      writevar associd name=value [, ...]
      
+
      Set the specified variables in the variable list.
 If the
 associd
 is zero, the variables are from the
 System Variables
 name space, otherwise they are from the
 Peer Variables
-name space. 
+name space.
 The
 associd
-is required, as the same name can occur in both spaces. 
-Authentication is required. 
+is required, as the same name can occur in both spaces.
+Authentication is required.
+
      
 
      
 
-
      Status Words and Kiss Codes
      
-
+
+
      1.1.1.2 Status Words and Kiss Codes
      
 
      The current state of the operating program is shown
 in a set of status words
-maintained by the system. 
-Status information is also available on a per-association basis. 
+maintained by the system.
+Status information is also available on a per-association basis.
 These words are displayed by the
 readlist
 and
 associations
-commands both in hexadecimal and in decoded short tip strings. 
+commands both in hexadecimal and in decoded short tip strings.
 The codes, tips and short explanations are documented on the
-.Lk decode.html "Event Messages and Status Words"
-page. 
+.Lk decode.html "Event Messages and Status Words"
+page.
 The page also includes a list of system and peer messages,
 the code for the latest of which is included in the status word.
-
-  
      Information resulting from protocol machine state transitions
+
      
+
      Information resulting from protocol machine state transitions
 is displayed using an informal set of ASCII strings called
-.Lk decode.html#kiss "kiss codes" . 
-The original purpose was for kiss-o'-death (KoD) packets
-sent by the server to advise the client of an unusual condition. 
+.Lk decode.html#kiss "kiss codes" .
+The original purpose was for kiss-o’-death (KoD) packets
+sent by the server to advise the client of an unusual condition.
 They are now displayed, when appropriate,
 in the reference identifier field in various billboards.
-
-
      System Variables
      
-
+
      
+
+
      1.1.1.3 System Variables
      
 
      The following system variables appear in the
 readlist
-billboard. 
+billboard.
 Not all variables are displayed in some configurations.
-
-     
      
-
      Variable
      Description
-
      status
      .Lk decode.html#sys "system status word"
-
      version
      NTP software version and build time
-
      processor
      hardware platform and version
-
      system
      operating system and version
-
      leap
      leap warning indicator (0-3)
-
      stratum
      stratum (1-15)
-
      precision
      precision (log2 s)
-
      rootdelay
      total roundtrip delay to the primary reference clock
-
      rootdisp
      total dispersion to the primary reference clock
-
      refid
      reference id or
-.Lk decode.html#kiss "kiss code"
-
      reftime
      reference time
-
      clock
      date and time of day
-
      peer
      system peer association id
-
      tc
      time constant and poll exponent (log2 s) (3-17)
-
      mintc
      minimum time constant (log2 s) (3-10)
-
      offset
      combined offset of server relative to this host
-
      frequency
      frequency drift (PPM) relative to hardware clock
-
      sys_jitter
      combined system jitter
-
      clk_wander
      clock frequency wander (PPM)
-
      clk_jitter
      clock jitter
-
      tai
      TAI-UTC offset (s)
-
      leapsec
      NTP seconds when the next leap second is/was inserted
-
      expire
      NTP seconds when the NIST leapseconds file expires
+
      
+
      
+
      Variable
      
+
      Description
+
      
+
      status
      
+
      .Lk decode.html#sys "system status word"
+
      
+
      version
      
+
      NTP software version and build time
+
      
+
      processor
      
+
      hardware platform and version
+
      
+
      system
      
+
      operating system and version
+
      
+
      leap
      
+
      leap warning indicator (0-3)
+
      
+
      stratum
      
+
      stratum (1-15)
+
      
+
      precision
      
+
      precision (log2 s)
+
      
+
      rootdelay
      
+
      total roundtrip delay to the primary reference clock
+
      
+
      rootdisp
      
+
      total dispersion to the primary reference clock
+
      
+
      refid
      
+
      reference id or
+.Lk decode.html#kiss "kiss code"
+
      
+
      reftime
      
+
      reference time
+
      
+
      clock
      
+
      date and time of day
+
      
+
      peer
      
+
      system peer association id
+
      
+
      tc
      
+
      time constant and poll exponent (log2 s) (3-17)
+
      
+
      mintc
      
+
      minimum time constant (log2 s) (3-10)
+
      
+
      offset
      
+
      combined offset of server relative to this host
+
      
+
      frequency
      
+
      frequency drift (PPM) relative to hardware clock
+
      
+
      sys_jitter
      
+
      combined system jitter
+
      
+
      clk_wander
      
+
      clock frequency wander (PPM)
+
      
+
      clk_jitter
      
+
      clock jitter
+
      
+
      tai
      
+
      TAI-UTC offset (s)
+
      
+
      leapsec
      
+
      NTP seconds when the next leap second is/was inserted
+
      
+
      expire
      
+
      NTP seconds when the NIST leapseconds file expires
+
      
 
      
-  The jitter and wander statistics are exponentially-weighted RMS averages. 
+
      The jitter and wander statistics are exponentially-weighted RMS averages.
 The system jitter is defined in the NTPv4 specification;
 the clock jitter statistic is computed by the clock discipline module.
-
-  
      When the NTPv4 daemon is compiled with the OpenSSL software library,
+
      
+
      When the NTPv4 daemon is compiled with the OpenSSL software library,
 additional system variables are displayed,
 including some or all of the following,
 depending on the particular Autokey dance:
-     
      
-
      Variable
      Description
-
      host
      Autokey host name for this host
-
      ident
      Autokey group name for this host
-
      flags
      host flags  (see Autokey specification)
-
      digest
      OpenSSL message digest algorithm
-
      signature
      OpenSSL digest/signature scheme
-
      update
      NTP seconds at last signature update
-
      cert
      certificate subject, issuer and certificate flags
-
      until
      NTP seconds when the certificate expires
+
      
+
      Variable
      
+
      Description
+
      
+
      host
      
+
      Autokey host name for this host
+
      
+
      ident
      
+
      Autokey group name for this host
+
      
+
      flags
      
+
      host flags  (see Autokey specification)
+
      
+
      digest
      
+
      OpenSSL message digest algorithm
+
      
+
      signature
      
+
      OpenSSL digest/signature scheme
+
      
+
      update
      
+
      NTP seconds at last signature update
+
      
+
      cert
      
+
      certificate subject, issuer and certificate flags
+
      
+
      until
      
+
      NTP seconds when the certificate expires
+
      
 
      
-
-
      Peer Variables
      
-
+
+
      1.1.1.4 Peer Variables
      
 
      The following peer variables appear in the
 readlist
-billboard for each association. 
+billboard for each association.
 Not all variables are displayed in some configurations.
-
-     
      
-
      Variable
      Description
-
      associd
      association id
-
      status
      .Lk decode.html#peer "peer status word"
-
      srcadr
      source (remote) IP address
-
      srcport
      source (remote) port
-
      dstadr
      destination (local) IP address
-
      dstport
      destination (local) port
-
      leap
      leap indicator (0-3)
-
      stratum
      stratum (0-15)
-
      precision
      precision (log2 s)
-
      rootdelay
      total roundtrip delay to the primary reference clock
-
      rootdisp
      total root dispersion to the primary reference clock
-
      refid
      reference id or
-.Lk decode.html#kiss "kiss code"
-
      reftime
      reference time
-
      rec
      last packet received time
-
      reach
      reach register (octal)
-
      unreach
      unreach counter
-
      hmode
      host mode (1-6)
-
      pmode
      peer mode (1-5)
-
      hpoll
      host poll exponent (log2 s) (3-17)
-
      ppoll
      peer poll exponent (log2 s) (3-17)
-
      headway
      headway (see
-.Lk rate.html "Rate Management and the Kiss-o'-Death Packet" )
-
      flash
      .Lk decode.html#flash "flash status word"
-
      keyid
      symmetric key id
-
      offset
      filter offset
-
      delay
      filter delay
-
      dispersion
      filter dispersion
-
      jitter
      filter jitter
-
      bias
      unicast/broadcast bias
-
      xleave
      interleave delay (see
-.Lk xleave.html "NTP Interleaved Modes" )
+
      
+
      
+
      Variable
      
+
      Description
+
      
+
      associd
      
+
      association id
+
      
+
      status
      
+
      .Lk decode.html#peer "peer status word"
+
      
+
      srcadr
      
+
      source (remote) IP address
+
      
+
      srcport
      
+
      source (remote) port
+
      
+
      dstadr
      
+
      destination (local) IP address
+
      
+
      dstport
      
+
      destination (local) port
+
      
+
      leap
      
+
      leap indicator (0-3)
+
      
+
      stratum
      
+
      stratum (0-15)
+
      
+
      precision
      
+
      precision (log2 s)
+
      
+
      rootdelay
      
+
      total roundtrip delay to the primary reference clock
+
      
+
      rootdisp
      
+
      total root dispersion to the primary reference clock
+
      
+
      refid
      
+
      reference id or
+.Lk decode.html#kiss "kiss code"
+
      
+
      reftime
      
+
      reference time
+
      
+
      rec
      
+
      last packet received time
+
      
+
      reach
      
+
      reach register (octal)
+
      
+
      unreach
      
+
      unreach counter
+
      
+
      hmode
      
+
      host mode (1-6)
+
      
+
      pmode
      
+
      peer mode (1-5)
+
      
+
      hpoll
      
+
      host poll exponent (log2 s) (3-17)
+
      
+
      ppoll
      
+
      peer poll exponent (log2 s) (3-17)
+
      
+
      headway
      
+
      headway (see
+.Lk rate.html "Rate Management and the Kiss-o’-Death Packet" )
+
      
+
      flash
      
+
      .Lk decode.html#flash "flash status word"
+
      
+
      keyid
      
+
      symmetric key id
+
      
+
      offset
      
+
      filter offset
+
      
+
      delay
      
+
      filter delay
+
      
+
      dispersion
      
+
      filter dispersion
+
      
+
      jitter
      
+
      filter jitter
+
      
+
      bias
      
+
      unicast/broadcast bias
+
      
+
      xleave
      
+
      interleave delay (see
+.Lk xleave.html "NTP Interleaved Modes" )
+
      
 
      
-  The
+
      The
 bias
 variable is calculated when the first broadcast packet is received
-after the calibration volley. 
+after the calibration volley.
 It represents the offset of the broadcast subgraph relative to the
-unicast subgraph. 
+unicast subgraph.
 The
 xleave
-variable appears only for the interleaved symmetric and interleaved modes. 
+variable appears only for the interleaved symmetric and interleaved modes.
 It represents the internal queuing, buffering and transmission delays
 for the preceding packet.
-
-  
      When the NTPv4 daemon is compiled with the OpenSSL software library,
+
      
+
      When the NTPv4 daemon is compiled with the OpenSSL software library,
 additional peer variables are displayed, including the following:
-     
      
-
      Variable
      Description
-
      flags
      peer flags (see Autokey specification)
-
      host
      Autokey server name
-
      flags
      peer flags (see Autokey specification)
-
      signature
      OpenSSL digest/signature scheme
-
      initsequence
      initial key id
-
      initkey
      initial key index
-
      timestamp
      Autokey signature timestamp
-
      ident
      Autokey group name for this association
+
      
+
      Variable
      
+
      Description
+
      
+
      flags
      
+
      peer flags (see Autokey specification)
+
      
+
      host
      
+
      Autokey server name
+
      
+
      flags
      
+
      peer flags (see Autokey specification)
+
      
+
      signature
      
+
      OpenSSL digest/signature scheme
+
      
+
      initsequence
      
+
      initial key id
+
      
+
      initkey
      
+
      initial key index
+
      
+
      timestamp
      
+
      Autokey signature timestamp
+
      
+
      ident
      
+
      Autokey group name for this association
+
      
 
      
 
-
      Clock Variables
      
-
+
+
      1.1.1.5 Clock Variables
      
 
      The following clock variables appear in the
 clocklist
-billboard for each association with a reference clock. 
+billboard for each association with a reference clock.
 Not all variables are displayed in some configurations.
-     
      
-
      Variable
      Description
-
      associd
      association id
-
      status
      .Lk decode.html#clock "clock status word"
-
      device
      device description
-
      timecode
      ASCII time code string (specific to device)
-
      poll
      poll messages sent
-
      noreply
      no reply
-
      badformat
      bad format
-
      baddata
      bad date or time
-
      fudgetime1
      fudge time 1
-
      fudgetime2
      fudge time 2
-
      stratum
      driver stratum
-
      refid
      driver reference id
-
      flags
      driver flags
+
      
+
      Variable
      
+
      Description
+
      
+
      associd
      
+
      association id
+
      
+
      status
      
+
      .Lk decode.html#clock "clock status word"
+
      
+
      device
      
+
      device description
+
      
+
      timecode
      
+
      ASCII time code string (specific to device)
+
      
+
      poll
      
+
      poll messages sent
+
      
+
      noreply
      
+
      no reply
+
      
+
      badformat
      
+
      bad format
+
      
+
      baddata
      
+
      bad date or time
+
      
+
      fudgetime1
      
+
      fudge time 1
+
      
+
      fudgetime2
      
+
      fudge time 2
+
      
+
      stratum
      
+
      driver stratum
+
      
+
      refid
      
+
      driver reference id
+
      
+
      flags
      
+
      driver flags
+
      
 
      
 
-  
      This section was generated by AutoGen,
-using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntpq program. 
+
      This section was generated by AutoGen,
+using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntpq program.
 This software is released under the NTP license, <http://ntp.org/license>.
-
-
      
-
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Up: ntpq Invocation
-
      
+
      
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
      • ntpq usage:  ntpq help/usage (--help)
+
      • ntpq ipv4:  ipv4 option (-4)
+
      • ntpq ipv6:  ipv6 option (-6)
+
      • ntpq command:  command option (-c)
+
      • ntpq interactive:  interactive option (-i)
+
      • ntpq numeric:  numeric option (-n)
+
      • ntpq old-rv:  old-rv option
+
      • ntpq peers:  peers option (-p)
+
      • ntpq refid:  refid option (-r)
+
      • ntpq wide:  wide option (-w)
+
      • ntpq config:  presetting/configuring ntpq
+
      • ntpq exit status:  exit status
+
      
+
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Up: ntpq Invocation   
      
 
      
-
-
      ntpq help/usage (--help)
      
-
-
      
-This is the automatically generated usage text for ntpq.
-
-  
      The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
-(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
-the usage text by passing it through a pager program. 
+
+
      1.1.2 ntpq help/usage (--help)
      
+
+
+
      This is the automatically generated usage text for ntpq.
+
      
+
      The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
+(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
+the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
 more-help is disabled on platforms without a working
 fork(2) function.  The PAGER environment variable is
-used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
+used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
 with a status code of 0.
-
-
      ntpq - standard NTP query program - Ver. 4.2.8p11
+
      
+
      
+
      ntpq - standard NTP query program - Ver. 4.2.8p12
 Usage:  ntpq [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... [ host ...]
   Flg Arg Option-Name    Description
    -4 no  ipv4           Force IPv4 name resolution
@@ -894,1046 +1332,827 @@ The following option preset mechanisms are supported:
  - reading file ./.ntprc
  - examining environment variables named NTPQ_*
 
-The valid "refid" option keywords are:
+The valid "refid" option keywords are:
   hash ipv4
   or an integer from 0 through 1
 
 Please send bug reports to:  <http://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org>
-
      
-  
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpq usage,
-Up: ntpq Invocation
-
      
-
      
-
-
      ipv4 option (-4)
      
-
-
      
-This is the “force ipv4 name resolution” option.
-
-
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
        
-
      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
-ipv6. 
-
      
+
      
 
-  
      Force resolution of following host names on the command line
-to the IPv4 namespace. 
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpq ipv4,
-Up: ntpq Invocation
-
      
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpq Invocation   
      
 
      
-
-
      ipv6 option (-6)
      
-
-
      
-This is the “force ipv6 name resolution” option.
-
-
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
        
-
      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
-ipv4. 
-
      
-
-  
      Force resolution of following host names on the command line
-to the IPv6 namespace. 
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpq ipv6,
-Up: ntpq Invocation
-
      
+
+
      1.1.3 ipv4 option (-4)
      
+
+
+
      This is the “force ipv4 name resolution” option.
+
      
+
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
        
+
      •  must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
+ipv6.
+
      
+
+
      Force resolution of following host names on the command line
+to the IPv4 namespace.
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpq Invocation   
      
 
      
-
-
      command option (-c)
      
-
-
      
-This is the “run a command and exit” option. 
-This option takes a string argument cmd.
-
-
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
        
-
      • may appear an unlimited number of times. 
-
      
-
-  
      The following argument is interpreted as an interactive format command
+
+
      1.1.4 ipv6 option (-6)
      
+
+
+
      This is the “force ipv6 name resolution” option.
+
      
+
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
        
+
      •  must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
+ipv4.
+
      
+
+
      Force resolution of following host names on the command line
+to the IPv6 namespace.
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpq Invocation   
      
+
      
+
+
      1.1.5 command option (-c)
      
+
+
+
      This is the “run a command and exit” option.
+This option takes a string argument cmd.
+
      
+
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
        
+
      •  may appear an unlimited number of times.
+
      
+
+
      The following argument is interpreted as an interactive format command
 and is added to the list of commands to be executed on the specified
-host(s). 
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpq command,
-Up: ntpq Invocation
-
      
+host(s).
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpq Invocation   
      
 
      
-
-
      interactive option (-i)
      
-
-
      
-This is the “force ntpq to operate in interactive mode” option.
-
-
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
        
-
      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
-command, peers. 
-
      
-
-  
      Force ntpq to operate in interactive mode. 
+
+
      1.1.6 interactive option (-i)
      
+
+
+
      This is the “force ntpq to operate in interactive mode” option.
+
      
+
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
        
+
      •  must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
+command, peers.
+
      
+
+
      Force ntpq to operate in interactive mode.
 Prompts will be written to the standard output and
-commands read from the standard input. 
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpq interactive,
-Up: ntpq Invocation
-
      
+commands read from the standard input.
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpq Invocation   
      
 
      
+
+
      1.1.7 numeric option (-n)
      
+
 
-
      numeric option (-n)
      
-
-
      
-This is the “numeric host addresses” option. 
+
      This is the “numeric host addresses” option.
 Output all host addresses in dotted-quad numeric format rather than
-converting to the canonical host names. 
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpq numeric,
-Up: ntpq Invocation
-
      
+converting to the canonical host names.
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpq Invocation   
      
 
      
+
+
      1.1.8 old-rv option
      
+
 
-
      old-rv option
      
-
-
      
-This is the “always output status line with readvar” option. 
+
      This is the “always output status line with readvar” option.
 By default, ntpq now suppresses the associd=...
 line that precedes the output of readvar
 (alias rv) when a single variable is requested, such as
-ntpq -c "rv 0 offset". 
+ntpq -c "rv 0 offset".
 This option causes ntpq to include both lines of output
-for a single-variable readvar. 
+for a single-variable readvar.
 Using an environment variable to
 preset this option in a script will enable both older and
-newer ntpq to behave identically in this regard. 
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpq old-rv,
-Up: ntpq Invocation
-
      
+newer ntpq to behave identically in this regard.
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpq Invocation   
      
 
      
-
-
      peers option (-p)
      
-
-
      
-This is the “print a list of the peers” option.
-
-
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
        
-
      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
-interactive. 
-
      
-
-  
      Print a list of the peers known to the server as well as a summary
-of their state. This is equivalent to the 'peers' interactive command. 
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpq peers,
-Up: ntpq Invocation
-
      
+
+
      1.1.9 peers option (-p)
      
+
+
+
      This is the “print a list of the peers” option.
+
      
+
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
        
+
      •  must not appear in combination with any of the following options:
+interactive.
+
      
+
+
      Print a list of the peers known to the server as well as a summary
+of their state. This is equivalent to the ’peers’ interactive command.
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpq Invocation   
      
 
      
+
+
      1.1.10 refid option (-r)
      
+
 
-
      refid option (-r)
      
-
-
      
-This is the “set default display type for s2+ refids” option. 
+
      This is the “set default display type for s2+ refids” option.
 This option takes a keyword argument.
-
-
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
        
-
      • This option takes a keyword as its argument. 
-The argument sets an enumeration value that can be tested by comparing the option value macro (OPT_VALUE_REFID). 
+
        
+
        This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
          
+
        •  This option takes a keyword as its argument.
+The argument sets an enumeration value that can be tested by comparing the option value macro (OPT_VALUE_REFID).
 The available keywords are:
-     
                       hash ipv4
-    
          
-     
          or their numeric equivalent.
        
-
-  
        Set the default display format for S2+ refids. 
-
        
-
        
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpq refid,
-Up: ntpq Invocation
-
        
+
        
+
            hash ipv4
+
        
+
+
        or their numeric equivalent.
      
+
+
      Set the default display format for S2+ refids.
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpq Invocation   
      
 
      
+
+
      1.1.11 wide option (-w)
      
+
 
-
      wide option (-w)
      
-
-
      
-This is the “display the full 'remote' value” option. 
-Display the full value of the 'remote' value.  If this requires
+
      This is the “display the full ’remote’ value” option.
+Display the full value of the ’remote’ value.  If this requires
 more than 15 characters, display the full value, emit a newline,
 and continue the data display properly indented on the next line.
+
      
 
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpq wide,
-Up: ntpq Invocation
-
      
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpq Invocation   
      
 
      
-
-
      presetting/configuring ntpq
      
+
+
      1.1.12 presetting/configuring ntpq
      
 
 
      Any option that is not marked as not presettable may be preset by
-loading values from configuration ("rc" or "ini") files, and values from environment variables named NTPQ and NTPQ_<OPTION_NAME>.  <OPTION_NAME> must be one of
-the options listed above in upper case and segmented with underscores. 
+loading values from configuration ("rc" or "ini") files, and values from environment variables named NTPQ and NTPQ_<OPTION_NAME>.  <OPTION_NAME> must be one of
+the options listed above in upper case and segmented with underscores.
 The NTPQ variable will be tokenized and parsed like
 the command line.  The remaining variables are tested for existence and their
 values are treated like option arguments.
-
-
      libopts will search in 2 places for configuration files:
-     
        
-
      • $HOME
-
      • $PWD
-
      
-  The environment variables HOME, and PWD
-are expanded and replaced when ntpq runs. 
-For any of these that are plain files, they are simply processed. 
-For any that are directories, then a file named .ntprc is searched for
+
      
+
+
      libopts will search in 2 places for configuration files:
+
        
+
      •  $HOME
+
      •  $PWD
+
      
+
      The environment variables HOME, and PWD
+are expanded and replaced when ntpq runs.
+For any of these that are plain files, they are simply processed.
+For any that are directories, then a file named .ntprc is searched for
 within that directory and processed.
-
-  
      Configuration files may be in a wide variety of formats. 
+
      
+
      Configuration files may be in a wide variety of formats.
 The basic format is an option name followed by a value (argument) on the
 same line.  Values may be separated from the option name with a colon,
 equal sign or simply white space.  Values may be continued across multiple
 lines by escaping the newline with a backslash.
-
-  
      Multiple programs may also share the same initialization file. 
+
      
+
      Multiple programs may also share the same initialization file.
 Common options are collected at the top, followed by program specific
 segments.  The segments are separated by lines like:
-
          [NTPQ]
-
      
-  
      or by
-
          <?program ntpq>
-
      
-  
      Do not mix these styles within one configuration file.
-
-  
      Compound values and carefully constructed string values may also be
+
      
+
      [NTPQ]
+
      
+
      or by
+
      
+
      <?program ntpq>
+
      
+
      Do not mix these styles within one configuration file.
+
      
+
      Compound values and carefully constructed string values may also be
 specified using XML syntax:
-
          <option-name>
-       <sub-opt>...&lt;...&gt;...</sub-opt>
-    </option-name>
-
      
-  
      yielding an option-name.sub-opt string value of
-
          "...<...>..."
-
      
-  
      AutoOpts does not track suboptions.  You simply note that it is a
+
      
+
      <option-name>
+   <sub-opt>...&lt;...&gt;...</sub-opt>
+</option-name>
+
      
+
      yielding an option-name.sub-opt string value of
+
      
+
      "...<...>..."
+
      
+
      AutoOpts does not track suboptions.  You simply note that it is a
 hierarchicly valued option.  AutoOpts does provide a means for searching
 the associated name/value pair list (see: optionFindValue).
-
-  
      The command line options relating to configuration and/or usage help are:
-
-
      version (-)
      
+
      
+
      The command line options relating to configuration and/or usage help are:
+
      
+
+
      version (-)
      
 
 
      Print the program version to standard out, optionally with licensing
 information, then exit 0.  The optional argument specifies how much licensing
-detail to provide.  The default is to print just the version.  The licensing infomation may be selected with an option argument. 
+detail to provide.  The default is to print just the version.  The licensing infomation may be selected with an option argument.
 Only the first letter of the argument is examined:
-
-     
      
-
      version
      Only print the version.  This is the default. 
-
      copyright
      Name the copyright usage licensing terms. 
-
      verbose
      Print the full copyright usage licensing terms. 
+
      
+
      
+
      ‘version’
      
+
      Only print the version.  This is the default.
+
      
+
      ‘copyright’
      
+
      Name the copyright usage licensing terms.
+
      
+
      ‘verbose’
      
+
      Print the full copyright usage licensing terms.
+
      
 
      
 
-
      
-
      
-Previous: ntpq config,
-Up: ntpq Invocation
-
      
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Previous: , Up: ntpq Invocation   
      
 
      
-
-
      ntpq exit status
      
+
+
      1.1.13 ntpq exit status
      
 
 
      One of the following exit values will be returned:
-     
      
-
      0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)
      Successful program execution. 
-
      1 (EXIT_FAILURE)
      The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid. 
-
      66 (EX_NOINPUT)
      A specified configuration file could not be loaded. 
-
      70 (EX_SOFTWARE)
      libopts had an internal operational error.  Please report
-it to autogen-users@lists.sourceforge.net.  Thank you. 
+
      
+
      ‘0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)’
      
+
      Successful program execution.
+
      
+
      ‘1 (EXIT_FAILURE)’
      
+
      The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.
+
      
+
      ‘66 (EX_NOINPUT)’
      
+
      A specified configuration file could not be loaded.
+
      
+
      ‘70 (EX_SOFTWARE)’
      
+
      libopts had an internal operational error.  Please report
+it to autogen-users@lists.sourceforge.net.  Thank you.
+
      
 
      
 
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpq Description,
-Up: Top
-
      
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   
      
 
      
-
-
-
      Usage
      
-
-
      What Default Flag Option
-
      configuration file
-/etc/ntp.conf
--c
-conffile
-
      frequency file
-none
--f
-driftfile
-
      leapseconds file
-none
-
-leapfile
-
      process ID file
-none
--p
-pidfile
-
      log file
-system log
--l
-logfile
-
      include file
-none
-none
-includefile
-
      statistics path
-/var/NTP
--s
-statsdir
-
      keys path
-/usr/local/etc
--k
-keysdir
-
      
-
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: Usage,
-Up: Top
-
      
+
+
      1.2 Usage
      
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
      WhatDefaultFlagOption
      configuration file/etc/ntp.conf-cconffile
      frequency filenone-fdriftfile
      leapseconds filenoneleapfile
      process ID filenone-ppidfile
      log filesystem log-llogfile
      include filenonenoneincludefile
      statistics path/var/NTP-sstatsdir
      keys path/usr/local/etc-kkeysdir
      
+
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   
      
 
      
-
-
-
      Internal Commands
      
+
+
      1.3 Internal Commands
      
 
 
      Interactive format commands consist of a keyword followed by zero to four arguments.  Only enough characters of the full keyword to uniquely identify the command need be typed.  The output of a command is normally sent to the standard output, but optionally the output of individual commands may be sent to a file by appending a >, followed by a file name, to the command line.  A number of interactive format commands are executed entirely within the ntpq program itself and do not result in NTP mode-6 requests being sent to a server.  These are described following.
-
-     
      
-
       ? [command_keyword]
      help [command_keyword]
      A ? by itself will print a list of all the command keywords known to ntpq.  A ? followed by a command keyword will print function and usage information about the command.
-
-     
       >addvars name [ = value] [...]
      rmvars name [...]
      clearvars</dt>
      The arguments to these commands consist of a list of items of the form
-name = value, where the = value is ignored,
-and can be omitted in read requests. 
+
      
+
      
+
      ? [command_keyword]
      
+
      help [command_keyword]
      
+
      A ? by itself will print a list of all the command keywords known to ntpq.  A ? followed by a command keyword will print function and usage information about the command.
+
      
+
      
+
      >addvars name [ = value] [...]
      
+
      rmvars name [...]
      
+
      clearvars</dt>
      
+
      The arguments to these commands consist of a list of items of the form
+name = value, where the = value is ignored,
+and can be omitted in read requests.
 ntpq maintains an internal list in which data to be included
 in control messages can be assembled, and sent using the readlist
-and writelist commands described below. 
+and writelist commands described below.
 The addvars command allows variables and optional values
-to be added to the list. 
+to be added to the list.
 If more than one variable is to be added
-the list should be comma-separated and not contain white space. 
+the list should be comma-separated and not contain white space.
 The rmvars command can be used to remove individual variables
 from the list,
 while the clearlist command removes all variables from the list.
-
-     
       cooked
      Display server messages in prettyprint format.
-
-     
       debug more | less | off
      Turns internal query program debugging on and off.
-
-     
       delay milliseconds
      Specify a time interval to be added to timestamps included in requests which require authentication.  This is used to enable (unreliable) server reconfiguration over long delay network paths or between machines whose clocks are unsynchronized.  Actually the server does not now require timestamps in authenticated requests, so this command may be obsolete.
-
-     
       host name
      Set the host to which future queries will be sent. 
+
      
+
      
+
      cooked
      
+
      Display server messages in prettyprint format.
+
      
+
      
+
      debug more | less | off
      
+
      Turns internal query program debugging on and off.
+
      
+
      
+
      delay milliseconds
      
+
      Specify a time interval to be added to timestamps included in requests which require authentication.  This is used to enable (unreliable) server reconfiguration over long delay network paths or between machines whose clocks are unsynchronized.  Actually the server does not now require timestamps in authenticated requests, so this command may be obsolete.
+
      
+
      
+
      host name
      
+
      Set the host to which future queries will be sent.
 The name may be either a DNS name or a numeric address.
-
-     
       hostnames [yes | no]
      If yes is specified, host names are printed in information displays. 
-If no is specified, numeric addresses are printed instead. 
+
      
+
      
+
      hostnames [yes | no]
      
+
      If yes is specified, host names are printed in information displays.
+If no is specified, numeric addresses are printed instead.
 The default is yes,
 unless modified using the command line -n switch.
-
-     
       keyid keyid
      This command specifies the key number to be used
-to authenticate configuration requests. 
+
      
+
      
+
      keyid keyid
      
+
      This command specifies the key number to be used
+to authenticate configuration requests.
 This must correspond to a key ID configured in ntp.conf for this purpose.
-
-     
       keytype
      Specify the digest algorithm to use for authenticated requests,
-with default MD5. 
+
      
+
      
+
      keytype
      
+
      Specify the digest algorithm to use for authenticated requests,
+with default MD5.
 If the OpenSSL library is installed,
-digest can be be any message digest algorithm supported by the library. 
+digest can be be any message digest algorithm supported by the library.
 The current selections are: AES128CMAC, MD2, MD4, MD5, MDC2, RIPEMD160, SHA and SHA1.
-
-     
       ntpversion 1 | 2 | 3 | 4
      Sets the NTP version number which ntpq claims in packets. 
-Defaults to 2. 
+
      
+
      
+
      ntpversion 1 | 2 | 3 | 4
      
+
      Sets the NTP version number which ntpq claims in packets.
+Defaults to 2.
 Note that mode-6 control messages (and modes, for that matter)
-didn't exist in NTP version 1.
-
-     
       passwd
      This command prompts for a password to authenticate requests. 
+didn’t exist in NTP version 1.
+
      
+
      
+
      passwd
      
+
      This command prompts for a password to authenticate requests.
 The password must correspond to the key ID configured in ntp.conf for this purpose.
-
-     
       quit
      Exit ntpq.
-
-     
       raw
      Display server messages as received and without reformatting.
-
-     
       timeout milliseconds
      Specify a timeout period for responses to server queries. 
-The default is about 5000 milliseconds. 
+
      
+
      
+
      quit
      
+
      Exit ntpq.
+
      
+
      
+
      raw
      
+
      Display server messages as received and without reformatting.
+
      
+
      
+
      timeout milliseconds
      
+
      Specify a timeout period for responses to server queries.
+The default is about 5000 milliseconds.
 Note that since ntpq retries each query once after a timeout
 the total waiting time for a timeout will be twice the timeout value set.
+
      
+
      
+
      
 
-  
      
-
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: Internal Commands,
-Up: Top
-
      
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   
      
 
      
+
+
      1.4 Control Message Commands
      
 
-
-
      Control Message Commands
      
-
-
      Association IDs are used to identify system, peer and clock variables. 
+
      Association IDs are used to identify system, peer and clock variables.
 System variables are assigned an association ID of zero and system name space,
-while each association is assigned a nonzero association ID and peer namespace. 
+while each association is assigned a nonzero association ID and peer namespace.
 Most control commands send a single mode-6 message to the server
-and expect a single response message. 
+and expect a single response message.
 The exceptions are the peers command,
 which sends a series of messages,
 and the mreadlist and mreadvar commands,
 which iterate over a range of associations.
-
-  
      
-     
      
-
      associations
      Display a list of mobilized associations in the form:
+
      
+
      
+
      associations
      
+
      Display a list of mobilized associations in the form:
 
      
 ind assid status conf reach auth condition last_event cnt
-
-     
      Variable Description
-
-     

      ind
-index on this list
-
-     

      assid
-association ID
-
-     

      status
-peer status word
-
-     

      conf
-yes: persistent, no: ephemeral
-
-     

      reach
-yes: reachable, no: unreachable
-
-     

      auth
-ok, yes, bad and none
-
-     

      condition
-selection status (see the select field of the peer status word)
-
-     

      last_event
-event report (see the event field of the peer status word)
-
-     

      cnt
-event count (see the count field of the peer status word)
-
-     
      
-
-     
       clockvar assocID [name [ = value [...]] [...]]
      cv assocID [name [ = value [...] ][...]]
      Display a list of clock variables for those associations supporting a reference clock.
-
-     
       :config [...]
      Send the remainder of the command line, including whitespace, to the server
+
      
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
      VariableDescription
      indindex on this list
      assidassociation ID
      statuspeer status word
      confyes: persistent, no: ephemeral
      reachyes: reachable, no: unreachable
      authok, yes, bad and none
      conditionselection status (see the select field of the peer status word)
      last_eventevent report (see the event field of the peer status word)
      cnt
+event count (see the count field of the peer status word)
      
+
+
      
+
      clockvar assocID [name [ = value [...]] [...]]
      
+
      cv assocID [name [ = value [...] ][...]]
      
+
      Display a list of ‘clock variables’ for those associations supporting a reference clock.
+
      
+
      
+
      :config [...]
      
+
      Send the remainder of the command line, including whitespace, to the server
 as a run-time configuration command in the same format
-as the configuration file. 
-This command is experimental until further notice and clarification. 
+as the configuration file.
+This command is experimental until further notice and clarification.
 Authentication is of course required.
-
-     
       config-from-file filename
      Send the each line of filename to the server as
-run-time configuration commands in the same format as the configuration file. 
-This command is experimental until further notice and clarification. 
+
      
+
      
+
      config-from-file filename
      
+
      Send the each line of filename to the server as
+run-time configuration commands in the same format as the configuration file.
+This command is experimental until further notice and clarification.
 Authentication is required.
-
-     
       ifstats
      Display statistics for each local network address. 
+
      
+
      
+
      ifstats
      
+
      Display statistics for each local network address.
 Authentication is required.
-
-     
       iostats
      Display network and reference clock I/O statistics.
-
-     
       kerninfo
      Display kernel loop and PPS statistics. 
-As with other ntpq output, times are in milliseconds. 
+
      
+
      
+
      iostats
      
+
      Display network and reference clock I/O statistics.
+
      
+
      
+
      kerninfo
      
+
      Display kernel loop and PPS statistics.
+As with other ntpq output, times are in milliseconds.
 The precision value displayed is in milliseconds as well,
 unlike the precision system variable.
-
-     
       lassociations
      Perform the same function as the associations command,
+
      
+
      
+
      lassociations
      
+
      Perform the same function as the associations command,
 except display mobilized and unmobilized associations.
-
-     
       monstats
      Display monitor facility statistics.
-
-     
       mrulist [limited | kod | mincount=count | laddr=localaddr | sort=sortorder | resany=hexmask | resall=hexmask]
      Obtain and print traffic counts collected and maintained by
-the monitor facility. 
-With the exception of sort=sortorder,
-the options filter the list returned by ntpd. 
+
      
+
      
+
      monstats
      
+
      Display monitor facility statistics.
+
      
+
      
+
      mrulist [limited | kod | mincount=count | laddr=localaddr | sort=sortorder | resany=hexmask | resall=hexmask]
      
+
      Obtain and print traffic counts collected and maintained by
+the monitor facility.
+With the exception of sort=sortorder,
+the options filter the list returned by ntpd.
 The limited and kod options return only entries
 representing client addresses from which the last packet received
-triggered either discarding or a KoD response. 
-The mincount=count option filters entries representing
-less than count packets. 
-The laddr=localaddr option filters entries for packets
-received on any local address other than localaddr. 
-resany=hexmask and resall=hexmask
+triggered either discarding or a KoD response.
+The mincount=count option filters entries representing
+less than count packets.
+The laddr=localaddr option filters entries for packets
+received on any local address other than localaddr.
+resany=hexmask and resall=hexmask
 filter entries containing none or less than all, respectively,
-of the bits in hexmask, which must begin with 0x. 
+of the bits in hexmask, which must begin with 0x.
 
      
-The sortorder defaults to lstint and may be any of
+The sortorder defaults to lstint and may be any of
 addr, count, avgint, lstint, or
-any of those preceded by a minus sign (hyphen) to reverse the sort order. 
+any of those preceded by a minus sign (hyphen) to reverse the sort order.
 The output columns are:
-
-     
      
+
+
+
+
+
+
      Column Description
-
-     

      lstint
-
-Interval in s between the receipt of the most recent packet from this
-address and the completion of the retrieval of the MRU list by ntpq
-
-     

      avgint
-
-Average interval in s between packets from this address.
-
-     

      rstr
-
-Restriction flags associated with this address. 
+
      
+
+
+
+
+
+
      ColumnDescription
      lstintInterval in s between the receipt of the most recent packet from this
+address and the completion of the retrieval of the MRU list by ntpq
      avgintAverage interval in s between packets from this address.
      rstrRestriction flags associated with this address.
 Most are copied unchanged from the matching restrict command,
 however 0x400 (kod) and 0x20 (limited) flags are cleared unless
-the last packet from this address triggered a rate control response.
-
-     

      r
-
-Rate control indicator, either a period, L or K for
+the last packet from this address triggered a rate control response.
      rRate control indicator, either a period, L or K for
 no rate control response, rate limiting by discarding, or
-rate limiting with a KoD response, respectively.
-
-     

      m
-
-Packet mode. 
-
      v
-
-Packet version number.
-
-     

      count
-
-Packets received from this address.
-
-     

      rport
-
-Source port of last packet from this address.
-
-     

      remote address
-
-DNS name, numeric address, or address followed by claimed DNS name which
-could not be verified in parentheses.
-
-     
      
-
-     
       mreadvar assocID assocID [ variable_name [ = value[ ... ]
       mrv assocID assocID [ variable_name [ = value[ ... ]
      Perform the same function as the readvar command,
-except for a range of association IDs. 
+rate limiting with a KoD response, respectively.
      mPacket mode.
      vPacket version number.
      countPackets received from this address.
      rportSource port of last packet from this address.
      remote addressDNS name, numeric address, or address followed by claimed DNS name which
+could not be verified in parentheses.
      
+
+
      
+
      mreadvar assocID assocID [ variable_name [ = value[ ... ]
      
+
      mrv assocID assocID [ variable_name [ = value[ ... ]
      
+
      Perform the same function as the readvar command,
+except for a range of association IDs.
 This range is determined from the association list cached by
 the most recent associations command.
-
-     
       passociations
      Perform the same function as the associations command, except that
+
      
+
      
+
      passociations
      
+
      Perform the same function as the associations command, except that
 it uses previously stored data rather than making a new query.
-
-     
       peers
      Display a list of peers in the form:
+
      
+
      
+
      peers
      
+
      Display a list of peers in the form:
 
      
 [tally]remote refid st t when pool reach delay offset jitter
-
-     
      
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
      Variable Description
-
      [tally]
-
-single-character code indicating current value of the select field
-of the peer status word.
-
-     

      remote
-
-host name (or IP number) of peer
-
-     

      refid
-
-association ID or kiss code.
-
-     

      st
-
-stratum
-
-     

      t
-
-u: unicast or manycast client,
+
      
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
      VariableDescription
      [tally]single-character code indicating current value of the select field
+of the peer status word.
      remotehost name (or IP number) of peer
      refidassociation ID or kiss code.
      ststratum
      tu: unicast or manycast client,
 b: broadcast or multicast client,
 l: local (reference clock),
 s: symmetric (peer),
 A: manycast server,
 B: broadcast server,
-M: multicast server.
-
-     

      when
-
-sec/min/hr since last received packet
-
-     

      poll
-
-poll interval (log(2) s)
-
-     

      reach
-
-reach shift register (octal)
-
-     

      delay
-
-roundtrip delay
-
-     

      offset
-
-offset of server relative to this host
-
-     

      jitter
-
-jitter
-
-     
      
-
-     
       readvar assocID name [ = value ] [,...]
      rv assocID [ name ] [,...]
      Display the specified variables. 
-If assocID is zero,
-the variables are from the system variables name space,
-otherwise they are from the peer variables name space. 
-The assocID is required, as the same name can occur in both spaces. 
+M: multicast server.
      whensec/min/hr since last received packet
      pollpoll interval (log(2) s)
      reachreach shift register (octal)
      delayroundtrip delay
      offsetoffset of server relative to this host
      jitterjitter
      
+
+
      
+
      readvar assocID name [ = value ] [,...]
      
+
      rv assocID [ name ] [,...]
      
+
      Display the specified variables.
+If assocID is zero,
+the variables are from the ‘system variables’ name space,
+otherwise they are from the ‘peer variables’ name space.
+The assocID is required, as the same name can occur in both spaces.
 If no name is included,
-all operative variables in the name space are displayed. 
-In this case only, if the assocID is omitted, it is assumed zero. 
-Multiple names are specified with comma separators and without whitespace. 
+all operative variables in the name space are displayed.
+In this case only, if the assocID is omitted, it is assumed zero.
+Multiple names are specified with comma separators and without whitespace.
 Note that time values are represented in milliseconds and
-frequency values in parts-per-million (PPM). 
+frequency values in parts-per-million (PPM).
 Some NTP timestamps are represented in the format YYYYMMDDTTTT,
 where YYYY is the year, MM the month of year, DD the day of month and
 TTTT the time of day.
-
-     
       saveconfig filename
      Write the current configuration, including any runtime modifications
+
      
+
      
+
      saveconfig filename
      
+
      Write the current configuration, including any runtime modifications
 given with :config or config-from-file,
-to the ntpd host's file filename. 
+to the ntpd host’s file filename.
 This command will be rejected by the server unless
 saveconfigdir
-appears in the ntpd configuration file. 
+appears in the ntpd configuration file.
 filename can use strftime() format specifiers
 to substitute the current date and time, for example,
-saveconfig ntp-%Y%m%d-%H%M%S.conf. 
-The filename used is stored in system variable savedconfig. 
+saveconfig ntp-%Y%m%d-%H%M%S.conf.
+The filename used is stored in system variable savedconfig.
 Authentication is required.
-
-     
       writevar assocID name = value [,...]
      Write the specified variables. 
-If the assocID is zero, the variables are from the
-system variables name space, otherwise they are from the
-peer variables name	space. 
-The assocID is required,
+
      
+
      
+
      writevar assocID name = value [,...]
      
+
      Write the specified variables.
+If the assocID is zero, the variables are from the
+‘system variables’ name space, otherwise they are from the
+‘peer variables’ name	space.
+The assocID is required,
 as the same name can occur in both spaces.
+
      
+
      
+
      sysinfo
      
+
      Display operational summary.
+
      
+
      
+
      sysstats
      
+
      Print statistics counters maintained in the protocol module.
+
      
+
      
+
      
 
-     
       sysinfo
      Display operational summary.
-
-     
       sysstats
      Print statistics counters maintained in the protocol module.
-
-  
      
-
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: Control Message Commands,
-Up: Top
-
      
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   
      
 
      
-
-
-
      Status Words and Kiss Codes
      
+
+
      1.5 Status Words and Kiss Codes
      
 
 
      The current state of the operating program is shown
 in a set of status words maintained by the system
-and each association separately. 
+and each association separately.
 These words are displayed in the rv and as commands
-both in hexadecimal and decoded short tip strings. 
+both in hexadecimal and decoded short tip strings.
 The codes, tips and short explanations are on the
-Event Messages and Status Words page. 
+Event Messages and Status Words page.
 The page also includes a list of system and peer messages,
 the code for the latest of which is included in the status word.
-
-  
      Information resulting from protocol machine state transitions
+
      
+
      Information resulting from protocol machine state transitions
 is displayed using an informal set of ASCII strings called
-kiss codes. 
-The original purpose was for kiss-o'-death (KoD) packets sent
-by the server to advise the client of an unusual condition. 
+kiss codes.
+The original purpose was for kiss-o’-death (KoD) packets sent
+by the server to advise the client of an unusual condition.
 They are now displayed, when appropriate,
 in the reference identifier field in various billboards.
-
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: Status Words and Kiss Codes,
-Up: Top
-
      
+
      
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   
      
 
      
+
+
      1.6 System Variables
      
 
-
-
      System Variables
      
-
-
      The following system variables appear in the rv billboard. 
+
      The following system variables appear in the rv billboard.
 Not all variables are displayed in some configurations.
-
-  
      Variable Description
-
-

      status
-
-system status word
-
-

      version
-
-NTP software version and build time
-
-

      processor
-
-hardware platform and version
-
-

      system
-
-operating system and version
-
-

      leap
-
-leap warning indicator (0-3)
-
-

      stratum
-
-stratum (1-15)
-
-

      precision
-
-precision (log(2) s)
-
-

      rootdelay
-
-total roundtrip delay to the primary reference clock
-
-

      rootdisp
-
-total dispersion to the primary reference clock
-
-

      peer
-
-system peer association ID
-
-

      tc
-time constant and poll exponent (log(2) s) (3-17)
-
-  

      mintc
-minimum time constant (log(2) s) (3-10)
-
-  

      clock
-
-date and time of day
-
-

      refid
-reference ID or kiss code
-
-  

      reftime
-
-reference time
-
-

      offset
-
-combined offset of server relative to this host
-
-

      sys_jitter
-
-combined system jitter
-
-

      frequency
-
-frequency offset (PPM) relative to hardware clock
-
-

      clk_wander
-
-clock frequency wander (PPM)
-
-

      clk_jitter
-
-clock jitter
-
-

      tai
-
-TAI-UTC offset (s)
-
-

      leapsec
-
-NTP seconds when the next leap second is/was inserted
-
-

      expire
-
-NTP seconds when the NIST leapseconds file expires
-
-  
      
-
-  
      The jitter and wander statistics are exponentially-weighted RMS averages. 
+
      
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
      VariableDescription
      statussystem status word
      versionNTP software version and build time
      processorhardware platform and version
      systemoperating system and version
      leapleap warning indicator (0-3)
      stratumstratum (1-15)
      precisionprecision (log(2) s)
      rootdelaytotal roundtrip delay to the primary reference clock
      rootdisptotal dispersion to the primary reference clock
      peersystem peer association ID
      tc
+time constant and poll exponent (log(2) s) (3-17)
      mintc
+minimum time constant (log(2) s) (3-10)
      clockdate and time of day
      refid
+reference ID or kiss code
      reftimereference time
      offsetcombined offset of server relative to this host
      sys_jittercombined system jitter
      frequencyfrequency offset (PPM) relative to hardware clock
      clk_wanderclock frequency wander (PPM)
      clk_jitterclock jitter
      taiTAI-UTC offset (s)
      leapsecNTP seconds when the next leap second is/was inserted
      expireNTP seconds when the NIST leapseconds file expires
      
+
+
      The jitter and wander statistics are exponentially-weighted RMS averages.
 The system jitter is defined in the NTPv4 specification;
 the clock jitter statistic is computed by the clock discipline module.
-
-  
      When the NTPv4 daemon is compiled with the OpenSSL software library,
+
      
+
      When the NTPv4 daemon is compiled with the OpenSSL software library,
 additional system variables are displayed, including some or all of the
 following, depending on the particular Autokey dance:
-
-  
      Variable Description
-
-

      host
-
-Autokey host name for this host
-
-

      ident
-
-Autokey group name for this host
-
-

      flags
-
-host flags  (see Autokey specification)
-
-

      digest
-
-OpenSSL message digest algorithm
-
-

      signature
-
-OpenSSL digest/signature scheme
-
-

      update
-
-NTP seconds at last signature update
-
-

      cert
-
-certificate subject, issuer and certificate flags
-
-

      until
-
-NTP seconds when the certificate expires
-
-  
      
-
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: System Variables,
-Up: Top
-
      
+
      
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
      VariableDescription
      hostAutokey host name for this host
      identAutokey group name for this host
      flagshost flags  (see Autokey specification)
      digestOpenSSL message digest algorithm
      signatureOpenSSL digest/signature scheme
      updateNTP seconds at last signature update
      certcertificate subject, issuer and certificate flags
      untilNTP seconds when the certificate expires
      
+
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   
      
 
      
-
-
-
      Peer Variables
      
+
+
      1.7 Peer Variables
      
 
 
      The following peer variables appear in the rv billboard
-for each association. 
+for each association.
 Not all variables are displayed in some configurations.
-
-  
      Variable Description
-
-

      associd
-
-association ID
-
-

      status
-
-peer status word
-
-

      srcadr
-
      srcport
-
-source (remote) IP address and port
-
-

      dstadr
-
      dstport
-
-destination (local) IP address and port
-
-

      leap
-
-leap indicator (0-3)
-
-

      stratum
-
-stratum (0-15)
-
-

      precision
-
-precision (log(2) s)
-
-

      rootdelay
-
-total roundtrip delay to the primary reference clock
-
-

      rootdisp
-total root dispersion to the primary reference clock
-
-

      refid
-
-reference ID or kiss code
-
-

      reftime
-
-reference time
-
-

      reach
-
-reach register (octal)
-
-

      unreach
-
-unreach counter
-
-

      hmode
-
-host mode (1-6)
-
-

      pmode
-
-peer mode (1-5)
-
-

      hpoll
-
-host poll exponent (log(2) s) (3-17)
-
      ppoll
-
-peer poll exponent (log(2) s) (3-17)
-
-

      headway
-
-headway (see Rate Management and the Kiss-o'-Death Packet)
-
-

      flash
-
-flash status word
-
-

      offset
-
-filter offset
-
-

      delay
-
-filter delay
-
-

      dispersion
-
-filter dispersion
-
-

      jitter
-
-filter jitter
-
-

      ident
-
-Autokey group name for this association
-
-

      bias
-
-unicast/broadcast bias
-
-

      xleave
-
-interleave delay (see NTP Interleaved Modes)
-
-  
      
-
-  
      The bias variable is calculated when the first broadcast packet is received
+
      
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
      VariableDescription
      associdassociation ID
      statuspeer status word
      srcadr
+
      srcport
+
      		source (remote) IP address and port
      dstadr
+
      dstport
+
      		destination (local) IP address and port
      leapleap indicator (0-3)
      stratumstratum (0-15)
      precisionprecision (log(2) s)
      rootdelaytotal roundtrip delay to the primary reference clock
      rootdisptotal root dispersion to the primary reference clock
      refidreference ID or kiss code
      reftimereference time
      reachreach register (octal)
      unreachunreach counter
      hmodehost mode (1-6)
      pmodepeer mode (1-5)
      hpollhost poll exponent (log(2) s) (3-17)
      ppollpeer poll exponent (log(2) s) (3-17)
      headwayheadway (see Rate Management and the Kiss-o’-Death Packet)
      flashflash status word
      offsetfilter offset
      delayfilter delay
      dispersionfilter dispersion
      jitterfilter jitter
      identAutokey group name for this association
      biasunicast/broadcast bias
      xleaveinterleave delay (see NTP Interleaved Modes)
      
+
+
      The bias variable is calculated when the first broadcast packet is received
 after the calibration volley.  It represents the offset of the broadcast
 subgraph relative to the unicast subgraph.  The xleave variable appears
 only the interleaved symmetric and interleaved modes.  It represents
 the internal queuing, buffering and transmission delays for the preceding
 packet.
-
-  
      When the NTPv4 daemon is compiled with the OpenSSL software library,
+
      
+
      When the NTPv4 daemon is compiled with the OpenSSL software library,
 additional peer variables are displayed, including the following:
-
-  
      Variable Description
-
-

      flags
-
-peer flags (see Autokey specification)
-
-

      host
-
-Autokey server name
-
-

      flags
-
-peer flags (see Autokey specification)
-
-

      signature
-
-OpenSSL digest/signature scheme
-
-

      initsequence
-
-initial key ID
-
-

      initkey
-
-initial key index
-
-

      timestamp
-
-Autokey signature timestamp
-
-  
      
-
-
      
-
      
-Previous: Peer Variables,
-Up: Top
-
      
+
      
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
      VariableDescription
      flagspeer flags (see Autokey specification)
      hostAutokey server name
      flagspeer flags (see Autokey specification)
      signatureOpenSSL digest/signature scheme
      initsequenceinitial key ID
      initkeyinitial key index
      timestampAutokey signature timestamp
      
+
+
      
+
+
      
+
      
+Previous: , Up: Top   
      
 
      
-
-
-
      Clock Variables
      
+
+
      1.8 Clock Variables
      
 
 
      The following clock variables appear in the cv billboard for each association with a reference clock.  Not all variables are displayed in some configurations.
-
-  
      Variable Description
-
      associd
-association ID
-
      status
-clock status word
-
      device
-device description
-
      timecode
-ASCII time code string (specific to device)
-
      poll
-poll messages sent
-
      noreply
-no reply
-
      badformat
-bad format
-
      baddata
-bad date or time
-
      fudgetime1
-fudge time 1
-
      fudgetime2
-fudge time 2
-
      stratum
-driver stratum
-
      refid
-driver reference ID
-
      flags
-driver flags
-  
      
-
-
-
+
      
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
      VariableDescription
      associdassociation ID
      statusclock status word
      devicedevice description
      timecodeASCII time code string (specific to device)
      pollpoll messages sent
      noreplyno reply
      badformatbad format
      baddatabad date or time
      fudgetime1fudge time 1
      fudgetime2fudge time 2
      stratumdriver stratum
      refiddriver reference ID
      flagsdriver flags
      
+
      
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/ntpq/ntpq.man.in b/ntpq/ntpq.man.in
index d9f229abb..861460370 100644
--- a/ntpq/ntpq.man.in
+++ b/ntpq/ntpq.man.in
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH ntpq @NTPQ_MS@ "14 Aug 2018" "4.2.8p12" "User Commands"
+.TH ntpq @NTPQ_MS@ "20 Feb 2019" "4.2.8p13" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-_XaWRE/ag-lYaOQE)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:29:58 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:02 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions ntpq-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/ntpq/ntpq.mdoc.in b/ntpq/ntpq.mdoc.in
index 60b361c53..d6ebeb5fc 100644
--- a/ntpq/ntpq.mdoc.in
+++ b/ntpq/ntpq.mdoc.in
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt NTPQ @NTPQ_MS@ User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntpq-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:30:05 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:56:59 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    ntpq-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/ntpsnmpd/invoke-ntpsnmpd.texi b/ntpsnmpd/invoke-ntpsnmpd.texi
index 34b283df7..4b537ae23 100644
--- a/ntpsnmpd/invoke-ntpsnmpd.texi
+++ b/ntpsnmpd/invoke-ntpsnmpd.texi
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 #
 # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (invoke-ntpsnmpd.texi)
 #
-# It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:30:14 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+# It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:07 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 # From the definitions    ntpsnmpd-opts.def
 # and the template file   agtexi-cmd.tpl
 @end ignore
@@ -47,31 +47,30 @@ with a status code of 0.
 
 @exampleindent 0
 @example
-ntpsnmpd - NTP SNMP MIB agent - Ver. 4.2.7p245
-USAGE:  ntpsnmpd [ - [] | --[@{=| @}] ]...
+ntpsnmpd - NTP SNMP MIB agent - Ver. 4.2.8p13
+Usage:  ntpsnmpd [ - [] | --[@{=| @}] ]...
   Flg Arg Option-Name    Description
    -n no  nofork         Do not fork
    -p no  syslog         Log to syslog()
       Str agentxsocket   The socket address ntpsnmpd uses to connect to net-snmpd
-      opt version        Output version information and exit
-   -? no  help           Display extended usage information and exit
-   -! no  more-help      Extended usage information passed thru pager
-   -> opt save-opts      Save the option state to a config file
-   -< Str load-opts      Load options from a config file
-                                - disabled as --no-load-opts
+      opt version        output version information and exit
+   -? no  help           display extended usage information and exit
+   -! no  more-help      extended usage information passed thru pager
+   -> opt save-opts      save the option state to a config file
+   -< Str load-opts      load options from a config file
+                                - disabled as '--no-load-opts'
                                 - may appear multiple times
 
 Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single
 hyphen and the flag character.
 
 
-
 The following option preset mechanisms are supported:
  - reading file $HOME/.ntprc
  - reading file ./.ntprc
  - examining environment variables named NTPSNMPD_*
 
-please send bug reports to:  http://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@@ntp.org
+Please send bug reports to:  
 @end example
 @exampleindent 4
 
diff --git a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd-opts.c b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd-opts.c
index 76fd86ba7..609caff4d 100644
--- a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd-opts.c
+++ b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd-opts.c
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
 /*
  *  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntpsnmpd-opts.c)
  *
- *  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:30:08 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+ *  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:03 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
  *  From the definitions    ntpsnmpd-opts.def
  *  and the template file   options
  *
- * Generated from AutoOpts 41:0:16 templates.
+ * Generated from AutoOpts 41:1:16 templates.
  *
  *  AutoOpts is a copyrighted work.  This source file is not encumbered
  *  by AutoOpts licensing, but is provided under the licensing terms chosen
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ extern FILE * option_usage_fp;
  *  static const strings for ntpsnmpd options
  */
 static char const ntpsnmpd_opt_strs[1613] =
-/*     0 */ "ntpsnmpd 4.2.8p12\n"
+/*     0 */ "ntpsnmpd 4.2.8p13\n"
             "Copyright (C) 1992-2017 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n"
             "This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n"
             "redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n"
@@ -101,14 +101,14 @@ static char const ntpsnmpd_opt_strs[1613] =
 /*  1415 */ "no-load-opts\0"
 /*  1428 */ "no\0"
 /*  1431 */ "NTPSNMPD\0"
-/*  1440 */ "ntpsnmpd - NTP SNMP MIB agent - Ver. 4.2.8p12\n"
+/*  1440 */ "ntpsnmpd - NTP SNMP MIB agent - Ver. 4.2.8p13\n"
             "Usage:  %s [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]...\n\0"
 /*  1544 */ "$HOME\0"
 /*  1550 */ ".\0"
 /*  1552 */ ".ntprc\0"
 /*  1559 */ "http://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org\0"
 /*  1593 */ "\n\0"
-/*  1595 */ "ntpsnmpd 4.2.8p12";
+/*  1595 */ "ntpsnmpd 4.2.8p13";
 
 /**
  *  nofork option description:
@@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ static void bogus_function(void) {
      translate option names.
    */
   /* referenced via ntpsnmpdOptions.pzCopyright */
-  puts(_("ntpsnmpd 4.2.8p12\n\
+  puts(_("ntpsnmpd 4.2.8p13\n\
 Copyright (C) 1992-2017 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n\
 This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n\
 redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n\
@@ -599,14 +599,14 @@ implied warranty.\n"));
   puts(_("load options from a config file"));
 
   /* referenced via ntpsnmpdOptions.pzUsageTitle */
-  puts(_("ntpsnmpd - NTP SNMP MIB agent - Ver. 4.2.8p12\n\
+  puts(_("ntpsnmpd - NTP SNMP MIB agent - Ver. 4.2.8p13\n\
 Usage:  %s [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]...\n"));
 
   /* referenced via ntpsnmpdOptions.pzExplain */
   puts(_("\n"));
 
   /* referenced via ntpsnmpdOptions.pzFullVersion */
-  puts(_("ntpsnmpd 4.2.8p12"));
+  puts(_("ntpsnmpd 4.2.8p13"));
 
   /* referenced via ntpsnmpdOptions.pzFullUsage */
   puts(_("<<>>"));
diff --git a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd-opts.h b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd-opts.h
index 571589122..8b88a5128 100644
--- a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd-opts.h
+++ b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd-opts.h
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
 /*
  *  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntpsnmpd-opts.h)
  *
- *  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:30:08 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+ *  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:03 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
  *  From the definitions    ntpsnmpd-opts.def
  *  and the template file   options
  *
- * Generated from AutoOpts 41:0:16 templates.
+ * Generated from AutoOpts 41:1:16 templates.
  *
  *  AutoOpts is a copyrighted work.  This header file is not encumbered
  *  by AutoOpts licensing, but is provided under the licensing terms chosen
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
  *  tolerable version is at least as old as what was current when the header
  *  template was released.
  */
-#define AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION 167936
+#define AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION 167937
 #if (AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION < OPTIONS_MINIMUM_VERSION) \
  || (AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION > OPTIONS_STRUCT_VERSION)
 # error option template version mismatches autoopts/options.h header
@@ -76,9 +76,9 @@ typedef enum {
 /** count of all options for ntpsnmpd */
 #define OPTION_CT    8
 /** ntpsnmpd version */
-#define NTPSNMPD_VERSION       "4.2.8p12"
+#define NTPSNMPD_VERSION       "4.2.8p13"
 /** Full ntpsnmpd version text */
-#define NTPSNMPD_FULL_VERSION  "ntpsnmpd 4.2.8p12"
+#define NTPSNMPD_FULL_VERSION  "ntpsnmpd 4.2.8p13"
 
 /**
  *  Interface defines for all options.  Replace "n" with the UPPER_CASED
diff --git a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.1ntpsnmpdman b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.1ntpsnmpdman
index edea2f231..f8574d77e 100644
--- a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.1ntpsnmpdman
+++ b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.1ntpsnmpdman
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH ntpsnmpd 1ntpsnmpdman "14 Aug 2018" "4.2.8p12" "User Commands"
+.TH ntpsnmpd 1ntpsnmpdman "20 Feb 2019" "4.2.8p13" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-vVaOGF/ag-HVaGFF)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:30:10 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:08 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions ntpsnmpd-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.1ntpsnmpdmdoc b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.1ntpsnmpdmdoc
index f032cb20d..fddcb1927 100644
--- a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.1ntpsnmpdmdoc
+++ b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.1ntpsnmpdmdoc
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt NTPSNMPD 1ntpsnmpdmdoc User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntpsnmpd-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:30:16 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:05 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    ntpsnmpd-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.html b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.html
index 45dc4b25f..bceab9dc4 100644
--- a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.html
+++ b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.html
@@ -1,79 +1,116 @@
-
+
+
+
 
-ntpsnmpd: Network Time Protocol SNMP Daemon User's Manual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+ntpsnmpd: Network Time Protocol SNMP Daemon User’s Manual
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
 
-
-
      ntpsnmpd: Network Time Protocol SNMP Daemon User's Manual
      
-  
      
-
      Short Contents
      
-
-
      
 
+
+
      ntpsnmpd: Network Time Protocol SNMP Daemon User’s Manual
      
 
 
-
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: (dir),
-Up: (dir)
-
      
-
      
 
-
      ntpsnmpd: Network Time Protocol Query User Manual
      
 
-
      The ntpsnmpd utility program is used to monitor NTP daemon ntpd
-operations and determine performance.  It uses the standard NTP mode 6 control
 
-  
      This document applies to version 4.2.8p12 of ntpsnmpd.
+
+
      Short Table of Contents
      
 
-
        
-
      • ntpsnmpd Description:             Description
-
      • ntpsnmpd Invocation: 		Invoking ntpsnmpd
-
      • Usage:                        Usage
+
        
+
+
        
+
 
-
        
-
        
-Next: ,
-Previous: Top,
-Up: Top
-
        
+
+
        
+
        
+Next: , Previous: , Up: (dir)   
        
 
        
+
+
        ntpsnmpd: Network Time Protocol Query User Manual
        
+
+
        The ntpsnmpd utility program is used to monitor NTP daemon ntpd
+operations and determine performance.  It uses the standard NTP mode 6 control
+
        
+
        This document applies to version 4.2.8p13 of ntpsnmpd.
+
        
+
+
+
+
+
        • ntpsnmpd Description:  Description
+
        • ntpsnmpd Invocation:  Invoking ntpsnmpd
+
        • Usage:  Usage
+
        
 
-
-
        Description
        
+
        
+
+
        
+
        
+Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   
        
+
        
+
+
        1 Description
        
 
 
        The ntpsnmpd utility program provides an SNMP MIB agent for ntpd.
+
        
+
+
+
        • Usage:  
+
        
 
-
        
-
        
-Previous: ntpsnmpd Description,
-Up: Top
-
        
+
        
+
+
        
+
        
+Previous: , Up: Top   
        
 
        
-
-
-
        Usage
        
+
+
        1.1 Usage
        
 
 
        (what should we say here?)
+
        
+
 
-
 
+
+
diff --git a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.man.in b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.man.in
index 5d2a641d7..5bb4fe450 100644
--- a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.man.in
+++ b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.man.in
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH ntpsnmpd @NTPSNMPD_MS@ "14 Aug 2018" "4.2.8p12" "User Commands"
+.TH ntpsnmpd @NTPSNMPD_MS@ "20 Feb 2019" "4.2.8p13" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-vVaOGF/ag-HVaGFF)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:30:10 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:08 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions ntpsnmpd-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.mdoc.in b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.mdoc.in
index 536b63410..6a0421de2 100644
--- a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.mdoc.in
+++ b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.mdoc.in
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt NTPSNMPD @NTPSNMPD_MS@ User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntpsnmpd-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:30:16 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:05 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    ntpsnmpd-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/packageinfo.sh b/packageinfo.sh
index 80b99edec..d4fa3fe46 100644
--- a/packageinfo.sh
+++ b/packageinfo.sh
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ CLTAG=NTP_4_2_0
 # - Numeric values increment
 # - empty 'increments' to 1
 # - NEW 'increments' to empty
-point=12
+point=13
 
 ### betapoint is normally modified by script.
 # ntp-stable Beta number (betapoint)
diff --git a/scripts/build/check--help b/scripts/build/check--help
index 1524675b4..a968fc4ec 100755
--- a/scripts/build/check--help
+++ b/scripts/build/check--help
@@ -10,13 +10,13 @@
 
 if test ! -f $1
 then
-	echo "$0: $1 is not a regular file!" 2>&3
+	echo "$0: $1 is not a regular file!" 1>&2
 	exit 1
 fi
 
 if grep -q 'no --help' $1
 then
-	echo "$0: $1 contains 'no --help'!" 2>&3
+	echo "$0: $1 contains 'no --help'!" 1>&2
 	mv ${1} ${1}-
 	exit 1
 fi
diff --git a/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.1calc_tickadjman b/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.1calc_tickadjman
index 8fa228e8a..14db08ae8 100644
--- a/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.1calc_tickadjman
+++ b/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.1calc_tickadjman
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH calc_tickadj 1calc_tickadjman "14 Aug 2018" "ntp (4.2.8p12)" "User Commands"
+.TH calc_tickadj 1calc_tickadjman "20 Feb 2019" "ntp (4.2.8p13)" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-98aG9a/ag-j9aG8a)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:08:53 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:23 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions calc_tickadj-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.1calc_tickadjmdoc b/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.1calc_tickadjmdoc
index 467f1e8e2..dff96f4b6 100644
--- a/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.1calc_tickadjmdoc
+++ b/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.1calc_tickadjmdoc
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt CALC_TICKADJ 1calc_tickadjmdoc User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (calc_tickadj-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:08:56 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:24 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    calc_tickadj-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.html b/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.html
index baba8c718..3f65c4948 100644
--- a/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.html
+++ b/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.html
@@ -1,115 +1,156 @@
-
+
+
+
 
-calc_tickadj User's Manual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+calc_tickadj User’s Manual
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
 
-
-
        calc_tickadj User's Manual
        
-
        
-
        
-Next: ,
-Previous: (dir),
-Up: (dir)
-
        
-
        
 
-
        calc_tickadj User's Manual
        
+
+
        calc_tickadj User’s Manual
        
 
-
        This document describes the use of the NTP Project's calc_tickadj program. 
-This document applies to version 4.2.8p12 of calc_tickadj.
 
-  
        
-
        Short Contents
        
-
          
-calc_tickadj User's Manual
+
+
+
+
          
+
          
+Previous: , Up: (dir)   
          
+
          
+
+
          calc_tickadj User’s Manual
          
+
+
          This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s calc_tickadj program.
+This document applies to version 4.2.8p13 of calc_tickadj.
+
          
+
+
          Short Table of Contents
          
+
+
          
+
 
          
 
-
 
-
          
-
          
-Previous: calc_tickadj Description,
-Up: Top
-
          
-
          
+
+
+
+
          • calc_tickadj Description:  Description
+
          • calc_tickadj Invocation:  Invoking calc_tickadj
+
          
 
-
          Invoking calc_tickadj
          
+
          
+
+
          
+
          
+Up: Top   
          
+
          
+
+
          1 Invoking calc_tickadj
          
+
+
 
-
          
-The calc_tickadj script uses provided ntp drift file to generate optimal
+
          The calc_tickadj script uses provided ntp drift file to generate optimal
 tick value. Generally, ntpd can do better job if the drift value is the
-smallest possible number.
-
-  
          The example output of
-
               $ ./calc_tickadj
-     81.699 (drift)
-     9999 usec; 9999779 nsec
-     $ cat /etc/ntp/drift
-     -23.159
-
          
-  
          means the following. If tick on that box is 10,000, by making the value 9999
-we'll shift the box from its current drift of -23.159 to a drift of 81.699, and
-in doing so we'll speed the clock up a little every second instead of slowing
+smallest possible number. 
+
          
+
          The example output of 
+
          
+
          $ ./calc_tickadj
+81.699 (drift)
+9999 usec; 9999779 nsec
+$ cat /etc/ntp/drift
+-23.159
+
          
+
+
          means the following. If tick on that box is 10,000, by making the value 9999
+we’ll shift the box from its current drift of -23.159 to a drift of 81.699, and
+in doing so we’ll speed the clock up a little every second instead of slowing
 the clock down a little.
-
-  
          If 'tick' on that box is 10,000,000 then by setting it to 9999779 the drift
+
          
+
          If ’tick’ on that box is 10,000,000 then by setting it to 9999779 the drift
 value will be somewhere around 0.0.
-
-  
          calc_tickadj tries to determine the the tick value by using
-tickadj program from ntp package. If this doesn't work you can specify
+
          
+
          calc_tickadj tries to determine the the tick value by using
+tickadj program from ntp package. If this doesn’t work you can specify
 current tick manually on command line.
+
          
 
-  
          This section was generated by AutoGen,
+
          This section was generated by AutoGen,
 using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the calc_tickadj program.
-
-
          
-
-
          
-
          
-Next: ,
-Up: calc_tickadj Invocation
-
          
+
          
+
+
+
+
+
+
          • calc_tickadj usage:  calc_tickadj help/usage (--help)
+
          • calc_tickadj drift-file:  drift-file option (-d)
+
          • calc_tickadj tick:  tick option (-t)
+
          • calc_tickadj exit status:  exit status
+
          
+
+
          
+
+
          
+
          
+Next: , Up: calc_tickadj Invocation   
          
 
          
-
-
          calc_tickadj help/usage (--help)
          
-
-
          
-This is the automatically generated usage text for calc_tickadj.
-
-  
          The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
-(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
-the usage text by passing it through a pager program. 
+
+
          1.1 calc_tickadj help/usage (--help)
          
+
+
+
          This is the automatically generated usage text for calc_tickadj.
+
          
+
          The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
+(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
+the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
 more-help is disabled on platforms without a working
 fork(2) function.  The PAGER environment variable is
-used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
+used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
 with a status code of 0.
-
-
          calc_tickadj - Calculates "optimal" value for tick given ntp drift file. - Ver. 4.2.7p467
-USAGE: calc_tickadj [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]...
+
          
+
          
+
          calc_tickadj - Calculates "optimal" value for tick given ntp drift file. - Ver. 4.2.7p467
+USAGE: calc_tickadj [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... 
 
     -d, --drift-file=str         Ntp drift file to use
     -t, --tick=num               Tick value of this host
@@ -118,49 +159,64 @@ USAGE: calc_tickadj [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val&
 
 Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single
 hyphen and the flag character.
-
          
-  
          
-
          
-Next: ,
-Previous: calc_tickadj usage,
-Up: calc_tickadj Invocation
-
          
+
          
+
+
+
+
+
+
          • calc_tickadj drift-file:  
+
          • calc_tickadj tick:  
+
          • calc_tickadj exit status:  
+
          
+
+
          
+
+
          
+
          
+Next: , Previous: , Up: calc_tickadj usage   
          
 
          
+
+
          1.1.1 drift-file option (-d)
          
+
 
-
          drift-file option (-d)
          
-
-
          
-This is the “ntp drift file to use” option. 
-This option takes a string argument. 
+
          This is the “ntp drift file to use” option.
+This option takes a string argument.
 Use the specified drift file for calculations
-
          
-
          
-Next: ,
-Previous: calc_tickadj drift-file,
-Up: calc_tickadj Invocation
-
          
+
          
+
+
          
+
          
+Next: , Previous: , Up: calc_tickadj usage   
          
 
          
+
+
          1.1.2 tick option (-t)
          
+
 
-
          tick option (-t)
          
-
-
          
-This is the “tick value of this host” option. 
-This option takes a number argument. 
+
          This is the “tick value of this host” option.
+This option takes a number argument.
 The current tick which to adjustment will be calculated
-
          
-
          
-Previous: calc_tickadj tick,
-Up: calc_tickadj Invocation
-
          
+
          
+
+
          
+
          
+Previous: , Up: calc_tickadj usage   
          
 
          
-
-
          calc_tickadj exit status
          
+
+
          1.1.3 calc_tickadj exit status
          
 
 
          One of the following exit values will be returned:
-     
          
-
          0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)
          Successful program execution. 
-
          1 (EXIT_FAILURE)
          The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid. 
+
          
+
          ‘0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)’
          
+
          Successful program execution.
+
          
+
          ‘1 (EXIT_FAILURE)’
          
+
          The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.
+
          
 
          
+
          
+
 
-
 
+
+
diff --git a/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.man.in b/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.man.in
index 8fa228e8a..14db08ae8 100644
--- a/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.man.in
+++ b/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.man.in
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH calc_tickadj 1calc_tickadjman "14 Aug 2018" "ntp (4.2.8p12)" "User Commands"
+.TH calc_tickadj 1calc_tickadjman "20 Feb 2019" "ntp (4.2.8p13)" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-98aG9a/ag-j9aG8a)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:08:53 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:23 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions calc_tickadj-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.mdoc.in b/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.mdoc.in
index 467f1e8e2..dff96f4b6 100644
--- a/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.mdoc.in
+++ b/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.mdoc.in
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt CALC_TICKADJ 1calc_tickadjmdoc User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (calc_tickadj-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:08:56 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:24 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    calc_tickadj-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/scripts/calc_tickadj/invoke-calc_tickadj.texi b/scripts/calc_tickadj/invoke-calc_tickadj.texi
index e88fea882..65c738d31 100644
--- a/scripts/calc_tickadj/invoke-calc_tickadj.texi
+++ b/scripts/calc_tickadj/invoke-calc_tickadj.texi
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 #
 # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (invoke-calc_tickadj.texi)
 #
-# It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:08:59 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+# It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:25 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 # From the definitions    calc_tickadj-opts.def
 # and the template file   agtexi-cmd.tpl
 @end ignore
diff --git a/scripts/invoke-plot_summary.texi b/scripts/invoke-plot_summary.texi
index d4616e2e9..f0b904579 100644
--- a/scripts/invoke-plot_summary.texi
+++ b/scripts/invoke-plot_summary.texi
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 #
 # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (invoke-plot_summary.texi)
 #
-# It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:41 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+# It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 05:04:25 PM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 # From the definitions    plot_summary-opts.def
 # and the template file   agtexi-cmd.tpl
 @end ignore
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ with a status code of 0.
 
 @exampleindent 0
 @example
-plot_summary - plot statistics generated by summary script - Ver. 4.2.8p12
+plot_summary - plot statistics generated by summary script - Ver. 4.2.8p13
 USAGE: plot_summary [ - [] | --[@{=| @}] ]... 
 
         --directory=str          Where the summary files are
diff --git a/scripts/invoke-summary.texi b/scripts/invoke-summary.texi
index e39457883..08bf305f0 100644
--- a/scripts/invoke-summary.texi
+++ b/scripts/invoke-summary.texi
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 #
 # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (invoke-summary.texi)
 #
-# It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:47 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+# It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 05:04:29 PM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 # From the definitions    summary-opts.def
 # and the template file   agtexi-cmd.tpl
 @end ignore
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ with a status code of 0.
 
 @exampleindent 0
 @example
-summary - compute various stastics from NTP stat files - Ver. 4.2.8p12
+summary - compute various stastics from NTP stat files - Ver. 4.2.8p13
 USAGE: summary [ - [] | --[@{=| @}] ]... 
 
         --directory=str          Directory containing stat files
diff --git a/scripts/ntp-wait/invoke-ntp-wait.texi b/scripts/ntp-wait/invoke-ntp-wait.texi
index 83bc954d8..527035a70 100644
--- a/scripts/ntp-wait/invoke-ntp-wait.texi
+++ b/scripts/ntp-wait/invoke-ntp-wait.texi
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 #
 # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (invoke-ntp-wait.texi)
 #
-# It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:07 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+# It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:28 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 # From the definitions    ntp-wait-opts.def
 # and the template file   agtexi-cmd.tpl
 @end ignore
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ with a status code of 0.
 
 @exampleindent 0
 @example
-ntp-wait - Wait for ntpd to stabilize the system clock - Ver. 4.2.8p12
+ntp-wait - Wait for ntpd to stabilize the system clock - Ver. 4.2.8p13
 USAGE: ntp-wait [ - [] | --[@{=| @}] ]... 
 
     -n, --tries=num              Number of times to check ntpd
diff --git a/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait-opts b/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait-opts
index 47c4c1ac8..e81dc0e3d 100644
--- a/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait-opts
+++ b/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait-opts
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntp-wait-opts)
 #
-# It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:02 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+# It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:27 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 # From the definitions    ntp-wait-opts.def
 # and the template file   perlopt
 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ sub processOptions {
         'help|?', 'more-help'));
 
     $usage = <<'USAGE';
-ntp-wait - Wait for ntpd to stabilize the system clock - Ver. 4.2.8p12
+ntp-wait - Wait for ntpd to stabilize the system clock - Ver. 4.2.8p13
 USAGE: ntp-wait [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]... 
 
     -n, --tries=num              Number of times to check ntpd
diff --git a/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.1ntp-waitman b/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.1ntp-waitman
index d73885ad5..90cc4da29 100644
--- a/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.1ntp-waitman
+++ b/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.1ntp-waitman
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH ntp-wait 1ntp-waitman "14 Aug 2018" "ntp (4.2.8p12)" "User Commands"
+.TH ntp-wait 1ntp-waitman "20 Feb 2019" "ntp (4.2.8p13)" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-GBaimc/ag-SBaqlc)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:09:04 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:30 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions ntp-wait-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.1ntp-waitmdoc b/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.1ntp-waitmdoc
index 44ffe648c..368b273db 100644
--- a/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.1ntp-waitmdoc
+++ b/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.1ntp-waitmdoc
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt NTP_WAIT 1ntp-waitmdoc User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntp-wait-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:10 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:27 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    ntp-wait-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.html b/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.html
index 3679e8ba6..3b33e6de7 100644
--- a/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.html
+++ b/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.html
@@ -1,68 +1,105 @@
-
+
+
+
 
-Ntp-wait User's Manual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+Ntp-wait User’s Manual
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
 
-
-
          Ntp-wait User's Manual
          
-
          
-
          
-Next: ,
-Previous: (dir),
-Up: (dir)
-
          
-
          
 
-  
          This document describes the use of the NTP Project's ntp-wait program.
+
+
          Ntp-wait User’s Manual
          
+
+
+
+
 
-  
          If there are time-sensitive applications,
+
+
          
+
          
+Previous: , Up: (dir)   
          
+
          
+
          Top
          
+
+
          This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s ntp-wait program.
+
          
+
          If there are time-sensitive applications,
 the proper sequence of events is to
 run ntpd -g as early as possible,
 then invoke all of the non-time-sensitive process,
 run ntp-wait to block
-until the system's time has stabilized and synchronized,
+until the system’s time has stabilized and synchronized,
 and only then start any applicaitons (like database servers) that require
 accurate and stable time.
-
-  
          This document applies to version 4.2.8p12 of ntp-wait.
+
          
+
          This document applies to version 4.2.8p13 of ntp-wait.
+
          
+
+
          Short Table of Contents
          
 
 
          
-
          Short Contents
          
-
            
-
          
+
        • 1 Invoking ntp-wait
          • 
+
 
          
 
-
 
-
          
-
          
+
+
+
+
          • ntp-wait Description:  Description
+
          • ntp-wait Invocation:  Invoking ntp-wait
+
          
+
+
          
 
-
          
+
          
+
          
+Up: Top   
          
 
          
+
+
          1 Invoking ntp-wait
          
+
+
 
-
          0.1 Invoking ntp-wait
          
 
-
          
 
-  
          ntp-wait
+
          ntp-wait
 will send at most
 num-tries
 queries to
@@ -72,50 +109,58 @@ sleeping for
 after each status return that says
 ntpd(8)
 has not yet produced a synchronized and stable system clock.
-
-  
          ntp-wait
+
          
+
          ntp-wait
 will do this quietly, unless the
 -v
-flag is provided. 
+flag is provided.
 This can be useful at boot time, to delay the boot sequence until after
 ntpd -g
 has set the time.
-
-  
          This section was generated by AutoGen,
+
          
+
          This section was generated by AutoGen,
 using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntp-wait program.
-
-
          
-
-
          
-
          
-Next: ,
-Up: ntp-wait Invocation
-
          
+
          
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
          • ntp-wait usage:  ntp-wait help/usage (--help)
+
          • ntp-wait tries:  tries option (-n)
+
          • ntp-wait sleep:  sleep option (-s)
+
          • ntp-wait verbose:  verbose option (-v)
+
          • ntp-wait exit status:  exit status
+
          • ntp-wait Authors:  Authors
+
          • ntp-wait Notes:  Notes
+
          
+
+
          
+
+
          
+
          
+Next: , Up: ntp-wait Invocation   
          
 
          
-
-
          0.1.1 ntp-wait help/usage (--help)
          
-
-
          
-This is the automatically generated usage text for ntp-wait.
-
-  
          The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
-(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
-the usage text by passing it through a pager program. 
+
+
          1.1 ntp-wait help/usage (--help)
          
+
+
+
          This is the automatically generated usage text for ntp-wait.
+
          
+
          The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
+(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
+the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
 more-help is disabled on platforms without a working
 fork(2) function.  The PAGER environment variable is
-used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
+used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
 with a status code of 0.
-
-
          ntp-wait - Wait for ntpd to stabilize the system clock - Ver. 4.2.8p12
-USAGE: ntp-wait [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]...
+
          
+
          
+
          ntp-wait - Wait for ntpd to stabilize the system clock - Ver. 4.2.8p13
+USAGE: ntp-wait [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... 
 
     -n, --tries=num              Number of times to check ntpd
     -s, --sleep=num              How long to sleep between tries
@@ -125,84 +170,86 @@ USAGE: ntp-wait [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>]
 
 Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single
 hyphen and the flag character.
-
          
-  
          
-
          
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntp-wait usage,
-Up: ntp-wait Invocation
-
          
-
          
+
          
 
-
          0.1.2 tries option (-n)
          
+
          
+
+
          
+
          
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-wait Invocation   
          
+
          
+
+
          1.2 tries option (-n)
          
+
 
-
          
-This is the “number of times to check ntpd” option. 
-This option takes a number argument. 
+
          This is the “number of times to check ntpd” option.
+This option takes a number argument.
         The maximum number of times we will check ntpd to see if
-        it has been able to synchronize and stabilize the system clock. 
-
          
-
          
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntp-wait tries,
-Up: ntp-wait Invocation
-
          
+        it has been able to synchronize and stabilize the system clock.
+
          
+
+
          
+
          
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-wait Invocation   
          
 
          
-
-
          0.1.3 sleep option (-s)
          
-
-
          
-This is the “how long to sleep between tries” option. 
-This option takes a number argument secs-between-tries. 
-        We will sleep for secs-between-tries after each query
-        of ntpd that returns "the time is not yet stable". 
-
          
-
          
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntp-wait sleep,
-Up: ntp-wait Invocation
-
          
+
+
          1.3 sleep option (-s)
          
+
+
+
          This is the “how long to sleep between tries” option.
+This option takes a number argument secs-between-tries.
+        We will sleep for secs-between-tries after each query
+        of ntpd that returns "the time is not yet stable".
+
          
+
+
          
+
          
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-wait Invocation   
          
 
          
-
-
          0.1.4 verbose option (-v)
          
-
-
          
-This is the “be verbose” option. 
-        By default, ntp-wait is silent. 
-        With this option, ntp-wait will provide status information. 
-
          
-
          
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntp-wait verbose,
-Up: ntp-wait Invocation
-
          
+
+
          1.4 verbose option (-v)
          
+
+
+
          This is the “be verbose” option.
+        By default, ntp-wait is silent.
+        With this option, ntp-wait will provide status information.
+
          
+
+
          
+
          
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-wait Invocation   
          
 
          
-
-
          0.1.5 ntp-wait exit status
          
+
+
          1.5 ntp-wait exit status
          
 
 
          One of the following exit values will be returned:
-     
          
-
          0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)
          Successful program execution. 
-
          1 (EXIT_FAILURE)
          The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid. 
+
          
+
          ‘0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)’
          
+
          Successful program execution.
+
          
+
          ‘1 (EXIT_FAILURE)’
          
+
          The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.
+
          
 
          
-  
          
-
          
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntp-wait exit status,
-Up: ntp-wait Invocation
-
          
+
          
+
+
          
+
          
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-wait Invocation   
          
 
          
-
-
          0.1.6 ntp-wait Authors
          
-
-
          
-
          
-Previous: ntp-wait Authors,
-Up: ntp-wait Invocation
-
          
+
+
          1.6 ntp-wait Authors
          
+
          
+
+
          
+
          
+Previous: , Up: ntp-wait Invocation   
          
 
          
+
+
          1.7 ntp-wait Notes
          
+
          
 
-
          0.1.7 ntp-wait Notes
          
 
-
 
+
+
diff --git a/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.man.in b/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.man.in
index 1b41badc0..62a4124aa 100644
--- a/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.man.in
+++ b/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.man.in
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH ntp-wait @NTP_WAIT_MS@ "14 Aug 2018" "ntp (4.2.8p12)" "User Commands"
+.TH ntp-wait @NTP_WAIT_MS@ "20 Feb 2019" "ntp (4.2.8p13)" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-GBaimc/ag-SBaqlc)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:09:04 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:30 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions ntp-wait-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.mdoc.in b/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.mdoc.in
index 127f14f5c..ae0195bf2 100644
--- a/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.mdoc.in
+++ b/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.mdoc.in
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt NTP_WAIT @NTP_WAIT_MS@ User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntp-wait-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:10 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:27 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    ntp-wait-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/scripts/ntpsweep/invoke-ntpsweep.texi b/scripts/ntpsweep/invoke-ntpsweep.texi
index 60c1f7bff..5375dc10e 100644
--- a/scripts/ntpsweep/invoke-ntpsweep.texi
+++ b/scripts/ntpsweep/invoke-ntpsweep.texi
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 #
 # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (invoke-ntpsweep.texi)
 #
-# It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:13 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+# It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:31 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 # From the definitions    ntpsweep-opts.def
 # and the template file   agtexi-cmd.tpl
 @end ignore
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ with a status code of 0.
 
 @exampleindent 0
 @example
-ntpsweep - Print various informations about given ntp servers - Ver. 4.2.8p12
+ntpsweep - Print various informations about given ntp servers - Ver. 4.2.8p13
 USAGE: ntpsweep [ - [] | --[@{=| @}] ]... [hostfile]
 
     -l, --host-list=str          Host to execute actions on
diff --git a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep-opts b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep-opts
index c754a3f45..5bd7126f5 100644
--- a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep-opts
+++ b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep-opts
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntpsweep-opts)
 #
-# It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:11 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+# It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:31 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 # From the definitions    ntpsweep-opts.def
 # and the template file   perlopt
 
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ sub processOptions {
         'help|?', 'more-help'));
 
     $usage = <<'USAGE';
-ntpsweep - Print various informations about given ntp servers - Ver. 4.2.8p12
+ntpsweep - Print various informations about given ntp servers - Ver. 4.2.8p13
 USAGE: ntpsweep [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]... [hostfile]
 
     -l, --host-list=str          Host to execute actions on
diff --git a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.1ntpsweepman b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.1ntpsweepman
index fa4ab4bd0..5d2edeeb2 100644
--- a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.1ntpsweepman
+++ b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.1ntpsweepman
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH ntpsweep 1ntpsweepman "14 Aug 2018" "ntp (4.2.8p12)" "User Commands"
+.TH ntpsweep 1ntpsweepman "20 Feb 2019" "ntp (4.2.8p13)" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-csaqyd/ag-psayxd)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:09:15 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:33 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions ntpsweep-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.1ntpsweepmdoc b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.1ntpsweepmdoc
index 43c44a2b5..d958cde67 100644
--- a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.1ntpsweepmdoc
+++ b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.1ntpsweepmdoc
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt NTPSWEEP 1ntpsweepmdoc User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntpsweep-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:18 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:32 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    ntpsweep-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.html b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.html
index 8c9737e95..61095d421 100644
--- a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.html
+++ b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.html
@@ -1,96 +1,140 @@
-
+
+
+
 
-ntpsweep User's Manual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+ntpsweep User’s Manual
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
 
-
-
          ntpsweep User's Manual
          
-
          
-
          
-Next: ,
-Previous: (dir),
-Up: (dir)
-
          
+
+
+
          ntpsweep User’s Manual
          
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
          
+
          
+Previous: , Up: (dir)   
          
 
          
+
          Top
          
 
-  
          This document describes the use of the NTP Project's ntpsweep program.
+
          This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s ntpsweep program.
+
          
+
          This document applies to version 4.2.8p13 of ntpsweep.
+
          
+
+
          Short Table of Contents
          
 
-  
          This document applies to version 4.2.8p12 of ntpsweep.
+
          
+
        • 1 Invoking ntpsweep
          • 
 
-  
          
-
          Short Contents
          
-
            
-
          
 
          
 
-
 
-
          
-
          
+
+
+
+
          • ntpsweep Description:  Description
+
          • ntpsweep Invocation:  Invoking ntpsweep
+
          
+
+
          
 
-
          
+
          
+
          
+Up: Top   
          
 
          
+
+
          1 Invoking ntpsweep
          
+
+
 
-
          0.1 Invoking ntpsweep
          
-
-
          
-ntpsweep
+
          ntpsweep
 prints per host the NTP stratum level, the clock offset in seconds, the daemon
 version, the operating system and the processor. Optionally recursing through
 all peers.
-
-  
          This section was generated by AutoGen,
+
          
+
          This section was generated by AutoGen,
 using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntpsweep program.
-
-
          
-
-
          
-
          
-Next: ,
-Up: ntpsweep Invocation
-
          
+
          
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
          • ntpsweep usage:  ntpsweep help/usage (--help)
+
          • ntpsweep host-list:  host-list option (-l)
+
          • ntpsweep peers:  peers option (-p)
+
          • ntpsweep maxlevel:  maxlevel option (-m)
+
          • ntpsweep strip:  strip option (-s)
+
          • ntpsweep host:  host option (-h)
+
          • ntpsweep exit status:  exit status
+
          
+
+
          
+
+
          
+
          
+Next: , Up: ntpsweep Invocation   
          
 
          
-
-
          0.1.1 ntpsweep help/usage (--help)
          
-
-
          
-This is the automatically generated usage text for ntpsweep.
-
-  
          The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
-(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
-the usage text by passing it through a pager program. 
+
+
          1.1 ntpsweep help/usage (--help)
          
+
+
+
          This is the automatically generated usage text for ntpsweep.
+
          
+
          The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
+(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
+the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
 more-help is disabled on platforms without a working
 fork(2) function.  The PAGER environment variable is
-used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
+used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
 with a status code of 0.
-
-
          ntpsweep - Print various informations about given ntp servers - Ver. 4.2.8p12
+
          
+
          
+
          ntpsweep - Print various informations about given ntp servers - Ver. 4.2.8p13
 USAGE: ntpsweep [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... [hostfile]
 
     -l, --host-list=str          Host to execute actions on
@@ -103,99 +147,102 @@ USAGE: ntpsweep [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>]
 
 Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single
 hyphen and the flag character.
-
          
-  
          
-
          
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpsweep usage,
-Up: ntpsweep Invocation
-
          
-
          
+
          
 
-
          0.1.2 host-list option (-l)
          
+
          
+
+
          
+
          
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpsweep Invocation   
          
+
          
+
+
          1.2 host-list option (-l)
          
+
 
-
          
-This is the “host to execute actions on” option. 
+
          This is the “host to execute actions on” option.
 This option takes a string argument.
-
-
          This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
            
-
          • may appear an unlimited number of times. 
-
          
-
-  
          Use this option to specify the host on which this script operates. 
-            May appear multiple times. 
-
          
-
          
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpsweep host-list,
-Up: ntpsweep Invocation
-
          
+
          
+
          This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
            
+
          •  may appear an unlimited number of times.
+
          
+
+
          Use this option to specify the host on which this script operates.
+            May appear multiple times.
+
          
+
+
          
+
          
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpsweep Invocation   
          
 
          
-
-
          0.1.3 peers option (-p)
          
-
-
          
-This is the “recursively list all peers a host synchronizes to” option. 
-This option has no doc documentation. 
-
          
-
          
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpsweep peers,
-Up: ntpsweep Invocation
-
          
+
+
          1.3 peers option (-p)
          
+
+
+
          This is the “recursively list all peers a host synchronizes to” option.
+This option has no ‘doc’ documentation.
+
          
+
+
          
+
          
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpsweep Invocation   
          
 
          
-
-
          0.1.4 maxlevel option (-m)
          
-
-
          
-This is the “traverse peers up to this level (4 is a reasonable number)” option. 
-This option takes a number argument. 
-This option has no doc documentation. 
-
          
-
          
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpsweep maxlevel,
-Up: ntpsweep Invocation
-
          
+
+
          1.4 maxlevel option (-m)
          
+
+
+
          This is the “traverse peers up to this level (4 is a reasonable number)” option.
+This option takes a number argument.
+This option has no ‘doc’ documentation.
+
          
+
+
          
+
          
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpsweep Invocation   
          
 
          
+
+
          1.5 strip option (-s)
          
+
 
-
          0.1.5 strip option (-s)
          
-
-
          
-This is the “strip this string from hostnames” option. 
-This option takes a string argument. 
-This option has no doc documentation. 
-
          
-
          
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntpsweep strip,
-Up: ntpsweep Invocation
-
          
+
          This is the “strip this string from hostnames” option.
+This option takes a string argument.
+This option has no ‘doc’ documentation.
+
          
+
+
          
+
          
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntpsweep Invocation   
          
 
          
+
+
          1.6 host option (-h)
          
+
 
-
          0.1.6 host option (-h)
          
-
-
          
-This is the “specify a single host” option. 
-This option takes a string argument. 
-This option has no doc documentation.
-
-  
          NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED
-
          
-
          
-Previous: ntpsweep host,
-Up: ntpsweep Invocation
-
          
+
          This is the “specify a single host” option.
+This option takes a string argument.
+This option has no ‘doc’ documentation.
+
          
+
          NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED
+
          
+
+
          
+
          
+Previous: , Up: ntpsweep Invocation   
          
 
          
-
-
          0.1.7 ntpsweep exit status
          
+
+
          1.7 ntpsweep exit status
          
 
 
          One of the following exit values will be returned:
-     
          
-
          0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)
          Successful program execution. 
-
          1 (EXIT_FAILURE)
          The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid. 
+
          
+
          ‘0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)’
          
+
          Successful program execution.
+
          
+
          ‘1 (EXIT_FAILURE)’
          
+
          The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.
+
          
 
          
+
          
+
 
-
 
+
+
diff --git a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.man.in b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.man.in
index fa4ab4bd0..5d2edeeb2 100644
--- a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.man.in
+++ b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.man.in
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH ntpsweep 1ntpsweepman "14 Aug 2018" "ntp (4.2.8p12)" "User Commands"
+.TH ntpsweep 1ntpsweepman "20 Feb 2019" "ntp (4.2.8p13)" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-csaqyd/ag-psayxd)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:09:15 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:33 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions ntpsweep-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.mdoc.in b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.mdoc.in
index 43c44a2b5..d958cde67 100644
--- a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.mdoc.in
+++ b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.mdoc.in
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt NTPSWEEP 1ntpsweepmdoc User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntpsweep-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:18 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:32 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    ntpsweep-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/scripts/ntptrace/invoke-ntptrace.texi b/scripts/ntptrace/invoke-ntptrace.texi
index 072434f22..746689e43 100644
--- a/scripts/ntptrace/invoke-ntptrace.texi
+++ b/scripts/ntptrace/invoke-ntptrace.texi
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 #
 # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (invoke-ntptrace.texi)
 #
-# It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:25 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+# It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:36 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 # From the definitions    ntptrace-opts.def
 # and the template file   agtexi-cmd.tpl
 @end ignore
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ with a status code of 0.
 
 @exampleindent 0
 @example
-ntptrace - Trace peers of an NTP server - Ver. 4.2.8p12
+ntptrace - Trace peers of an NTP server - Ver. 4.2.8p13
 USAGE: ntptrace [ - [] | --[@{=| @}] ]... [host]
 
     -n, --numeric                Print IP addresses instead of hostnames
diff --git a/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace-opts b/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace-opts
index 5e15567de..6545bff7a 100644
--- a/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace-opts
+++ b/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace-opts
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntptrace-opts)
 #
-# It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:20 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+# It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:35 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 # From the definitions    ntptrace-opts.def
 # and the template file   perlopt
 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ sub processOptions {
         'help|?', 'more-help'));
 
     $usage = <<'USAGE';
-ntptrace - Trace peers of an NTP server - Ver. 4.2.8p12
+ntptrace - Trace peers of an NTP server - Ver. 4.2.8p13
 USAGE: ntptrace [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]... [host]
 
     -n, --numeric                Print IP addresses instead of hostnames
diff --git a/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.1ntptraceman b/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.1ntptraceman
index f9c3b53bc..79864da8e 100644
--- a/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.1ntptraceman
+++ b/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.1ntptraceman
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH ntptrace 1ntptraceman "14 Aug 2018" "ntp (4.2.8p12)" "User Commands"
+.TH ntptrace 1ntptraceman "20 Feb 2019" "ntp (4.2.8p13)" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-n1aOAe/ag-B1aWze)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:09:22 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:37 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions ntptrace-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.1ntptracemdoc b/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.1ntptracemdoc
index fc8301ba1..7a535d0a5 100644
--- a/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.1ntptracemdoc
+++ b/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.1ntptracemdoc
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt NTPTRACE 1ntptracemdoc User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntptrace-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:27 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:35 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    ntptrace-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.html b/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.html
index 3026102e6..9160de231 100644
--- a/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.html
+++ b/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.html
@@ -1,113 +1,156 @@
-
+
+
+
 
-Ntptrace User's Manual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+Ntptrace User’s Manual
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
 
-
-
          Ntptrace User's Manual
          
-
          
-
          
-Next: ,
-Previous: (dir),
-Up: (dir)
-
          
-
          
 
-
          Simple Network Time Protocol User Manual
          
+
+
          Ntptrace User’s Manual
          
+
+
+
 
-
          This document describes the use of the NTP Project's ntptrace program. 
-This document applies to version 4.2.8p12 of ntptrace.
 
-  
          
-
          Short Contents
          
-
            
-Simple Network Time Protocol User Manual
+
+
            
+
            
+Previous: , Up: (dir)   
            
+
            
+
+
            Simple Network Time Protocol User Manual
            
+
+
            This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s ntptrace program.
+This document applies to version 4.2.8p13 of ntptrace.
+
            
+
+
            Short Table of Contents
            
+
+
            
+
 
            
 
-
 
-
            
-
            
-Previous: ntptrace Description,
-Up: Top
-
            
-
            
+
+
+
+
            • ntptrace Description:  Description
+
            • ntptrace Invocation:  Invoking ntptrace
+
            
 
-
            Invoking ntptrace
            
+
            
+
+
            
+
            
+Up: Top   
            
+
            
+
+
            1 Invoking ntptrace
            
+
+
 
-
            
-ntptrace is a perl script that uses the ntpq utility program to follow
+
            ntptrace is a perl script that uses the ntpq utility program to follow
 the chain of NTP servers from a given host back to the primary time source. For
 ntptrace to work properly, each of these servers must implement the NTP Control
 and Monitoring Protocol specified in RFC 1305 and enable NTP Mode 6 packets.
-
-  
            If given no arguments, ntptrace starts with localhost. Here is an example of
+
            
+
            If given no arguments, ntptrace starts with localhost. Here is an example of
 the output from ntptrace:
-
-
                 % ntptrace localhost: stratum 4, offset 0.0019529, synch distance 0.144135
-     server2ozo.com: stratum 2, offset 0.0124263, synch distance 0.115784 usndh.edu:
-     stratum 1, offset 0.0019298, synch distance 0.011993, refid 'WWVB'
-
            
-  
            On each line, the fields are (left to right): the host name, the host stratum,
+
            
+
            
+
            % ntptrace localhost: stratum 4, offset 0.0019529, synch distance 0.144135
+server2ozo.com: stratum 2, offset 0.0124263, synch distance 0.115784 usndh.edu:
+stratum 1, offset 0.0019298, synch distance 0.011993, refid 'WWVB'
+
            
+
+
            On each line, the fields are (left to right): the host name, the host stratum,
 the time offset between that host and the local host (as measured by
-ntptrace; this is why it is not always zero for "localhost"), the host
+ntptrace; this is why it is not always zero for "localhost"), the host
 synchronization distance, and (only for stratum-1 servers) the reference clock
 ID. All times are given in seconds. Note that the stratum is the server hop
 count to the primary source, while the synchronization distance is the
 estimated error relative to the primary source. These terms are precisely
 defined in RFC-1305.
+
            
 
-  
            This section was generated by AutoGen,
+
            This section was generated by AutoGen,
 using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntptrace program.
-
-
            
-
-
            
-
            
-Next: ,
-Up: ntptrace Invocation
-
            
+
            
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
            • ntptrace usage:  ntptrace help/usage (--help)
+
            • ntptrace numeric:  numeric option (-n)
+
            • ntptrace max-hosts:  max-hosts option (-m)
+
            • ntptrace host:  host option (-r)
+
            • ntptrace exit status:  exit status
+
            
+
+
            
+
+
            
+
            
+Next: , Up: ntptrace Invocation   
            
 
            
-
-
            ntptrace help/usage (--help)
            
-
-
            
-This is the automatically generated usage text for ntptrace.
-
-  
            The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
-(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
-the usage text by passing it through a pager program. 
+
+
            1.1 ntptrace help/usage (--help)
            
+
+
+
            This is the automatically generated usage text for ntptrace.
+
            
+
            The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
+(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
+the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
 more-help is disabled on platforms without a working
 fork(2) function.  The PAGER environment variable is
-used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
+used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
 with a status code of 0.
-
-
            ntptrace - Trace peers of an NTP server - Ver. 4.2.8p12
+
            
+
            
+
            ntptrace - Trace peers of an NTP server - Ver. 4.2.8p13
 USAGE: ntptrace [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... [host]
 
     -n, --numeric                Print IP addresses instead of hostnames
@@ -118,63 +161,79 @@ USAGE: ntptrace [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>]
 
 Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single
 hyphen and the flag character.
-
            
-  
            
-
            
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntptrace usage,
-Up: ntptrace Invocation
-
            
+
            
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
            • ntptrace numeric:  
+
            • ntptrace max-hosts:  
+
            • ntptrace host:  
+
            • ntptrace exit status:  
+
            
+
+
            
+
+
            
+
            
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntptrace usage   
            
 
            
+
+
            1.1.1 numeric option (-n)
            
+
 
-
            numeric option (-n)
            
-
-
            
-This is the “print ip addresses instead of hostnames” option. 
+
            This is the “print ip addresses instead of hostnames” option.
 Output hosts as dotted-quad numeric format rather than converting to
-the canonical host names. 
-
            
-
            
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntptrace numeric,
-Up: ntptrace Invocation
-
            
+the canonical host names.
+
            
+
+
            
+
            
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntptrace usage   
            
 
            
-
-
            max-hosts option (-m)
            
-
-
            
-This is the “maximum number of peers to trace” option. 
-This option takes a number argument. 
-This option has no doc documentation. 
-
            
-
            
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntptrace max-hosts,
-Up: ntptrace Invocation
-
            
+
+
            1.1.2 max-hosts option (-m)
            
+
+
+
            This is the “maximum number of peers to trace” option.
+This option takes a number argument.
+This option has no ‘doc’ documentation.
+
            
+
+
            
+
            
+Next: , Previous: , Up: ntptrace usage   
            
 
            
-
-
            host option (-r)
            
-
-
            
-This is the “single remote host” option. 
-This option takes a string argument. 
-This option has no doc documentation. 
-
            
-
            
-Previous: ntptrace host,
-Up: ntptrace Invocation
-
            
+
+
            1.1.3 host option (-r)
            
+
+
+
            This is the “single remote host” option.
+This option takes a string argument.
+This option has no ‘doc’ documentation.
+
            
+
+
            
+
            
+Previous: , Up: ntptrace usage   
            
 
            
-
-
            ntptrace exit status
            
+
+
            1.1.4 ntptrace exit status
            
 
 
            One of the following exit values will be returned:
-     
            
-
            0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)
            Successful program execution. 
-
            1 (EXIT_FAILURE)
            The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid. 
+
            
+
            ‘0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)’
            
+
            Successful program execution.
+
            
+
            ‘1 (EXIT_FAILURE)’
            
+
            The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.
+
            
 
            
+
            
+
 
-
 
+
+
diff --git a/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.man.in b/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.man.in
index fb47716fd..2b498a6b7 100644
--- a/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.man.in
+++ b/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.man.in
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH ntptrace @NTPTRACE_MS@ "14 Aug 2018" "ntp (4.2.8p12)" "User Commands"
+.TH ntptrace @NTPTRACE_MS@ "20 Feb 2019" "ntp (4.2.8p13)" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-n1aOAe/ag-B1aWze)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:09:22 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:37 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions ntptrace-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.mdoc.in b/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.mdoc.in
index 2d02bd811..879dcdfbd 100644
--- a/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.mdoc.in
+++ b/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.mdoc.in
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt NTPTRACE @NTPTRACE_MS@ User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntptrace-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:27 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:35 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    ntptrace-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/scripts/plot_summary-opts b/scripts/plot_summary-opts
index 0e2c8ce13..2e0126277 100644
--- a/scripts/plot_summary-opts
+++ b/scripts/plot_summary-opts
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (plot_summary-opts)
 #
-# It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:38 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+# It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 05:04:25 PM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 # From the definitions    plot_summary-opts.def
 # and the template file   perlopt
 
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ sub processOptions {
         'help|?', 'more-help'));
 
     $usage = <<'USAGE';
-plot_summary - plot statistics generated by summary script - Ver. 4.2.8p12
+plot_summary - plot statistics generated by summary script - Ver. 4.2.8p13
 USAGE: plot_summary [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]... 
 
         --directory=str          Where the summary files are
diff --git a/scripts/plot_summary.1plot_summaryman b/scripts/plot_summary.1plot_summaryman
index 702742e22..d8188c397 100644
--- a/scripts/plot_summary.1plot_summaryman
+++ b/scripts/plot_summary.1plot_summaryman
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH plot_summary 1plot_summaryman "14 Aug 2018" "ntp (4.2.8p12)" "User Commands"
+.TH plot_summary 1plot_summaryman "20 Feb 2019" "ntp (4.2.8p13)" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-_gaOWg/ag-lhaWVg)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:09:43 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 05:04:26 PM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions plot_summary-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/scripts/plot_summary.1plot_summarymdoc b/scripts/plot_summary.1plot_summarymdoc
index dc55fc309..d3a9f7bde 100644
--- a/scripts/plot_summary.1plot_summarymdoc
+++ b/scripts/plot_summary.1plot_summarymdoc
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt PLOT_SUMMARY 1plot_summarymdoc User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (plot_summary-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:45 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 05:04:27 PM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    plot_summary-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/scripts/plot_summary.html b/scripts/plot_summary.html
index 386b75269..529a761ba 100644
--- a/scripts/plot_summary.html
+++ b/scripts/plot_summary.html
@@ -1,96 +1,138 @@
-
+
+
+
 
-Plot_summary User's Manual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
            Plot_summary User's Manual
            
-
            
-
            
-Next: ,
-Previous: (dir),
-Up: (dir)
-
            
-
            
+
+Plot_summary User’s Manual
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
 
-
            Plot_summary User Manual
            
 
-
            This document describes the use of the NTP Project's plot_summary program. 
-This document applies to version 4.2.8p12 of plot_summary.
+
 
-  
            
-
            Short Contents
            
-
-
            
+
+
            Plot_summary User’s Manual
            
 
-
 
-
            
-
            
-Previous: plot_summary Description,
-Up: Top
-
            
-
            
 
-
            Invoking plot_summary
            
 
-
            
 
-  
            This section was generated by AutoGen,
-using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the plot_summary program.
-
-
              
-
            • plot_summary usage:                   plot_summary help/usage (--help)
-
            • plot_summary directory:               directory option
-
            • plot_summary identifier:              identifier option
-
            • plot_summary peer:                    peer option
-
            • plot_summary plot-term:               plot-term option
-
            • plot_summary output-file:             output-file option
-
            • plot_summary exit status:             exit status
+
+
              
+
              
+Previous: , Up: (dir)   
              
+
              
+
+
              Plot_summary User Manual
              
+
+
              This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s plot_summary program.
+This document applies to version 4.2.8p13 of plot_summary.
+
              
+
+
              Short Table of Contents
              
+
+
              
+
-
-
              
-
              
-Next: ,
-Up: plot_summary Invocation
-
              
 
              
 
-
              plot_summary help/usage (--help)
              
 
-
              
-This is the automatically generated usage text for plot_summary.
+
+
+
+
              • plot_summary Description:  Description
+
              • plot_summary Invocation:  Invoking plot_summary
+
              
 
-  
              The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
-(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
-the usage text by passing it through a pager program. 
+
              
+
+
              
+
              
+Up: Top   
              
+
              
+
+
              1 Invoking plot_summary
              
+
+
+
+
+
              This section was generated by AutoGen,
+using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the plot_summary program.
+
              
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
              • plot_summary usage:  plot_summary help/usage (--help)
+
              • plot_summary directory:  directory option
+
              • plot_summary identifier:  identifier option
+
              • plot_summary peer:  peer option
+
              • plot_summary plot-term:  plot-term option
+
              • plot_summary output-file:  output-file option
+
              • plot_summary exit status:  exit status
+
              
+
+
              
+
+
              
+
              
+Next: , Up: plot_summary Invocation   
              
+
              
+
+
              1.1 plot_summary help/usage (--help)
              
+
+
+
              This is the automatically generated usage text for plot_summary.
+
              
+
              The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
+(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
+the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
 more-help is disabled on platforms without a working
 fork(2) function.  The PAGER environment variable is
-used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
+used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
 with a status code of 0.
-
-
              plot_summary - plot statistics generated by summary script - Ver. 4.2.8p12
-USAGE: plot_summary [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]...
+
              
+
              
+
              plot_summary - plot statistics generated by summary script - Ver. 4.2.8p13
+USAGE: plot_summary [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... 
 
         --directory=str          Where the summary files are
         --identifier=str         Origin of the data
@@ -105,103 +147,121 @@ USAGE: plot_summary [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val&
 
 Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single
 hyphen and the flag character.
-
              
-  
              
-
              
-Next: ,
-Previous: plot_summary usage,
-Up: plot_summary Invocation
-
              
+
              
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
              • plot_summary directory:  
+
              • plot_summary identifier:  
+
              • plot_summary peer:  
+
              • plot_summary plot-term:  
+
              • plot_summary output-file:  
+
              • plot_summary exit status:  
+
              
+
+
              
+
+
              
+
              
+Next: , Previous: , Up: plot_summary usage   
              
 
              
+
+
              1.1.1 directory option
              
+
 
-
              directory option
              
-
-
              
-This is the “where the summary files are” option. 
-This option takes a string argument. 
+
              This is the “where the summary files are” option.
+This option takes a string argument.
         The directory where the plot_summary will search for the
-        *_summary files generated by summary script. 
-
              
-
              
-Next: ,
-Previous: plot_summary directory,
-Up: plot_summary Invocation
-
              
+        *_summary files generated by summary script.
+
              
+
+
              
+
              
+Next: , Previous: , Up: plot_summary usage   
              
 
              
+
+
              1.1.2 identifier option
              
+
 
-
              identifier option
              
-
-
              
-This is the “origin of the data” option. 
-This option takes a string argument. 
-        Where does the plotted data come from, default to string "host" plus
+
              This is the “origin of the data” option.
+This option takes a string argument.
+        Where does the plotted data come from, default to string "host" plus
         current hostname
-
              
-
              
-Next: ,
-Previous: plot_summary identifier,
-Up: plot_summary Invocation
-
              
+
              
+
+
              
+
              
+Next: , Previous: , Up: plot_summary usage   
              
 
              
+
+
              1.1.3 peer option
              
+
 
-
              peer option
              
-
-
              
-This is the “peers to generate plots for” option. 
+
              This is the “peers to generate plots for” option.
 This option takes a string argument.
-
-
              This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
                
-
              • may appear an unlimited number of times. 
-
              
-
-  
              By default the peer_summary plots are not generated. Use this option to
-        specify list of peers if you want to generate plots for them. 
-
              
-
              
-Next: ,
-Previous: plot_summary peer,
-Up: plot_summary Invocation
-
              
+
              
+
              This option has some usage constraints.  It:
+
                
+
              •  may appear an unlimited number of times.
+
              
+
+
              By default the peer_summary plots are not generated. Use this option to
+        specify list of peers if you want to generate plots for them.
+
              
+
+
              
+
              
+Next: , Previous: , Up: plot_summary usage   
              
 
              
+
+
              1.1.4 plot-term option
              
+
 
-
              plot-term option
              
-
-
              
-This is the “gnuplot terminal” option. 
-This option takes a string argument. 
+
              This is the “gnuplot terminal” option.
+This option takes a string argument.
         This is string is passed directly to the gnuplot set terminal
         command.  Default is x11 if DISPLAY is set and
-        dumb is it's not'. See output from  -e "set
-        terminal") for the list of available options. 
-
              
-
              
-Next: ,
-Previous: plot_summary plot-term,
-Up: plot_summary Invocation
-
              
+        dumb is it’s not’. See output from (gnuplot -e "set
+        terminal") for the list of available options.
+
              
+
+
              
+
              
+Next: , Previous: , Up: plot_summary usage   
              
 
              
-
-
              output-file option
              
-
-
              
-This is the “output file” option. 
-This option takes a str argument. 
-        Output file for gnuplot, default to stdout. 
-
              
-
              
-Previous: plot_summary output-file,
-Up: plot_summary Invocation
-
              
+
+
              1.1.5 output-file option
              
+
+
+
              This is the “output file” option.
+This option takes a str argument.
+        Output file for gnuplot, default to stdout.
+
              
+
+
              
+
              
+Previous: , Up: plot_summary usage   
              
 
              
-
-
              plot_summary exit status
              
+
+
              1.1.6 plot_summary exit status
              
 
 
              One of the following exit values will be returned:
-     
              
-
              0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)
              Successful program execution. 
-
              1 (EXIT_FAILURE)
              The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid. 
+
              
+
              ‘0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)’
              
+
              Successful program execution.
+
              
+
              ‘1 (EXIT_FAILURE)’
              
+
              The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.
+
              
 
              
+
              
+
 
-
 
+
+
diff --git a/scripts/plot_summary.man.in b/scripts/plot_summary.man.in
index 702742e22..d8188c397 100644
--- a/scripts/plot_summary.man.in
+++ b/scripts/plot_summary.man.in
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH plot_summary 1plot_summaryman "14 Aug 2018" "ntp (4.2.8p12)" "User Commands"
+.TH plot_summary 1plot_summaryman "20 Feb 2019" "ntp (4.2.8p13)" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-_gaOWg/ag-lhaWVg)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:09:43 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 05:04:26 PM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions plot_summary-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/scripts/plot_summary.mdoc.in b/scripts/plot_summary.mdoc.in
index dc55fc309..d3a9f7bde 100644
--- a/scripts/plot_summary.mdoc.in
+++ b/scripts/plot_summary.mdoc.in
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt PLOT_SUMMARY 1plot_summarymdoc User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (plot_summary-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:45 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 05:04:27 PM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    plot_summary-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/scripts/summary-opts b/scripts/summary-opts
index 59869ebc7..9c3102f3a 100644
--- a/scripts/summary-opts
+++ b/scripts/summary-opts
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (summary-opts)
 #
-# It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:40 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+# It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 05:04:25 PM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 # From the definitions    summary-opts.def
 # and the template file   perlopt
 
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ sub processOptions {
         'help|?', 'more-help'));
 
     $usage = <<'USAGE';
-summary - compute various stastics from NTP stat files - Ver. 4.2.8p12
+summary - compute various stastics from NTP stat files - Ver. 4.2.8p13
 USAGE: summary [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]... 
 
         --directory=str          Directory containing stat files
diff --git a/scripts/summary.1summaryman b/scripts/summary.1summaryman
index 4065dd6dd..932c498a7 100644
--- a/scripts/summary.1summaryman
+++ b/scripts/summary.1summaryman
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH summary 1summaryman "14 Aug 2018" "ntp (4.2.8p12)" "User Commands"
+.TH summary 1summaryman "20 Feb 2019" "ntp (4.2.8p13)" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-tCaq.g/ag-FCay9g)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:09:49 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 05:04:30 PM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions summary-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/scripts/summary.1summarymdoc b/scripts/summary.1summarymdoc
index 9bad4df09..198d16262 100644
--- a/scripts/summary.1summarymdoc
+++ b/scripts/summary.1summarymdoc
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt SUMMARY 1summarymdoc User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (summary-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:51 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 05:04:31 PM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    summary-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/scripts/summary.html b/scripts/summary.html
index 55e0ca90c..b6e47e19d 100644
--- a/scripts/summary.html
+++ b/scripts/summary.html
@@ -1,95 +1,138 @@
-
+
+
+
 
-Summary User's Manual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
              Summary User's Manual
              
-
              
-
              
-Next: ,
-Previous: (dir),
-Up: (dir)
-
              
-
              
-
-
              Summary User Manual
              
+
+Summary User’s Manual
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
 
-
              This document describes the use of the NTP Project's summary program. 
-This document applies to version 4.2.8p12 of summary.
 
-  
              
-
              Short Contents
              
-
-
              
+
 
-
+
+
              Summary User’s Manual
              
 
-
              
-
              
-Previous: summary Description,
-Up: Top
-
              
-
              
 
-
              Invoking summary
              
 
-
              
 
-  
              This section was generated by AutoGen,
-using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the summary program.
 
-
                
-
              • summary usage:                   summary help/usage (--help)
-
              • summary directory:               directory option
-
              • summary end-date:                end-date option
-
              • summary output-directory:        output-directory option
-
              • summary start-date:              start-date option
-
              • summary exit status:             exit status
+
+
                
+
                
+Previous: , Up: (dir)   
                
+
                
+
+
                Summary User Manual
                
+
+
                This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s summary program.
+This document applies to version 4.2.8p13 of summary.
+
                
+
+
                Short Table of Contents
                
+
+
                
+
+
                
+
 
-
                
-
                
-Next: ,
-Up: summary Invocation
-
                
+
+
+
+
                • summary Description:  Description
+
                • summary Invocation:  Invoking summary
+
                
+
+
                
+
+
                
+
                
+Up: Top   
                
 
                
+
+
                1 Invoking summary
                
+
+
+
 
-
                summary help/usage (--help)
                
 
-
                
-This is the automatically generated usage text for summary.
 
-  
                The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
-(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
-the usage text by passing it through a pager program. 
+
                This section was generated by AutoGen,
+using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the summary program.
+
                
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
                • summary usage:  summary help/usage (--help)
+
                • summary directory:  directory option
+
                • summary end-date:  end-date option
+
                • summary output-directory:  output-directory option
+
                • summary start-date:  start-date option
+
                • summary exit status:  exit status
+
                
+
+
                
+
+
                
+
                
+Next: , Up: summary Invocation   
                
+
                
+
+
                1.1 summary help/usage (--help)
                
+
+
+
                This is the automatically generated usage text for summary.
+
                
+
                The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
+(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
+the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
 more-help is disabled on platforms without a working
 fork(2) function.  The PAGER environment variable is
-used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
+used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
 with a status code of 0.
-
-
                summary - compute various stastics from NTP stat files - Ver. 4.2.8p12
-USAGE: summary [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]...
+
                
+
                
+
                summary - compute various stastics from NTP stat files - Ver. 4.2.8p13
+USAGE: summary [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... 
 
         --directory=str          Directory containing stat files
         --end-date=num           End date
@@ -102,81 +145,98 @@ USAGE: summary [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>]
 
 Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single
 hyphen and the flag character.
-
                
-  
                
-
                
-Next: ,
-Previous: summary usage,
-Up: summary Invocation
-
                
+
                
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
                • summary directory:  
+
                • summary end-date:  
+
                • summary output-directory:  
+
                • summary start-date:  
+
                • summary exit status:  
+
                
+
+
                
+
+
                
+
                
+Next: , Previous: , Up: summary usage   
                
 
                
+
+
                1.1.1 directory option
                
+
 
-
                directory option
                
-
-
                
-This is the “directory containing stat files” option. 
-This option takes a string argument. 
+
                This is the “directory containing stat files” option.
+This option takes a string argument.
         The directory where ntpd will search for .stat files generated
-        by ntpd. 
-
                
-
                
-Next: ,
-Previous: summary directory,
-Up: summary Invocation
-
                
+        by ntpd.
+
                
+
+
                
+
                
+Next: , Previous: , Up: summary usage   
                
 
                
+
+
                1.1.2 end-date option
                
+
 
-
                end-date option
                
-
-
                
-This is the “end date” option. 
-This option takes a number argument. 
+
                This is the “end date” option.
+This option takes a number argument.
         Process all files with the date suffix less or equal to value of this
         option.  Defaults to today minus one day (Use date -u +%Y%m%d)
-        to get the timestamp. 
-
                
-
                
-Next: ,
-Previous: summary end-date,
-Up: summary Invocation
-
                
+        to get the timestamp.
+
                
+
+
                
+
                
+Next: , Previous: , Up: summary usage   
                
 
                
-
-
                output-directory option
                
-
-
                
-This is the “output directory” option. 
-This option takes a str argument. 
-        The output directory summary will write all output files to. 
-
                
-
                
-Next: ,
-Previous: summary output-directory,
-Up: summary Invocation
-
                
+
+
                1.1.3 output-directory option
                
+
+
+
                This is the “output directory” option.
+This option takes a str argument.
+        The output directory summary will write all output files to.
+
                
+
+
                
+
                
+Next: , Previous: , Up: summary usage   
                
 
                
+
+
                1.1.4 start-date option
                
+
 
-
                start-date option
                
-
-
                
-This is the “start date” option. 
-This option takes a num argument. 
+
                This is the “start date” option.
+This option takes a num argument.
         Process all files with the date suffix more or equal to value of
-        this option.  Defaults to 197000101. 
-
                
-
                
-Previous: summary start-date,
-Up: summary Invocation
-
                
+        this option.  Defaults to 197000101.
+
                
+
+
                
+
                
+Previous: , Up: summary usage   
                
 
                
-
-
                summary exit status
                
+
+
                1.1.5 summary exit status
                
 
 
                One of the following exit values will be returned:
-     
                
-
                0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)
                Successful program execution. 
-
                1 (EXIT_FAILURE)
                The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid. 
+
                
+
                ‘0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)’
                
+
                Successful program execution.
+
                
+
                ‘1 (EXIT_FAILURE)’
                
+
                The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.
+
                
 
                
+
                
+
 
-
 
+
+
diff --git a/scripts/summary.man.in b/scripts/summary.man.in
index 4065dd6dd..932c498a7 100644
--- a/scripts/summary.man.in
+++ b/scripts/summary.man.in
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH summary 1summaryman "14 Aug 2018" "ntp (4.2.8p12)" "User Commands"
+.TH summary 1summaryman "20 Feb 2019" "ntp (4.2.8p13)" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-tCaq.g/ag-FCay9g)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:09:49 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 05:04:30 PM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions summary-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/scripts/summary.mdoc.in b/scripts/summary.mdoc.in
index 9bad4df09..198d16262 100644
--- a/scripts/summary.mdoc.in
+++ b/scripts/summary.mdoc.in
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt SUMMARY 1summarymdoc User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (summary-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:51 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 05:04:31 PM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    summary-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/scripts/update-leap/invoke-update-leap.texi b/scripts/update-leap/invoke-update-leap.texi
index 6da23f2d1..0d0fbbe89 100644
--- a/scripts/update-leap/invoke-update-leap.texi
+++ b/scripts/update-leap/invoke-update-leap.texi
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 #
 # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (invoke-update-leap.texi)
 #
-# It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:32 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+# It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 05:04:22 PM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 # From the definitions    update-leap-opts.def
 # and the template file   agtexi-cmd.tpl
 @end ignore
diff --git a/scripts/update-leap/update-leap-opts b/scripts/update-leap/update-leap-opts
index b2f89bf49..6074aa7a1 100644
--- a/scripts/update-leap/update-leap-opts
+++ b/scripts/update-leap/update-leap-opts
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (update-leap-opts)
 #
-# It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:38 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+# It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 05:04:25 PM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 # From the definitions    update-leap-opts.def
 # and the template file   perlopt
 
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ sub processOptions {
         'help|?', 'more-help'));
 
     $usage = <<'USAGE';
-update-leap - leap-seconds file manager/updater - Ver. 4.2.8p12
+update-leap - leap-seconds file manager/updater - Ver. 4.2.8p13
 USAGE: update-leap [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]... 
 
     -s, --source-url=str         The URL of the master copy of the leapseconds file
diff --git a/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.1update-leapman b/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.1update-leapman
index ac138146e..33aa4f665 100644
--- a/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.1update-leapman
+++ b/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.1update-leapman
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH update-leap 1update-leapman "14 Aug 2018" "ntp (4.2.8p12)" "User Commands"
+.TH update-leap 1update-leapman "20 Feb 2019" "ntp (4.2.8p13)" "User Commands"
 .\"
-.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-4Iayif/ag-fJaGhf)
+.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:09:29 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 05:04:24 PM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\" From the definitions update-leap-opts.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
diff --git a/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.1update-leapmdoc b/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.1update-leapmdoc
index e3845dcc3..fe1a16472 100644
--- a/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.1update-leapmdoc
+++ b/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.1update-leapmdoc
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd August 14 2018
+.Dd February 20 2019
 .Dt UPDATE_LEAP 1update-leapmdoc User Commands
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (update-leap-opts.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  August 14, 2018 at 08:09:36 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  February 20, 2019 at 09:57:38 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5
 .\"  From the definitions    update-leap-opts.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
diff --git a/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.html b/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.html
index 3a05b038a..becb66888 100644
--- a/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.html
+++ b/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.html
@@ -1,120 +1,169 @@
-
+
+
+
 
-update-leap User's Manual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+update-leap User’s Manual
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
 
-
-
                update-leap User's Manual
                
-
                
-
                
-Next: ,
-Previous: (dir),
-Up: (dir)
-
                
-
                
 
-  
                This document describes the use of the NTP Project's update-leap program.
+
+
                update-leap User’s Manual
                
+
+
 
-  
                This document applies to version 4.2.8p12 of update-leap.
+
+
+
+
                
+
                
+Previous: , Up: (dir)   
                
+
                
+
                Top
                
+
+
                This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s update-leap program.
+
                
+
                This document applies to version 4.2.8p13 of update-leap.
+
                
+
+
                Short Table of Contents
                
 
 
                
-
                Short Contents
                
-
                  
-
                
+
              • 1 Invoking update-leap
                • 
+
 
                
 
-
 
-
                
-
                
+
+
+
+
                • update-leap Description:  Description
+
                • update-leap Invocation:  Invoking update-leap
+
                
+
+
                
 
-
                
+
                
+
                
+Up: Top   
                
 
                
+
+
                1 Invoking update-leap
                
+
+
 
-
                0.1 Invoking update-leap
                
 
-
                
 
-  
                update-leap
+
                update-leap
 will validate the file currently on the local system
 and if necessary, updates leap-second definition file.
-
-  
                Ordinarily, the file is found using the "leapfile" directive in
-ntp.conf(5). 
+
                
+
                Ordinarily, the file is found using the "leapfile" directive in
+ntp.conf(5).
 However, an alternate location can be specified on the command line.
-
-  
                If the file does not exist, is not valid, has expired, or is expiring soon,
+
                
+
                If the file does not exist, is not valid, has expired, or is expiring soon,
 a new copy will be downloaded.  If the new copy validates, it is installed and
 NTP is (optionally) restarted.
-
-  
                If the current file is acceptable, no download or restart occurs.
-
-  
                -c can also be used to invoke another script to perform administrative
-functions, e.g. to copy the file to other local systems. 
+
                
+
                If the current file is acceptable, no download or restart occurs.
+
                
+
                -c can also be used to invoke another script to perform administrative
+functions, e.g. to copy the file to other local systems.
 .PP
 This can be run as a cron job.  As the file is rarely updated, and leap
 seconds are announced at least one month in advance (usually longer), it
-need not be run more frequently than about once every three weeks. 
+need not be run more frequently than about once every three weeks.
 .PP
-For cron-friendly behavior, define CRONJOB=1 in the crontab. 
+For cron-friendly behavior, define CRONJOB=1 in the crontab.
 .PP
 This script depends on$REQUIREDCMDS
-
-  
                This section was generated by AutoGen,
+
                
+
                This section was generated by AutoGen,
 using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the update-leap program.
-
-
                
-
-
                
-
                
-Next: ,
-Up: update-leap Invocation
-
                
+
                
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
                • update-leap usage:  update-leap help/usage (--help)
+
                • update-leap source-url:  source-url option (-s)
+
                • update-leap ipv4:  ipv4 option (-4)
+
                • update-leap destination:  destination option (-d)
+
                • update-leap expiration:  expiration option (-e)
+
                • update-leap ntp-conf-file:  ntp-conf-file option (-f)
+
                • update-leap force-update:  force-update option (-F)
+
                • update-leap exit status:  exit status
+
                • update-leap Usage:  Usage
+
                • update-leap Authors:  Authors
+
                
+
+
                
+
+
                
+
                
+Next: , Up: update-leap Invocation   
                
 
                
-
-
                0.1.1 update-leap help/usage (--help)
                
-
-
                
-This is the automatically generated usage text for update-leap.
-
-  
                The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
-(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
-the usage text by passing it through a pager program. 
+
+
                1.1 update-leap help/usage (--help)
                
+
+
+
                This is the automatically generated usage text for update-leap.
+
                
+
                The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option
+(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help).  more-help will print
+the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
 more-help is disabled on platforms without a working
 fork(2) function.  The PAGER environment variable is
-used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
+used to select the program, defaulting to more.  Both will exit
 with a status code of 0.
-
+
                
+
                
 
                +
 Usage: update-leap [options]
 
 Verifies and if necessary, updates leap-second definition file
@@ -189,160 +238,159 @@ IO::Socket::SSL - version >= 1.56
 NET::SSLeay         - version >= 1.49
 
 Version: 1.004
-
                
-  
                
-
                
-Next: ,
-Previous: update-leap usage,
-Up: update-leap Invocation
-
                
-
                
+
    -

    0.1.2 source-url option (-s)

    +
    + +
    +

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: update-leap Invocation  

    +
    + +

    1.2 source-url option (-s)

    + -

    -This is the “the url of the master copy of the leapseconds file” option. -This option takes a string argument. +

    This is the “the url of the master copy of the leapseconds file” option. +This option takes a string argument. Specify the URL of the master copy to download $LEAPSRC -

    -

    -Next: , -Previous: update-leap source-url, -Up: update-leap Invocation -
    +

    + +
    +

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: update-leap Invocation  

    - -

    0.1.3 ipv4 option (-4)

    - -

    -This is the “use only ipv4 addresses for dns name resolution” option. - -

    This option has some usage constraints. It: -

      -
    • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: -ipv6. -
    - -

    Force DNS resolution of following host names on the command line - to the IPv4 namespace. + +

    1.3 ipv4 option (-4)

    + + +

    This is the “use only ipv4 addresses for dns name resolution” option. +

    +

    This option has some usage constraints. It: +

      +
    • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +ipv6. +
    + +

    Force DNS resolution of following host names on the command line + to the IPv4 namespace. _EndOfDoc_; ; - -

    flag = +

    +

    flag = name = ipv6; flags-cant = ipv4, prefer; value = 6; - descrip = "Use only IPv6 addresses for DNS name resolution"; + descrip = "Use only IPv6 addresses for DNS name resolution"; doc = <<- _EndOfDoc_ Force DNS resolution of following host names on the command line - to the IPv6 namespace. + to the IPv6 namespace. _EndOfDoc_; ; - -

    flag = +

    +

    flag = name = prefer; flags-cant = ipv4, ipv6; value = p; arg-type = keyword; keyword = 4, 6; - descrip = 'Prefer IPv4 or IPv6 (as specified) addresses, but use either'; + descrip = ’Prefer IPv4 or IPv6 (as specified) addresses, but use either’; doc = <<- _EndOfDoc_ -Prefer IPv4 or IPv6 (as specified) addresses, but use either. -

    -

    -Next: , -Previous: update-leap ipv4, -Up: update-leap Invocation -
    +Prefer IPv4 or IPv6 (as specified) addresses, but use either. +

    + +
    +

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: update-leap Invocation  

    + +

    1.4 destination option (-d)

    + -

    0.1.4 destination option (-d)

    - -

    -This is the “filename on the local system” option. -This option takes a string argument float. -The name to use to store the leapfile on the local system. +

    This is the “filename on the local system” option. +This option takes a string argument float. +The name to use to store the leapfile on the local system. $LEAPFILE -

    -

    -Next: , -Previous: update-leap destination, -Up: update-leap Invocation -
    +

    + +
    +

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: update-leap Invocation  

    + +

    1.5 expiration option (-e)

    + -

    0.1.5 expiration option (-e)

    - -

    -This is the “refresh the leapfile this long before it expires” option. -This option takes a string argument. +

    This is the “refresh the leapfile this long before it expires” option. +This option takes a string argument. Specify how long before expiration the file is to be refreshed -Units are required, e.g. "-e 60 days" Note that larger values -imply more frequent refreshes. -"$PREFETCH" -

    -

    -Next: , -Previous: update-leap expiration, -Up: update-leap Invocation -
    +Units are required, e.g. "-e 60 days" Note that larger values +imply more frequent refreshes. +"$PREFETCH" +

    + +
    +

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: update-leap Invocation  

    + +

    1.6 ntp-conf-file option (-f)

    + -

    0.1.6 ntp-conf-file option (-f)

    - -

    -This is the “location of the ntp.conf file” option. -This option takes a string argument. +

    This is the “location of the ntp.conf file” option. +This option takes a string argument. Specify location of ntp.conf (used to make sure leapfile directive is present and to default leapfile) /etc/ntp.conf -

    -

    -Next: , -Previous: update-leap ntp-conf-file, -Up: update-leap Invocation -
    +

    + +
    +

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: update-leap Invocation  

    - -

    0.1.7 force-update option (-F)

    - -

    -This is the “force update of the leapfile” option. -Force update even if current file is OK and not close to expiring. -

    -

    -Next: , -Previous: update-leap force-update, -Up: update-leap Invocation -
    + +

    1.7 force-update option (-F)

    + + +

    This is the “force update of the leapfile” option. +Force update even if current file is OK and not close to expiring. +

    + +
    +

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: update-leap Invocation  

    - -

    0.1.8 update-leap exit status

    + +

    1.8 update-leap exit status

    One of the following exit values will be returned: -

    -
    0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)
    Successful program execution. -
    1 (EXIT_FAILURE)
    The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid. +

    +
    ‘0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)’
    +

    Successful program execution. +

    +
    ‘1 (EXIT_FAILURE)’
    +

    The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid. +

    -
    -

    -Next: , -Previous: update-leap exit status, -Up: update-leap Invocation -
    +
    + +
    +

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: update-leap Invocation  

    - -

    0.1.9 update-leap Usage

    - -
    -

    -Previous: update-leap Usage, -Up: update-leap Invocation -
    + +

    1.9 update-leap Usage

    +
    + +
    +

    +Previous: , Up: update-leap Invocation  

    + +

    1.10 update-leap Authors

    +
    -

    0.1.10 update-leap Authors

    - + + diff --git a/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.man.in b/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.man.in index ac138146e..33aa4f665 100644 --- a/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.man.in +++ b/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.man.in @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH update-leap 1update-leapman "14 Aug 2018" "ntp (4.2.8p12)" "User Commands" +.TH update-leap 1update-leapman "20 Feb 2019" "ntp (4.2.8p13)" "User Commands" .\" -.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-4Iayif/ag-fJaGhf) +.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:09:29 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 05:04:24 PM by AutoGen 5.18.5 .\" From the definitions update-leap-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME diff --git a/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.mdoc.in b/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.mdoc.in index e3845dcc3..fe1a16472 100644 --- a/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.mdoc.in +++ b/scripts/update-leap/update-leap.mdoc.in @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd August 14 2018 +.Dd February 20 2019 .Dt UPDATE_LEAP 1update-leapmdoc User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (update-leap-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:09:36 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:38 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 .\" From the definitions update-leap-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME diff --git a/sntp/invoke-sntp.texi b/sntp/invoke-sntp.texi index 2692326fb..4448653e3 100644 --- a/sntp/invoke-sntp.texi +++ b/sntp/invoke-sntp.texi @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ # # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (invoke-sntp.texi) # -# It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:27:37 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 +# It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:55:49 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 # From the definitions sntp-opts.def # and the template file agtexi-cmd.tpl @end ignore @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ with a status code of 0. @exampleindent 0 @example -sntp - standard Simple Network Time Protocol client program - Ver. 4.2.8p12 +sntp - standard Simple Network Time Protocol client program - Ver. 4.2.8p13 Usage: sntp [ - [] | --[@{=| @}] ]... \ [ hostname-or-IP ...] Flg Arg Option-Name Description diff --git a/sntp/libopts/autoopts/options.h b/sntp/libopts/autoopts/options.h index f92cd0efa..09aac10bc 100644 --- a/sntp/libopts/autoopts/options.h +++ b/sntp/libopts/autoopts/options.h @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ * @{ */ /// autoopts structure version -#define OPTIONS_STRUCT_VERSION 167936 +#define OPTIONS_STRUCT_VERSION 167937 /// autoopts structure version string #define OPTIONS_VERSION_STRING "41:0:16" /// minimum version the autoopts library supports diff --git a/sntp/libopts/genshell.h b/sntp/libopts/genshell.h index 1c1873574..44825567b 100644 --- a/sntp/libopts/genshell.h +++ b/sntp/libopts/genshell.h @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ * tolerable version is at least as old as what was current when the header * template was released. */ -#define AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION 167936 +#define AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION 167937 #if (AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION < OPTIONS_MINIMUM_VERSION) \ || (AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION > OPTIONS_STRUCT_VERSION) # error option template version mismatches autoopts/options.h header diff --git a/sntp/sntp-opts.c b/sntp/sntp-opts.c index 399592142..9f6ee3268 100644 --- a/sntp/sntp-opts.c +++ b/sntp/sntp-opts.c @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ /* * EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (sntp-opts.c) * - * It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:01:13 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 + * It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:55:45 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 * From the definitions sntp-opts.def * and the template file options * - * Generated from AutoOpts 41:0:16 templates. + * Generated from AutoOpts 41:1:16 templates. * * AutoOpts is a copyrighted work. This source file is not encumbered * by AutoOpts licensing, but is provided under the licensing terms chosen @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ extern FILE * option_usage_fp; * static const strings for sntp options */ static char const sntp_opt_strs[2566] = -/* 0 */ "sntp 4.2.8p12\n" +/* 0 */ "sntp 4.2.8p13\n" "Copyright (C) 1992-2017 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n" "This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n" "redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n" @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ static char const sntp_opt_strs[2566] = /* 2313 */ "LOAD_OPTS\0" /* 2323 */ "no-load-opts\0" /* 2336 */ "SNTP\0" -/* 2341 */ "sntp - standard Simple Network Time Protocol client program - Ver. 4.2.8p12\n" +/* 2341 */ "sntp - standard Simple Network Time Protocol client program - Ver. 4.2.8p13\n" "Usage: %s [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]... \\\n" "\t\t[ hostname-or-IP ...]\n\0" /* 2501 */ "$HOME\0" @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ static char const sntp_opt_strs[2566] = /* 2509 */ ".ntprc\0" /* 2516 */ "http://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org\0" /* 2550 */ "\n\0" -/* 2552 */ "sntp 4.2.8p12"; +/* 2552 */ "sntp 4.2.8p13"; /** * ipv4 option description with @@ -1176,7 +1176,7 @@ static void bogus_function(void) { translate option names. */ /* referenced via sntpOptions.pzCopyright */ - puts(_("sntp 4.2.8p12\n\ + puts(_("sntp 4.2.8p13\n\ Copyright (C) 1992-2017 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n\ This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n\ redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n\ @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ implied warranty.\n")); puts(_("load options from a config file")); /* referenced via sntpOptions.pzUsageTitle */ - puts(_("sntp - standard Simple Network Time Protocol client program - Ver. 4.2.8p12\n\ + puts(_("sntp - standard Simple Network Time Protocol client program - Ver. 4.2.8p13\n\ Usage: %s [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]... \\\n\ \t\t[ hostname-or-IP ...]\n")); @@ -1274,7 +1274,7 @@ Usage: %s [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]... \\\n\ puts(_("\n")); /* referenced via sntpOptions.pzFullVersion */ - puts(_("sntp 4.2.8p12")); + puts(_("sntp 4.2.8p13")); /* referenced via sntpOptions.pzFullUsage */ puts(_("<<>>")); diff --git a/sntp/sntp-opts.h b/sntp/sntp-opts.h index aa0019ebb..cf17a27c9 100644 --- a/sntp/sntp-opts.h +++ b/sntp/sntp-opts.h @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ /* * EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (sntp-opts.h) * - * It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:01:13 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 + * It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:55:45 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 * From the definitions sntp-opts.def * and the template file options * - * Generated from AutoOpts 41:0:16 templates. + * Generated from AutoOpts 41:1:16 templates. * * AutoOpts is a copyrighted work. This header file is not encumbered * by AutoOpts licensing, but is provided under the licensing terms chosen @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ * tolerable version is at least as old as what was current when the header * template was released. */ -#define AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION 167936 +#define AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION 167937 #if (AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION < OPTIONS_MINIMUM_VERSION) \ || (AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION > OPTIONS_STRUCT_VERSION) # error option template version mismatches autoopts/options.h header @@ -91,9 +91,9 @@ typedef enum { /** count of all options for sntp */ #define OPTION_CT 23 /** sntp version */ -#define SNTP_VERSION "4.2.8p12" +#define SNTP_VERSION "4.2.8p13" /** Full sntp version text */ -#define SNTP_FULL_VERSION "sntp 4.2.8p12" +#define SNTP_FULL_VERSION "sntp 4.2.8p13" /** * Interface defines for all options. Replace "n" with the UPPER_CASED diff --git a/sntp/sntp.1sntpman b/sntp/sntp.1sntpman index 7bf038c3e..732b0b427 100644 --- a/sntp/sntp.1sntpman +++ b/sntp/sntp.1sntpman @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH sntp 1sntpman "14 Aug 2018" "4.2.8p12" "User Commands" +.TH sntp 1sntpman "20 Feb 2019" "4.2.8p13" "User Commands" .\" -.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-7ray4x/ag-hsaq3x) +.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:27:33 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:55:51 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 .\" From the definitions sntp-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME diff --git a/sntp/sntp.1sntpmdoc b/sntp/sntp.1sntpmdoc index 715c456cc..c3dc84d44 100644 --- a/sntp/sntp.1sntpmdoc +++ b/sntp/sntp.1sntpmdoc @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd August 14 2018 +.Dd February 20 2019 .Dt SNTP 1sntpmdoc User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (sntp-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:27:40 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:55:48 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 .\" From the definitions sntp-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME diff --git a/sntp/sntp.html b/sntp/sntp.html index fe1af50db..884553b04 100644 --- a/sntp/sntp.html +++ b/sntp/sntp.html @@ -1,182 +1,249 @@ - + + + -Sntp User's Manual - - - - - - - + +Sntp User’s Manual + + + + + + + + + + + - -

    Sntp User's Manual

    -
    -

    -Next: , -Previous: (dir), -Up: (dir) -
    -
    -

    Simple Network Time Protocol User Manual

    + +

    Sntp User’s Manual

    + + -

    This document describes the use of the NTP Project's sntp program, + + + +

    +

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: (dir)  

    +
    + +

    Simple Network Time Protocol User Manual

    + +

    This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s sntp program, that can be used to query a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server and display the time offset of the system clock relative to the server clock. Run as root, it can correct the system clock to this offset as well. It can be run as an interactive command or from a cron job. - -

    This document applies to version 4.2.8p12 of sntp. - -

    The program implements the SNTP protocol as defined by RFC 5905, the NTPv4 +

    +

    This document applies to version 4.2.8p13 of sntp. +

    +

    The program implements the SNTP protocol as defined by RFC 5905, the NTPv4 IETF specification. +

    + +

    Short Table of Contents

    -
    -

    Short Contents

    -
      -Simple Network Time Protocol User Manual +
      +
      - -
      -

      + + + + +
      • sntp Description:  Description +
      • sntp Invocation:  Invoking sntp +
      • Usage:  Usage +
      + +
      -
      +
      +

      +Next: , Up: Top  

      - - -

      Description

      + +

      1 Description

      By default, sntp writes the local data and time (i.e., not UTC) to the standard output in the format: +

      +
      +
      1996-10-15 20:17:25.123 (+0800) +4.567 +/- 0.089 secs
+
      -
           1996-10-15 20:17:25.123 (+0800) +4.567 +/- 0.089 secs
-
      -

      where +

      where YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS.SUBSEC is the local date and time, (+0800) is the local timezone adjustment (so we would add 8 hours and 0 minutes to convert the reported local time to UTC), and the +4.567 +/- 0.089 secs indicates the time offset and error bound of the system clock relative to the server clock. - -

      -

      +

      + + + +
      • sntp Invocation:   +
      • Usage:   +
      + +
      -
      +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: sntp Description  

      + +

      1.1 Invoking sntp

      + + -

      Invoking sntp

      -

      -

      sntp +

      sntp can be used as an SNTP client to query a NTP or SNTP server and either display -the time or set the local system's time (given suitable privilege). It can be +the time or set the local system’s time (given suitable privilege). It can be run as an interactive command or from a cron job. - -

      NTP (the Network Time Protocol) and SNTP (the Simple Network Time Protocol) +

      +

      NTP (the Network Time Protocol) and SNTP (the Simple Network Time Protocol) are defined and described by RFC 5905. +

      -

      The default is to write the estimated correct local date and time (i.e. not +

      The default is to write the estimated correct local date and time (i.e. not UTC) to the standard output in a format like: - -

      '1996-10-15 20:17:25.123 (+0800) +4.567 +/- 0.089 [host] IP sN' - -

      where the +

      +

      '1996-10-15 20:17:25.123 (+0800) +4.567 +/- 0.089 [host] IP sN' +

      +

      where the '(+0800)' means that to get to UTC from the reported local time one must add 8 hours and 0 minutes, the '+4.567' indicates the local clock is 4.567 seconds behind the correct time -(so 4.567 seconds must be added to the local clock to get it to be correct). +(so 4.567 seconds must be added to the local clock to get it to be correct). Note that the number of decimals printed for this value will change -based on the reported precision of the server. +based on the reported precision of the server. '+/- 0.089' is the reported synchronization distance -(in seconds), which represents the maximum error due to all causes. +(in seconds), which represents the maximum error due to all causes. If the server does not report valid data needed to calculate the synchronization distance, this will be reported as -'+/- ?'. +'+/- ?'. If the host is different from the IP, -both will be displayed. -Otherwise, only the +both will be displayed. +Otherwise, only the IP -is displayed. +is displayed. Finally, the stratum of the host is reported and the leap indicator is decoded and displayed. - -

      This section was generated by AutoGen, -using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the sntp program. +

      +

      This section was generated by AutoGen, +using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the sntp program. This software is released under the NTP license, <http://ntp.org/license>. - -

      - -
      -

      -Next: , -Up: sntp Invocation -
      +

      + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      • sntp usage:  sntp help/usage (--help) +
      • sntp ipv4:  ipv4 option (-4) +
      • sntp ipv6:  ipv6 option (-6) +
      • sntp authentication:  authentication option (-a) +
      • sntp broadcast:  broadcast option (-b) +
      • sntp concurrent:  concurrent option (-c) +
      • sntp gap:  gap option (-g) +
      • sntp kod:  kod option (-K) +
      • sntp keyfile:  keyfile option (-k) +
      • sntp logfile:  logfile option (-l) +
      • sntp steplimit:  steplimit option (-M) +
      • sntp ntpversion:  ntpversion option (-o) +
      • sntp usereservedport:  usereservedport option (-r) +
      • sntp timeout:  timeout option (-t) +
      • sntp wait:  wait option +
      • sntp config:  presetting/configuring sntp +
      • sntp exit status:  exit status +
      • sntp Usage:  Usage +
      • sntp Authors:  Authors +
      + +
      + +
      +

      +Next: , Up: sntp Invocation  

      - -

      sntp help/usage (--help)

      - -

      -This is the automatically generated usage text for sntp. - -

      The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option -(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print -the usage text by passing it through a pager program. + +

      1.1.1 sntp help/usage (--help)

      + + +

      This is the automatically generated usage text for sntp. +

      +

      The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option +(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print +the usage text by passing it through a pager program. more-help is disabled on platforms without a working fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is -used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit +used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit with a status code of 0. - -

      sntp - standard Simple Network Time Protocol client program - Ver. 4.2.8p12
+
      
+
      
+
      sntp - standard Simple Network Time Protocol client program - Ver. 4.2.8p13
 Usage:  sntp [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... \
                 [ hostname-or-IP ...]
   Flg Arg Option-Name    Description
@@ -228,397 +295,408 @@ The following option preset mechanisms are supported:
  - examining environment variables named SNTP_*
 
 Please send bug reports to:  <http://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org>
-
      
-  
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: sntp usage,
-Up: sntp Invocation
-
      
-
      
-
-
      ipv4 option (-4)
      
+
      -

      -This is the “force ipv4 dns name resolution” option. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: -ipv6. -
      - -

      Force DNS resolution of the following host names on the command line -to the IPv4 namespace. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: sntp ipv4, -Up: sntp Invocation -
      +
      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: sntp Invocation  

      - -

      ipv6 option (-6)

      - -

      -This is the “force ipv6 dns name resolution” option. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: -ipv4. -
      - -

      Force DNS resolution of the following host names on the command line -to the IPv6 namespace. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: sntp ipv6, -Up: sntp Invocation -
      + +

      1.1.2 ipv4 option (-4)

      + + +

      This is the “force ipv4 dns name resolution” option. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +ipv6. +
      + +

      Force DNS resolution of the following host names on the command line +to the IPv4 namespace. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: sntp Invocation  

      - -

      authentication option (-a)

      - -

      -This is the “enable authentication with the key auth-keynumber” option. -This option takes a number argument auth-keynumber. -Enable authentication using the key specified in this option's -argument. The argument of this option is the keyid, a -number specified in the keyfile as this key's identifier. -See the keyfile option (-k) for more details. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: sntp authentication, -Up: sntp Invocation -
      + +

      1.1.3 ipv6 option (-6)

      + + +

      This is the “force ipv6 dns name resolution” option. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +ipv4. +
      + +

      Force DNS resolution of the following host names on the command line +to the IPv6 namespace. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: sntp Invocation  

      - -

      broadcast option (-b)

      - -

      -This is the “listen to the address specified for broadcast time sync” option. -This option takes a string argument broadcast-address. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • may appear an unlimited number of times. -
      - -

      If specified sntp will listen to the specified address + +

      1.1.4 authentication option (-a)

      + + +

      This is the “enable authentication with the key auth-keynumber” option. +This option takes a number argument auth-keynumber. +Enable authentication using the key specified in this option’s +argument. The argument of this option is the keyid, a +number specified in the keyfile as this key’s identifier. +See the keyfile option (-k) for more details. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: sntp Invocation  

      +
      + +

      1.1.5 broadcast option (-b)

      + + +

      This is the “listen to the address specified for broadcast time sync” option. +This option takes a string argument broadcast-address. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • may appear an unlimited number of times. +
      + +

      If specified sntp will listen to the specified address for NTP broadcasts. The default maximum wait time -can (and probably should) be modified with -t. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: sntp broadcast, -Up: sntp Invocation -
      +can (and probably should) be modified with -t. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: sntp Invocation  

      - -

      concurrent option (-c)

      - -

      -This is the “concurrently query all ips returned for host-name” option. -This option takes a string argument host-name. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • may appear an unlimited number of times. -
      - -

      Requests from an NTP "client" to a "server" should never be sent + +

      1.1.6 concurrent option (-c)

      + + +

      This is the “concurrently query all ips returned for host-name” option. +This option takes a string argument host-name. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • may appear an unlimited number of times. +
      + +

      Requests from an NTP "client" to a "server" should never be sent more rapidly than one every 2 seconds. By default, any IPs returned as part of a DNS lookup are assumed to be for a single instance of ntpd, and therefore sntp will send queries to these IPs one after another, with a 2-second gap in between each query. - -

      The -c or --concurrent flag says that any IPs +

      +

      The -c or --concurrent flag says that any IPs returned for the DNS lookup of the supplied host-name are on -different machines, so we can send concurrent queries. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: sntp concurrent, -Up: sntp Invocation -
      +different machines, so we can send concurrent queries. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: sntp Invocation  

      + +

      1.1.7 gap option (-g)

      + -

      gap option (-g)

      - -

      -This is the “the gap (in milliseconds) between time requests” option. -This option takes a number argument milliseconds. -Since we're only going to use the first valid response we get and +

      This is the “the gap (in milliseconds) between time requests” option. +This option takes a number argument milliseconds. +Since we’re only going to use the first valid response we get and there is benefit to specifying a good number of servers to query, separate the queries we send out by the specified number of -milliseconds. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: sntp gap, -Up: sntp Invocation -
      +milliseconds. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: sntp Invocation  

      + +

      1.1.8 kod option (-K)

      + -

      kod option (-K)

      - -

      -This is the “kod history filename” option. -This option takes a file argument file-name. +

      This is the “kod history filename” option. +This option takes a file argument file-name. Specifies the filename to be used for the persistent history of KoD responses received from servers. If the file does not exist, a -warning message will be displayed. The file will not be created. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: sntp kod, -Up: sntp Invocation -
      +warning message will be displayed. The file will not be created. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: sntp Invocation  

      - -

      keyfile option (-k)

      - -

      -This is the “look in this file for the key specified with -a” option. -This option takes a file argument file-name. -This option specifies the keyfile. -sntp will search for the key specified with -a -keyno in this file. See ntp.keys(5) for more -information. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: sntp keyfile, -Up: sntp Invocation -
      + +

      1.1.9 keyfile option (-k)

      + + +

      This is the “look in this file for the key specified with -a” option. +This option takes a file argument file-name. +This option specifies the keyfile. +sntp will search for the key specified with -a +keyno in this file. See ntp.keys(5) for more +information. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: sntp Invocation  

      + +

      1.1.10 logfile option (-l)

      + -

      logfile option (-l)

      - -

      -This is the “log to specified logfile” option. -This option takes a file argument file-name. +

      This is the “log to specified logfile” option. +This option takes a file argument file-name. This option causes the client to write log messages to the specified -logfile. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: sntp logfile, -Up: sntp Invocation -
      +logfile. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: sntp Invocation  

      - -

      steplimit option (-M)

      - -

      -This is the “adjustments less than steplimit msec will be slewed” option. -This option takes a number argument. -If the time adjustment is less than steplimit milliseconds, -slew the amount using adjtime(2). Otherwise, step the -correction using settimeofday(2). The default value is 0, + +

      1.1.11 steplimit option (-M)

      + + +

      This is the “adjustments less than steplimit msec will be slewed” option. +This option takes a number argument. +If the time adjustment is less than steplimit milliseconds, +slew the amount using adjtime(2). Otherwise, step the +correction using settimeofday(2). The default value is 0, which means all adjustments will be stepped. This is a feature, as -different situations demand different values. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: sntp steplimit, -Up: sntp Invocation -
      +different situations demand different values. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: sntp Invocation  

      + +

      1.1.12 ntpversion option (-o)

      + -

      ntpversion option (-o)

      - -

      -This is the “send int as our ntp protocol version” option. -This option takes a number argument. +

      This is the “send int as our ntp protocol version” option. +This option takes a number argument. When sending requests to a remote server, tell them we are running -NTP protocol version ntpversion . -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: sntp ntpversion, -Up: sntp Invocation -
      +NTP protocol version ntpversion . +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: sntp Invocation  

      + +

      1.1.13 usereservedport option (-r)

      + -

      usereservedport option (-r)

      - -

      -This is the “use the ntp reserved port (port 123)” option. +

      This is the “use the ntp reserved port (port 123)” option. Use port 123, which is reserved for NTP, for our network -communications. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: sntp usereservedport, -Up: sntp Invocation -
      +communications. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: sntp Invocation  

      + +

      1.1.14 timeout option (-t)

      + -

      timeout option (-t)

      - -

      -This is the “the number of seconds to wait for responses” option. -This option takes a number argument seconds. +

      This is the “the number of seconds to wait for responses” option. +This option takes a number argument seconds. When waiting for a reply, sntp will wait the number of seconds specified before giving up. The default should be more than enough for a unicast response. If sntp is only waiting for a broadcast response a longer timeout is -likely needed. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: sntp timeout, -Up: sntp Invocation -
      +likely needed. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: sntp Invocation  

      - -

      wait option

      - -

      -This is the “wait for pending replies (if not setting the time)” option. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • can be disabled with –no-wait. -
      • It is enabled by default. -
      - -

      If we are not setting the time, wait for all pending responses. - -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: sntp wait, -Up: sntp Invocation -
      + +

      1.1.15 wait option

      + + +

      This is the “wait for pending replies (if not setting the time)” option. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • can be disabled with –no-wait. +
      • It is enabled by default. +
      + +

      If we are not setting the time, wait for all pending responses. +

      + +
      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: sntp Invocation  

      - -

      presetting/configuring sntp

      + +

      1.1.16 presetting/configuring sntp

      Any option that is not marked as not presettable may be preset by -loading values from configuration ("rc" or "ini") files, and values from environment variables named SNTP and SNTP_<OPTION_NAME>. <OPTION_NAME> must be one of -the options listed above in upper case and segmented with underscores. +loading values from configuration ("rc" or "ini") files, and values from environment variables named SNTP and SNTP_<OPTION_NAME>. <OPTION_NAME> must be one of +the options listed above in upper case and segmented with underscores. The SNTP variable will be tokenized and parsed like the command line. The remaining variables are tested for existence and their values are treated like option arguments. - -

      libopts will search in 2 places for configuration files: -

        -
      • $HOME -
      • $PWD -
      - The environment variables HOME, and PWD -are expanded and replaced when sntp runs. -For any of these that are plain files, they are simply processed. -For any that are directories, then a file named .ntprc is searched for +

      + +

      libopts will search in 2 places for configuration files: +

        +
      • $HOME +
      • $PWD +
      +

      The environment variables HOME, and PWD +are expanded and replaced when sntp runs. +For any of these that are plain files, they are simply processed. +For any that are directories, then a file named .ntprc is searched for within that directory and processed. - -

      Configuration files may be in a wide variety of formats. +

      +

      Configuration files may be in a wide variety of formats. The basic format is an option name followed by a value (argument) on the same line. Values may be separated from the option name with a colon, equal sign or simply white space. Values may be continued across multiple lines by escaping the newline with a backslash. - -

      Multiple programs may also share the same initialization file. +

      +

      Multiple programs may also share the same initialization file. Common options are collected at the top, followed by program specific segments. The segments are separated by lines like: -

          [SNTP]
-
      -

      or by -

          <?program sntp>
-
      -

      Do not mix these styles within one configuration file. - -

      Compound values and carefully constructed string values may also be +

      +
      [SNTP]
+
      +

      or by +

      +
      <?program sntp>
+
      +

      Do not mix these styles within one configuration file. +

      +

      Compound values and carefully constructed string values may also be specified using XML syntax: -

          <option-name>
-       <sub-opt>...&lt;...&gt;...</sub-opt>
-    </option-name>
-
      -

      yielding an option-name.sub-opt string value of -

          "...<...>..."
-
      -

      AutoOpts does not track suboptions. You simply note that it is a +

      +
      <option-name>
+   <sub-opt>...&lt;...&gt;...</sub-opt>
+</option-name>
+
      +

      yielding an option-name.sub-opt string value of +

      +
      "...<...>..."
+
      +

      AutoOpts does not track suboptions. You simply note that it is a hierarchicly valued option. AutoOpts does provide a means for searching the associated name/value pair list (see: optionFindValue). - -

      The command line options relating to configuration and/or usage help are: - -

      version (-)
      +

      +

      The command line options relating to configuration and/or usage help are: +

      + +

      version (-)

      Print the program version to standard out, optionally with licensing information, then exit 0. The optional argument specifies how much licensing -detail to provide. The default is to print just the version. The licensing infomation may be selected with an option argument. +detail to provide. The default is to print just the version. The licensing infomation may be selected with an option argument. Only the first letter of the argument is examined: - -

      -
      version
      Only print the version. This is the default. -
      copyright
      Name the copyright usage licensing terms. -
      verbose
      Print the full copyright usage licensing terms. +

      +
      +
      ‘version’
      +

      Only print the version. This is the default. +

      +
      ‘copyright’
      +

      Name the copyright usage licensing terms. +

      +
      ‘verbose’
      +

      Print the full copyright usage licensing terms. +

      -
      -

      -Next: , -Previous: sntp config, -Up: sntp Invocation -
      +
      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: sntp Invocation  

      - -

      sntp exit status

      + +

      1.1.17 sntp exit status

      One of the following exit values will be returned: -

      -
      0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)
      Successful program execution. -
      1 (EXIT_FAILURE)
      The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid. -
      66 (EX_NOINPUT)
      A specified configuration file could not be loaded. -
      70 (EX_SOFTWARE)
      libopts had an internal operational error. Please report -it to autogen-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. +

      +
      ‘0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)’
      +

      Successful program execution. +

      +
      ‘1 (EXIT_FAILURE)’
      +

      The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid. +

      +
      ‘66 (EX_NOINPUT)’
      +

      A specified configuration file could not be loaded. +

      +
      ‘70 (EX_SOFTWARE)’
      +

      libopts had an internal operational error. Please report +it to autogen-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. +

      -
      -

      -Next: , -Previous: sntp exit status, -Up: sntp Invocation -
      +
      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: sntp Invocation  

      - -

      sntp Usage

      - -
      -

      -Previous: sntp Usage, -Up: sntp Invocation -
      + +

      1.1.18 sntp Usage

      +
      + +
      +

      +Previous: , Up: sntp Invocation  

      + +

      1.1.19 sntp Authors

      -

      sntp Authors

      - -
      -

      +
      -
      +
      +

      +Previous: , Up: sntp Description  

      - - -

      Usage

      + +

      1.2 Usage

      The simplest use of this program is as an unprivileged command to -check the current time, offset, and error in the local clock. +check the current time, offset, and error in the local clock. For example: +

      +
      +
      sntp ntpserver.somewhere
+
      -
          sntp ntpserver.somewhere
-
      -

      With suitable privilege, it can be run as a command or in a +

      With suitable privilege, it can be run as a command or in a crom job to reset the local clock from a reliable server, like -the ntpdate and rdate commands. +the ntpdate and rdate commands. For example: +

      +
      +
      sntp -a ntpserver.somewhere
+
      +
      + -
          sntp -a ntpserver.somewhere
-
      - + + diff --git a/sntp/sntp.man.in b/sntp/sntp.man.in index 41985da7e..b94a3cdea 100644 --- a/sntp/sntp.man.in +++ b/sntp/sntp.man.in @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH sntp @SNTP_MS@ "14 Aug 2018" "4.2.8p12" "User Commands" +.TH sntp @SNTP_MS@ "20 Feb 2019" "4.2.8p13" "User Commands" .\" -.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-7ray4x/ag-hsaq3x) +.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:27:33 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:55:51 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 .\" From the definitions sntp-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME diff --git a/sntp/sntp.mdoc.in b/sntp/sntp.mdoc.in index 4a7fb05bd..89eb68c0d 100644 --- a/sntp/sntp.mdoc.in +++ b/sntp/sntp.mdoc.in @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd August 14 2018 +.Dd February 20 2019 .Dt SNTP @SNTP_MS@ User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (sntp-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:27:40 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:55:48 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 .\" From the definitions sntp-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME diff --git a/util/invoke-ntp-keygen.texi b/util/invoke-ntp-keygen.texi index bfba1fedc..cb0d89103 100644 --- a/util/invoke-ntp-keygen.texi +++ b/util/invoke-ntp-keygen.texi @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ # # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (invoke-ntp-keygen.texi) # -# It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:30:35 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 +# It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:13 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 # From the definitions ntp-keygen-opts.def # and the template file agtexi-cmd.tpl @end ignore @@ -1056,7 +1056,7 @@ with a status code of 0. @exampleindent 0 @example -ntp-keygen (ntp) - Create a NTP host key - Ver. 4.2.8p12 +ntp-keygen (ntp) - Create a NTP host key - Ver. 4.2.8p13 Usage: ntp-keygen [ - [] | --[@{=| @}] ]... Flg Arg Option-Name Description -b Num imbits identity modulus bits diff --git a/util/ntp-keygen-opts.c b/util/ntp-keygen-opts.c index 7009ed5a0..e47d7ce5c 100644 --- a/util/ntp-keygen-opts.c +++ b/util/ntp-keygen-opts.c @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ /* * EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntp-keygen-opts.c) * - * It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:30:21 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 + * It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:09 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 * From the definitions ntp-keygen-opts.def * and the template file options * - * Generated from AutoOpts 41:0:16 templates. + * Generated from AutoOpts 41:1:16 templates. * * AutoOpts is a copyrighted work. This source file is not encumbered * by AutoOpts licensing, but is provided under the licensing terms chosen @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ extern FILE * option_usage_fp; * static const strings for ntp-keygen options */ static char const ntp_keygen_opt_strs[2442] = -/* 0 */ "ntp-keygen (ntp) 4.2.8p12\n" +/* 0 */ "ntp-keygen (ntp) 4.2.8p13\n" "Copyright (C) 1992-2017 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n" "This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n" "redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n" @@ -165,14 +165,14 @@ static char const ntp_keygen_opt_strs[2442] = /* 2223 */ "no-load-opts\0" /* 2236 */ "no\0" /* 2239 */ "NTP_KEYGEN\0" -/* 2250 */ "ntp-keygen (ntp) - Create a NTP host key - Ver. 4.2.8p12\n" +/* 2250 */ "ntp-keygen (ntp) - Create a NTP host key - Ver. 4.2.8p13\n" "Usage: %s [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]...\n\0" /* 2365 */ "$HOME\0" /* 2371 */ ".\0" /* 2373 */ ".ntprc\0" /* 2380 */ "http://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org\0" /* 2414 */ "\n\0" -/* 2416 */ "ntp-keygen (ntp) 4.2.8p12"; +/* 2416 */ "ntp-keygen (ntp) 4.2.8p13"; /** * imbits option description: @@ -1310,7 +1310,7 @@ static void bogus_function(void) { translate option names. */ /* referenced via ntp_keygenOptions.pzCopyright */ - puts(_("ntp-keygen (ntp) 4.2.8p12\n\ + puts(_("ntp-keygen (ntp) 4.2.8p13\n\ Copyright (C) 1992-2017 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n\ This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n\ redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n\ @@ -1409,14 +1409,14 @@ implied warranty.\n")); puts(_("load options from a config file")); /* referenced via ntp_keygenOptions.pzUsageTitle */ - puts(_("ntp-keygen (ntp) - Create a NTP host key - Ver. 4.2.8p12\n\ + puts(_("ntp-keygen (ntp) - Create a NTP host key - Ver. 4.2.8p13\n\ Usage: %s [ - [] | --[{=| }] ]...\n")); /* referenced via ntp_keygenOptions.pzExplain */ puts(_("\n")); /* referenced via ntp_keygenOptions.pzFullVersion */ - puts(_("ntp-keygen (ntp) 4.2.8p12")); + puts(_("ntp-keygen (ntp) 4.2.8p13")); /* referenced via ntp_keygenOptions.pzFullUsage */ puts(_("<<>>")); diff --git a/util/ntp-keygen-opts.h b/util/ntp-keygen-opts.h index 7ff899641..5af994db8 100644 --- a/util/ntp-keygen-opts.h +++ b/util/ntp-keygen-opts.h @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ /* * EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntp-keygen-opts.h) * - * It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:30:20 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 + * It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:09 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 * From the definitions ntp-keygen-opts.def * and the template file options * - * Generated from AutoOpts 41:0:16 templates. + * Generated from AutoOpts 41:1:16 templates. * * AutoOpts is a copyrighted work. This header file is not encumbered * by AutoOpts licensing, but is provided under the licensing terms chosen @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ * tolerable version is at least as old as what was current when the header * template was released. */ -#define AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION 167936 +#define AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION 167937 #if (AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION < OPTIONS_MINIMUM_VERSION) \ || (AO_TEMPLATE_VERSION > OPTIONS_STRUCT_VERSION) # error option template version mismatches autoopts/options.h header @@ -94,9 +94,9 @@ typedef enum { /** count of all options for ntp-keygen */ #define OPTION_CT 26 /** ntp-keygen version */ -#define NTP_KEYGEN_VERSION "4.2.8p12" +#define NTP_KEYGEN_VERSION "4.2.8p13" /** Full ntp-keygen version text */ -#define NTP_KEYGEN_FULL_VERSION "ntp-keygen (ntp) 4.2.8p12" +#define NTP_KEYGEN_FULL_VERSION "ntp-keygen (ntp) 4.2.8p13" /** * Interface defines for all options. Replace "n" with the UPPER_CASED diff --git a/util/ntp-keygen.1ntp-keygenman b/util/ntp-keygen.1ntp-keygenman index d51b0b652..0d5e443d3 100644 --- a/util/ntp-keygen.1ntp-keygenman +++ b/util/ntp-keygen.1ntp-keygenman @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH ntp-keygen 1ntp-keygenman "14 Aug 2018" "ntp (4.2.8p12)" "User Commands" +.TH ntp-keygen 1ntp-keygenman "20 Feb 2019" "ntp (4.2.8p13)" "User Commands" .\" -.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-VYaG.G/ag-7Yay9G) +.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:30:31 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:14 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 .\" From the definitions ntp-keygen-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME diff --git a/util/ntp-keygen.1ntp-keygenmdoc b/util/ntp-keygen.1ntp-keygenmdoc index 2703c6b15..602dae875 100644 --- a/util/ntp-keygen.1ntp-keygenmdoc +++ b/util/ntp-keygen.1ntp-keygenmdoc @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd August 14 2018 +.Dd February 20 2019 .Dt NTP_KEYGEN 1ntp-keygenmdoc User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntp-keygen-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:30:38 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:11 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 .\" From the definitions ntp-keygen-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME diff --git a/util/ntp-keygen.html b/util/ntp-keygen.html index 8c5bd1d06..07ac9c2d3 100644 --- a/util/ntp-keygen.html +++ b/util/ntp-keygen.html @@ -1,87 +1,115 @@ - + + + -Ntp-keygen User's Manual - - - - - - - + +Ntp-keygen User’s Manual + + + + + + + + + + + - -

      Ntp-keygen User's Manual

      -
      -

      Short Contents

      - -
      + +

      Ntp-keygen User’s Manual

      -
      -

      -Up: (dir) -
      -
      -

      Top

      - -
      -

      -Next: , -Previous: (dir), -Up: (dir) -
      + +

      Short Table of Contents

      + +
      +
      -

      NTP Key Generation Program User Manual

      -

      This document describes the use of the NTP Project's ntp-keygen + + + + + + +
      • Description:   +
      • ntp-keygen Invocation:  Invoking ntp-keygen +
      • Running the Program:   +
      • Random Seed File:   +
      • Cryptographic Data Files:   +
      + + +

      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: (dir)  

      +
      + +

      NTP Key Generation Program User Manual

      + +

      This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s ntp-keygen program, that generates cryptographic data files used by the NTPv4 -authentication and identity schemes. +authentication and identity schemes. It can generate message digest keys used in symmetric key cryptography and, if the OpenSSL software library has been installed, it can generate host keys, sign keys, certificates, and identity keys and parameters used by the Autokey -public key cryptography. +public key cryptography. The message digest keys file is generated in a -format compatible with NTPv3. +format compatible with NTPv3. All other files are in PEM-encoded printable ASCII format so they can be embedded as MIME attachments in mail to other sites. - -

      This document applies to version 4.2.8p12 of ntp-keygen. - -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: Top, -Up: Top -
      +

      +

      This document applies to version 4.2.8p13 of ntp-keygen. +

      + + +
      • Description:   +
      + +
      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: Top  

      - - -

      Description

      + +

      1 Description

      This program generates cryptographic data files used by the NTPv4 authentication and identity schemes. It can generate message digest @@ -92,255 +120,320 @@ public key cryptography. The message digest keys file is generated in a format compatible with NTPv3. All other files are in PEM-encoded printable ASCII format so they can be embedded as MIME attachments in mail to other sites. - -

      When used to generate message digest keys, the program produces a file +

      +

      When used to generate message digest keys, the program produces a file containing ten pseudo-random printable ASCII strings suitable for the -MD5 message digest algorithm included in the distribution. +MD5 message digest algorithm included in the distribution. If the OpenSSL library is installed, it produces an additional ten hex-encoded random bit strings suitable for the SHA1 and other message digest -algorithms. +algorithms. The message digest keys file must be distributed and stored -using secure means beyond the scope of NTP itself. +using secure means beyond the scope of NTP itself. Besides the keys used for ordinary NTP associations, additional keys can be defined as passwords for the ntpq and ntpdc utility programs. - -

      The remaining generated files are compatible with other OpenSSL -applications and other Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) resources. +

      +

      The remaining generated files are compatible with other OpenSSL +applications and other Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) resources. Certificates generated by this program are compatible with extant industry practice, although some users might find the interpretation of -X509v3 extension fields somewhat liberal. +X509v3 extension fields somewhat liberal. However, the identity keys are probably not compatible with anything other than Autokey. - -

      Some files used by this program are encrypted using a private password. +

      +

      Some files used by this program are encrypted using a private password. The -p option specifies the password for local encrypted files and the --q option the password for encrypted files sent to remote sites. +-q option the password for encrypted files sent to remote sites. If no password is specified, the host name returned by the Unix gethostname() function, normally the DNS name of the host, is used. - -

      The pw option of the crypto configuration command -specifies the read password for previously encrypted local files. -This must match the local password used by this program. -If not specified, the host name is used. +

      +

      The pw option of the crypto configuration command +specifies the read password for previously encrypted local files. +This must match the local password used by this program. +If not specified, the host name is used. Thus, if files are generated by this program without password, they can be read back by ntpd without password, but only on the same host. - -

      Normally, encrypted files for each host are generated by that host and +

      +

      Normally, encrypted files for each host are generated by that host and used only by that host, although exceptions exist as noted later on -this page. +this page. The symmetric keys file, normally called ntp.keys, is -usually installed in /etc. +usually installed in /etc. Other files and links are usually installed in /usr/local/etc, which is normally in a shared filesystem in -NFS-mounted networks and cannot be changed by shared clients. +NFS-mounted networks and cannot be changed by shared clients. The location of the keys directory can be changed by the keysdir -configuration command in such cases. +configuration command in such cases. Normally, this is in /etc. - -

      This program directs commentary and error messages to the standard +

      +

      This program directs commentary and error messages to the standard error stream stderr and remote files to the standard output stream stdout where they can be piped to other applications or redirected to -files. +files. The names used for generated files and links all begin with the string ntpkey and include the file type, generating host and filestamp, as described in the Cryptographic Data Files section below. - -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: Description, -Up: Top -
      +

      + + + + + +
      • Running the Program:   +
      • ntp-keygen Invocation:   +
      • Random Seed File:   +
      • Cryptographic Data Files:   +
      + +
      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: Top  

      - - -

      Running the Program

      + +

      1.1 Running the Program

      To test and gain experience with Autokey concepts, log in as root and -change to the keys directory, usually /usr/local/etc. +change to the keys directory, usually /usr/local/etc. When run for the first time, or if all files with names beginning ntpkey] have been removed, use the ntp-keygen command without arguments to generate a default RSA host key and matching RSA-MD5 certificate with expiration -date one year hence. +date one year hence. If run again without options, the program uses the existing keys and parameters and generates only a new certificate with new expiration date one year hence. - -

      Run the command on as many hosts as necessary. +

      +

      Run the command on as many hosts as necessary. Designate one of them as the trusted host (TH) using ntp-keygen with the -T option and configure -it to synchronize from reliable Internet servers. -Then configure the other hosts to synchronize to the TH directly or indirectly. +it to synchronize from reliable Internet servers. +Then configure the other hosts to synchronize to the TH directly or indirectly. A certificate trail is created when Autokey asks the immediately ascendant host towards the TH to sign its certificate, which is then -provided to the immediately descendant host on request. +provided to the immediately descendant host on request. All group hosts should have acyclic certificate trails ending on the TH. - -

      The host key is used to encrypt the cookie when required and so must be -RSA type. -By default, the host key is also the sign key used to encrypt signatures. +

      +

      The host key is used to encrypt the cookie when required and so must be +RSA type. +By default, the host key is also the sign key used to encrypt signatures. A different sign key can be assigned using the -S option -and this can be either RSA or DSA type. +and this can be either RSA or DSA type. By default, the signature message digest type is MD5, but any combination of sign key type and message digest type supported by the OpenSSL library can be specified using the -c option. - -

      The rules say cryptographic media should be generated with proventic +

      +

      The rules say cryptographic media should be generated with proventic filestamps, which means the host should already be synchronized before -this program is run. +this program is run. This of course creates a chicken-and-egg problem -when the host is started for the first time. +when the host is started for the first time. Accordingly, the host time should be set by some other means, such as eyeball-and-wristwatch, at -least so that the certificate lifetime is within the current year. +least so that the certificate lifetime is within the current year. After that and when the host is synchronized to a proventic source, the certificate should be re-generated. - -

      Additional information on trusted groups and identity schemes is on the +

      +

      Additional information on trusted groups and identity schemes is on the Autokey Public-Key Authentication page. - -

      -

      +

      +
      -
      +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: Description  

      + +

      1.2 Invoking ntp-keygen

      + + -

      Invoking ntp-keygen

      -

      -

      This program generates cryptographic data files used by the NTPv4 -authentication and identification schemes. +

      This program generates cryptographic data files used by the NTPv4 +authentication and identification schemes. It can generate message digest keys used in symmetric key cryptography and, if the OpenSSL software library has been installed, it can generate host keys, signing keys, certificates, and identity keys and parameters used in Autokey -public key cryptography. +public key cryptography. These files are used for cookie encryption, digital signature, and challenge/response identification algorithms compatible with the Internet standard security infrastructure. - -

      The message digest symmetric keys file is generated in a format -compatible with NTPv3. +

      +

      The message digest symmetric keys file is generated in a format +compatible with NTPv3. All other files are in PEM-encoded printable ASCII format, so they can be embedded as MIME attachments in email to other sites -and certificate authorities. +and certificate authorities. By default, files are not encrypted. - -

      When used to generate message digest symmetric keys, the program +

      +

      When used to generate message digest symmetric keys, the program produces a file containing ten pseudo-random printable ASCII strings suitable for the MD5 message digest algorithm included in the -distribution. +distribution. If the OpenSSL library is installed, it produces an additional ten hex-encoded random bit strings suitable for SHA1, AES-128-CMAC, and -other message digest algorithms. +other message digest algorithms. The message digest symmetric keys file must be distributed and stored -using secure means beyond the scope of NTP itself. +using secure means beyond the scope of NTP itself. Besides the keys used for ordinary NTP associations, additional keys can be defined as passwords for the ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) utility programs. - -

      The remaining generated files are compatible with other OpenSSL -applications and other Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) resources. +

      +

      The remaining generated files are compatible with other OpenSSL +applications and other Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) resources. Certificates generated by this program are compatible with extant industry practice, although some users might find the interpretation of -X509v3 extension fields somewhat liberal. +X509v3 extension fields somewhat liberal. However, the identity keys are probably not compatible with anything other than Autokey. - -

      Some files used by this program are encrypted using a private password. +

      +

      Some files used by this program are encrypted using a private password. The -p option specifies the read password for local encrypted files and the -q -option the write password for encrypted files sent to remote sites. +option the write password for encrypted files sent to remote sites. If no password is specified, the host name returned by the Unix hostname(1) command, normally the DNS name of the host, is used as the the default read -password, for convenience. +password, for convenience. The ntp-keygen program prompts for the password if it reads an encrypted file -and the password is missing or incorrect. +and the password is missing or incorrect. If an encrypted file is read successfully and no write password is specified, the read password is used as the write password by default. - -

      The +

      +

      The pw option of the crypto ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) configuration command specifies the read -password for previously encrypted local files. -This must match the local read password used by this program. -If not specified, the host name is used. +password for previously encrypted local files. +This must match the local read password used by this program. +If not specified, the host name is used. Thus, if files are generated by this program without an explicit password, they can be read back by ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) -without specifying an explicit password but only on the same host. +without specifying an explicit password but only on the same host. If the write password used for encryption is specified as the host name, these files can be read by that host with no explicit password. - -

      Normally, encrypted files for each host are generated by that host and +

      +

      Normally, encrypted files for each host are generated by that host and used only by that host, although exceptions exist as noted later on -this page. +this page. The symmetric keys file, normally called -ntp.keys, +ntp.keys, is usually installed in -/etc. +/etc. Other files and links are usually installed in -/usr/local/etc, +/usr/local/etc, which is normally in a shared filesystem in -NFS-mounted networks and cannot be changed by shared clients. +NFS-mounted networks and cannot be changed by shared clients. In these cases, NFS clients can specify the files in another directory such as -/etc +/etc using the keysdir ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) configuration file command. - -

      This program directs commentary and error messages to the standard +

      +

      This program directs commentary and error messages to the standard error stream -stderr +stderr and remote files to the standard output stream -stdout -where they can be piped to other applications or redirected to files. +stdout +where they can be piped to other applications or redirected to files. The names used for generated files and links all begin with the string -ntpkey* +ntpkey* and include the file type, generating host and filestamp, as described in the Cryptographic Data Files section below. - -

      Running the Program
      - +

      + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      • ntp-keygen usage:   +
      • ntp-keygen imbits:   +
      • ntp-keygen certificate:   +
      • ntp-keygen cipher:   +
      • ntp-keygen id-key:   +
      • ntp-keygen gq-params:   +
      • ntp-keygen host-key:   +
      • ntp-keygen iffkey:   +
      • ntp-keygen ident:   +
      • ntp-keygen lifetime:   +
      • ntp-keygen modulus:   +
      • ntp-keygen md5key:   +
      • ntp-keygen pvt-cert:   +
      • ntp-keygen password:   +
      • ntp-keygen export-passwd:   +
      • ntp-keygen subject-name:   +
      • ntp-keygen sign-key:   +
      • ntp-keygen trusted-cert:   +
      • ntp-keygen mv-params:   +
      • ntp-keygen mv-keys:   +
      • ntp-keygen config:   +
      • ntp-keygen exit status:   +
      • ntp-keygen Usage:   +
      • ntp-keygen Notes:   +
      • ntp-keygen Bugs:   +
      + + +

      1.2.1 Running the Program

      The safest way to run the ntp-keygen -program is logged in directly as root. +program is logged in directly as root. The recommended procedure is change to the keys directory, usually -/usr/local/etc, +/usr/local/etc, then run the program. - -

      To test and gain experience with Autokey concepts, log in as root and +

      +

      To test and gain experience with Autokey concepts, log in as root and change to the keys directory, usually -/usr/local/etc. +/usr/local/etc. When run for the first time, or if all files with names beginning with -ntpkey* +ntpkey* have been removed, use the ntp-keygen command without arguments to generate a default @@ -348,23 +441,23 @@ command without arguments to generate a default host key and matching RSA-MD5 certificate file with expiration date one year hence, -which is all that is necessary in many cases. +which is all that is necessary in many cases. The program also generates soft links from the generic names -to the respective files. +to the respective files. If run again without options, the program uses the existing keys and parameters and generates a new certificate file with new expiration date one year hence, and soft link. - -

      The host key is used to encrypt the cookie when required and so must be +

      +

      The host key is used to encrypt the cookie when required and so must be RSA -type. -By default, the host key is also the sign key used to encrypt signatures. +type. +By default, the host key is also the sign key used to encrypt signatures. When necessary, a different sign key can be specified and this can be either RSA or DSA -type. +type. By default, the message digest type is MD5, but any combination @@ -373,9 +466,9 @@ can be specified, including those using the AES128CMAC, MD2, MD5, MDC2, SHA, SHA1 and RIPE160 -message digest algorithms. +message digest algorithms. However, the scheme specified in the certificate must be compatible -with the sign key. +with the sign key. Certificates using any digest algorithm are compatible with RSA sign keys; @@ -386,96 +479,96 @@ and certificates are compatible with DSA sign keys. - -

      Private/public key files and certificates are compatible with -other OpenSSL applications and very likely other libraries as well. +

      +

      Private/public key files and certificates are compatible with +other OpenSSL applications and very likely other libraries as well. Certificates or certificate requests derived from them should be compatible with extant industry practice, although some users might find -the interpretation of X509v3 extension fields somewhat liberal. +the interpretation of X509v3 extension fields somewhat liberal. However, the identification parameter files, although encoded as the other files, are probably not compatible with anything other than Autokey. - -

      Running the program as other than root and using the Unix +

      +

      Running the program as other than root and using the Unix su(1) command to assume root may not work properly, since by default the OpenSSL library looks for the random seed file -.rnd -in the user home directory. +.rnd +in the user home directory. However, there should be only one -.rnd, +.rnd, most conveniently in the root directory, so it is convenient to define the .Ev RANDFILE environment variable used by the OpenSSL library as the path to -.rnd. - -

      Installing the keys as root might not work in NFS-mounted +.rnd. +

      +

      Installing the keys as root might not work in NFS-mounted shared file systems, as NFS clients may not be able to write -to the shared keys directory, even as root. +to the shared keys directory, even as root. In this case, NFS clients can specify the files in another directory such as -/etc +/etc using the keysdir ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) -configuration file command. +configuration file command. There is no need for one client to read the keys and certificates of other clients or servers, as these data are obtained automatically by the Autokey protocol. - -

      Ordinarily, cryptographic files are generated by the host that uses them, +

      +

      Ordinarily, cryptographic files are generated by the host that uses them, but it is possible for a trusted agent (TA) to generate these files -for other hosts; however, in such cases files should always be encrypted. +for other hosts; however, in such cases files should always be encrypted. The subject name and trusted name default to the hostname -of the host generating the files, but can be changed by command line options. +of the host generating the files, but can be changed by command line options. It is convenient to designate the owner name and trusted name -as the subject and issuer fields, respectively, of the certificate. +as the subject and issuer fields, respectively, of the certificate. The owner name is also used for the host and sign key files, while the trusted name is used for the identity files. - -

      All files are installed by default in the keys directory -/usr/local/etc, +

      +

      All files are installed by default in the keys directory +/usr/local/etc, which is normally in a shared filesystem -in NFS-mounted networks. +in NFS-mounted networks. The actual location of the keys directory and each file can be overridden by configuration commands, -but this is not recommended. +but this is not recommended. Normally, the files for each host are generated by that host and used only by that host, although exceptions exist as noted later on this page. - -

      Normally, files containing private values, +

      +

      Normally, files containing private values, including the host key, sign key and identification parameters, are permitted root read/write-only; -while others containing public values are permitted world readable. +while others containing public values are permitted world readable. Alternatively, files containing private values can be encrypted and these files permitted world readable, -which simplifies maintenance in shared file systems. +which simplifies maintenance in shared file systems. Since uniqueness is insured by the hostname and filestamp file name extensions, the files for an NTP server and dependent clients can all be installed in the same shared directory. - -

      The recommended practice is to keep the file name extensions +

      +

      The recommended practice is to keep the file name extensions when installing a file and to install a soft link from the generic names specified elsewhere on this page -to the generated files. +to the generated files. This allows new file generations to be activated simply -by changing the link. +by changing the link. If a link is present, ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) follows it to the file name to extract the -filestamp. +filestamp. If a link is not present, ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) extracts the filestamp -from the file itself. +from the file itself. This allows clients to verify that the file and generation times -are always current. +are always current. The ntp-keygen program uses the same @@ -483,31 +576,31 @@ program uses the same extension for all files generated at one time, so each generation is distinct and can be readily recognized in monitoring data. - -

      Run the command on as many hosts as necessary. +

      +

      Run the command on as many hosts as necessary. Designate one of them as the trusted host (TH) using ntp-keygen with the -T -option and configure it to synchronize from reliable Internet servers. +option and configure it to synchronize from reliable Internet servers. Then configure the other hosts to synchronize to the TH directly or -indirectly. +indirectly. A certificate trail is created when Autokey asks the immediately ascendant host towards the TH to sign its certificate, which is then -provided to the immediately descendant host on request. +provided to the immediately descendant host on request. All group hosts should have acyclic certificate trails ending on the TH. - -

      The host key is used to encrypt the cookie when required and so must be -RSA type. +

      +

      The host key is used to encrypt the cookie when required and so must be +RSA type. By default, the host key is also the sign key used to encrypt -signatures. +signatures. A different sign key can be assigned using the -S option and this can be either RSA or DSA -type. +type. By default, the signature message digest type is MD5, @@ -516,26 +609,26 @@ message digest type supported by the OpenSSL library can be specified using the -c option. - -

      The rules say cryptographic media should be generated with proventic +

      +

      The rules say cryptographic media should be generated with proventic filestamps, which means the host should already be synchronized before -this program is run. +this program is run. This of course creates a chicken-and-egg problem -when the host is started for the first time. +when the host is started for the first time. Accordingly, the host time should be set by some other means, such as eyeball-and-wristwatch, at -least so that the certificate lifetime is within the current year. +least so that the certificate lifetime is within the current year. After that and when the host is synchronized to a proventic source, the certificate should be re-generated. - -

      Additional information on trusted groups and identity schemes is on the -Autokey Public-Key Authentication +

      +

      Additional information on trusted groups and identity schemes is on the +“Autokey Public-Key Authentication” page. - -

      File names begin with the prefix -ntpkey_ +

      +

      File names begin with the prefix +ntpkey_ and end with the suffix -_hostname. filestamp, +_hostname. filestamp, where hostname is the owner name, usually the string returned @@ -543,27 +636,27 @@ by the Unix hostname(1) command, and filestamp -is the NTP seconds when the file was generated, in decimal digits. +is the NTP seconds when the file was generated, in decimal digits. This both guarantees uniqueness and simplifies maintenance procedures, since all files can be quickly removed by a -rm ntpkey* +rm ntpkey* command or all files generated at a specific time can be removed by a -rm *filestamp -command. +rm *filestamp +command. To further reduce the risk of misconfiguration, the first two lines of a file contain the file name and generation date and time as comments. - -

      Trusted Hosts and Groups
      - +

      + +

      1.2.1.1 Trusted Hosts and Groups

      Each cryptographic configuration involves selection of a signature scheme and identification scheme, called a cryptotype, as explained in the -Authentication Options +‘Authentication Options’ section of -ntp.conf(5). +ntp.conf(5). The default cryptotype uses RSA encryption, @@ -571,39 +664,39 @@ encryption, message digest and TC -identification. +identification. First, configure a NTP subnet including one or more low-stratum trusted hosts from which all other hosts derive synchronization -directly or indirectly. +directly or indirectly. Trusted hosts have trusted certificates; -all other hosts have nontrusted certificates. +all other hosts have nontrusted certificates. These hosts will automatically and dynamically build authoritative -certificate trails to one or more trusted hosts. +certificate trails to one or more trusted hosts. A trusted group is the set of all hosts that have, directly or indirectly, -a certificate trail ending at a trusted host. +a certificate trail ending at a trusted host. The trail is defined by static configuration file entries or dynamic means described on the -Automatic NTP Configuration Options +‘Automatic NTP Configuration Options’ section of ntp.conf(5). - -

      On each trusted host as root, change to the keys directory. +

      +

      On each trusted host as root, change to the keys directory. To insure a fresh fileset, remove all -ntpkey -files. +ntpkey +files. Then run ntp-keygen -T -to generate keys and a trusted certificate. +to generate keys and a trusted certificate. On all other hosts do the same, but leave off the -T -flag to generate keys and nontrusted certificates. +flag to generate keys and nontrusted certificates. When complete, start the NTP daemons beginning at the lowest stratum -and working up the tree. +and working up the tree. It may take some time for Autokey to instantiate the certificate trails throughout the subnet, but setting up the environment is completely automatic. - -

      If it is necessary to use a different sign key or different digest/signature +

      +

      If it is necessary to use a different sign key or different digest/signature scheme than the default, run ntp-keygen with the @@ -613,10 +706,10 @@ option, where is either RSA or -DSA. +DSA. The most frequent need to do this is when a DSA-signed -certificate is used. +certificate is used. If it is necessary to use a different certificate scheme than the default, run ntp-keygen @@ -624,83 +717,83 @@ with the -c scheme option and selected scheme -as needed. +as needed. If ntp-keygen is run again without these options, it generates a new certificate using the same scheme and sign key, and soft link. - -

      After setting up the environment it is advisable to update certificates -from time to time, if only to extend the validity interval. +

      +

      After setting up the environment it is advisable to update certificates +from time to time, if only to extend the validity interval. Simply run ntp-keygen with the same flags as before to generate new certificates -using existing keys, and soft links. +using existing keys, and soft links. However, if the host or sign key is changed, ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) -should be restarted. +should be restarted. When ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) -is restarted, it loads any new files and restarts the protocol. +is restarted, it loads any new files and restarts the protocol. Other dependent hosts will continue as usual until signatures are refreshed, at which time the protocol is restarted. - -

      Identity Schemes
      - +

      + +

      1.2.1.2 Identity Schemes

      As mentioned on the Autonomous Authentication page, the default TC -identity scheme is vulnerable to a middleman attack. +identity scheme is vulnerable to a middleman attack. However, there are more secure identity schemes available, including PC, IFF, GQ and MV -schemes described below. +schemes described below. These schemes are based on a TA, one or more trusted hosts -and some number of nontrusted hosts. +and some number of nontrusted hosts. Trusted hosts prove identity using values provided by the TA, while the remaining hosts prove identity using values provided -by a trusted host and certificate trails that end on that host. +by a trusted host and certificate trails that end on that host. The name of a trusted host is also the name of its sugroup -and also the subject and issuer name on its trusted certificate. +and also the subject and issuer name on its trusted certificate. The TA is not necessarily a trusted host in this sense, but often is. - -

      In some schemes there are separate keys for servers and clients. +

      +

      In some schemes there are separate keys for servers and clients. A server can also be a client of another server, -but a client can never be a server for another client. +but a client can never be a server for another client. In general, trusted hosts and nontrusted hosts that operate as both server and client have parameter files that contain -both server and client keys. +both server and client keys. Hosts that operate only as clients have key files that contain only client keys. - -

      The PC scheme supports only one trusted host in the group. +

      +

      The PC scheme supports only one trusted host in the group. On trusted host alice run ntp-keygen -P -p password to generate the host key file -ntpkey_ RSA key_alice. filestamp +ntpkey_ RSA key_alice. filestamp and trusted private certificate file -ntpkey_ RSA-MD5 _ cert_alice. filestamp, -and soft links. +ntpkey_ RSA-MD5 _ cert_alice. filestamp, +and soft links. Copy both files to all group hosts; -they replace the files which would be generated in other schemes. +they replace the files which would be generated in other schemes. On each host bob install a soft link from the generic name -ntpkey_host_bob +ntpkey_host_bob to the host key file and soft link -ntpkey_cert_bob -to the private certificate file. +ntpkey_cert_bob +to the private certificate file. Note the generic links are on bob, but point to files generated -by trusted host alice. +by trusted host alice. In this scheme it is not possible to refresh either the keys or certificates without copying them to all other hosts in the group, and recreating the soft links. - -

      For the +

      +

      For the IFF scheme proceed as in the TC @@ -708,42 +801,42 @@ scheme to generate keys and certificates for all group hosts, then for every trusted host in the group, generate the IFF -parameter file. +parameter file. On trusted host alice run ntp-keygen -T -I -p password to produce her parameter file -ntpkey_IFFpar_alice.filestamp, -which includes both server and client keys. +ntpkey_IFFpar_alice.filestamp, +which includes both server and client keys. Copy this file to all group hosts that operate as both servers and clients and install a soft link from the generic -ntpkey_iff_alice -to this file. +ntpkey_iff_alice +to this file. If there are no hosts restricted to operate only as clients, -there is nothing further to do. +there is nothing further to do. As the IFF scheme is independent of keys and certificates, these files can be refreshed as needed. - -

      If a rogue client has the parameter file, it could masquerade -as a legitimate server and present a middleman threat. +

      +

      If a rogue client has the parameter file, it could masquerade +as a legitimate server and present a middleman threat. To eliminate this threat, the client keys can be extracted -from the parameter file and distributed to all restricted clients. +from the parameter file and distributed to all restricted clients. After generating the parameter file, on alice run ntp-keygen -e -and pipe the output to a file or email program. -Copy or email this file to all restricted clients. +and pipe the output to a file or email program. +Copy or email this file to all restricted clients. On these clients install a soft link from the generic -ntpkey_iff_alice -to this file. +ntpkey_iff_alice +to this file. To further protect the integrity of the keys, each file can be encrypted with a secret password. - -

      For the +

      +

      For the GQ scheme proceed as in the TC @@ -751,40 +844,40 @@ scheme to generate keys and certificates for all group hosts, then for every trusted host in the group, generate the IFF -parameter file. +parameter file. On trusted host alice run ntp-keygen -T -G -p password to produce her parameter file -ntpkey_GQpar_alice.filestamp, -which includes both server and client keys. +ntpkey_GQpar_alice.filestamp, +which includes both server and client keys. Copy this file to all group hosts and install a soft link from the generic -ntpkey_gq_alice -to this file. +ntpkey_gq_alice +to this file. In addition, on each host bob install a soft link from generic -ntpkey_gq_bob -to this file. +ntpkey_gq_bob +to this file. As the GQ scheme updates the GQ parameters file and certificate at the same time, keys and certificates can be regenerated as needed. - -

      For the +

      +

      For the MV scheme, proceed as in the TC scheme to generate keys -and certificates for all group hosts. +and certificates for all group hosts. For illustration assume trish is the TA, alice one of several trusted hosts -and bob one of her clients. +and bob one of her clients. On TA trish run ntp-keygen -V n @@ -793,49 +886,52 @@ where n is the number of revokable keys (typically 5) to produce the parameter file -ntpkeys_MVpar_trish.filestamp +ntpkeys_MVpar_trish.filestamp and client key files -ntpkeys_MVkeyd _ trish. filestamp +ntpkeys_MVkeyd _ trish. filestamp where d is the key number (0 < d < -n). +n). Copy the parameter file to alice and install a soft link from the generic -ntpkey_mv_alice -to this file. +ntpkey_mv_alice +to this file. Copy one of the client key files to alice for later distribution -to her clients. +to her clients. It does not matter which client key file goes to alice, -since they all work the same way. -Alice copies the client key file to all of her clients. +since they all work the same way. +Alice copies the client key file to all of her clients. On client bob install a soft link from generic -ntpkey_mvkey_bob -to the client key file. +ntpkey_mvkey_bob +to the client key file. As the MV scheme is independent of keys and certificates, these files can be refreshed as needed. - -

      Command Line Options
      - -
      -
      -b --imbits= modulus
      Set the number of bits in the identity modulus for generating identity keys to +

      + +

      1.2.1.3 Command Line Options

      +
      +
      -b --imbits= modulus
      +

      Set the number of bits in the identity modulus for generating identity keys to modulus -bits. +bits. The number of bits in the identity modulus defaults to 256, but can be set to -values from 256 to 2048 (32 to 256 octets). +values from 256 to 2048 (32 to 256 octets). Use the larger moduli with caution, as this can consume considerable computing -resources and increases the size of authenticated packets. -

      -c --certificate= scheme
      Select certificate signature encryption/message digest scheme. +resources and increases the size of authenticated packets. +

      +
      -c --certificate= scheme
      +

      Select certificate signature encryption/message digest scheme. The scheme can be one of the following: RSA-MD2, RSA-MD5, RSA-MDC2, RSA-SHA, RSA-SHA1, RSA-RIPEMD160, DSA-SHA, or -DSA-SHA1. +DSA-SHA1. Note that RSA schemes must be used with an @@ -844,26 +940,34 @@ sign key and DSA schemes must be used with a DSA -sign key. +sign key. The default without this option is -RSA-MD5. +RSA-MD5. If compatibility with FIPS 140-2 is required, either the DSA-SHA or DSA-SHA1 -scheme must be used. -

      -C --cipher= cipher
      Select the OpenSSL cipher to encrypt the files containing private keys. +scheme must be used. +

      +
      -C --cipher= cipher
      +

      Select the OpenSSL cipher to encrypt the files containing private keys. The default without this option is three-key triple DES in CBC mode, -des-ede3-cbc. +des-ede3-cbc. The openssl -h -command provided with OpenSSL displays available ciphers. -

      -d --debug-level
      Increase debugging verbosity level. -This option displays the cryptographic data produced in eye-friendly billboards. -
      -D --set-debug-level= level
      Set the debugging verbosity to -level. -This option displays the cryptographic data produced in eye-friendly billboards. -
      -e --id-key
      Write the +command provided with OpenSSL displays available ciphers. +

      +
      -d --debug-level
      +

      Increase debugging verbosity level. +This option displays the cryptographic data produced in eye-friendly billboards. +

      +
      -D --set-debug-level= level
      +

      Set the debugging verbosity to +level. +This option displays the cryptographic data produced in eye-friendly billboards. +

      +
      -e --id-key
      +

      Write the IFF or GQ @@ -871,168 +975,197 @@ public parameters from the IFFkey or GQkey client keys file previously specified as unencrypted data to the standard output stream -stdout. -This is intended for automatic key distribution by email. -

      -G --gq-params
      Generate a new encrypted +stdout. +This is intended for automatic key distribution by email. +

      +
      -G --gq-params
      +

      Generate a new encrypted GQ -parameters and key file for the Guillou-Quisquater (GQ) identity scheme. +parameters and key file for the Guillou-Quisquater (GQ) identity scheme. This option is mutually exclusive with the -I and -V -options. -

      -H --host-key
      Generate a new encrypted +options. +

      +
      -H --host-key
      +

      Generate a new encrypted RSA -public/private host key file. -

      -I --iffkey
      Generate a new encrypted +public/private host key file. +

      +
      -I --iffkey
      +

      Generate a new encrypted IFF -key file for the Schnorr (IFF) identity scheme. +key file for the Schnorr (IFF) identity scheme. This option is mutually exclusive with the -G and Fl V -options. -

      -i --ident= group
      Set the optional Autokey group name to -group. +options. +

      +
      -i --ident= group
      +

      Set the optional Autokey group name to +group. This is used in the identity scheme parameter file names of IFF, GQ, and MV -client parameters files. -In that role, the default is the host name if no group is provided. +client parameters files. +In that role, the default is the host name if no group is provided. The group name, if specified using -i or -s following an -@ +‘@’ character, is also used in certificate subject and issuer names in the form host @ group and should match the group specified via crypto ident or server ident -in the ntpd configuration file. -

      -l --lifetime= days
      Set the lifetime for certificate expiration to -days. -The default lifetime is one year (365 days). -
      -m --modulus= bits
      Set the number of bits in the prime modulus for generating files to -bits. -The modulus defaults to 512, but can be set from 256 to 2048 (32 to 256 octets). +in the ntpd configuration file. +

      +
      -l --lifetime= days
      +

      Set the lifetime for certificate expiration to +days. +The default lifetime is one year (365 days). +

      +
      -m --modulus= bits
      +

      Set the number of bits in the prime modulus for generating files to +bits. +The modulus defaults to 512, but can be set from 256 to 2048 (32 to 256 octets). Use the larger moduli with caution, as this can consume considerable computing -resources and increases the size of authenticated packets. -

      -M --md5key
      Generate a new symmetric keys file containing 10 +resources and increases the size of authenticated packets. +

      +
      -M --md5key
      +

      Generate a new symmetric keys file containing 10 MD5 keys, and if OpenSSL is available, 10 SHA -keys. +keys. An MD5 key is a string of 20 random printable ASCII characters, while a SHA -key is a string of 40 random hex digits. -The file can be edited using a text editor to change the key type or key content. -This option is mutually exclusive with all other options. -

      -p --password= passwd
      Set the password for reading and writing encrypted files to -passwd. -These include the host, sign and identify key files. +key is a string of 40 random hex digits. +The file can be edited using a text editor to change the key type or key content. +This option is mutually exclusive with all other options. +

      +
      -p --password= passwd
      +

      Set the password for reading and writing encrypted files to +passwd. +These include the host, sign and identify key files. By default, the password is the string returned by the Unix hostname -command. -

      -P --pvt-cert
      Generate a new private certificate used by the +command. +

      +
      -P --pvt-cert
      +

      Generate a new private certificate used by the PC -identity scheme. -By default, the program generates public certificates. -Note: the PC identity scheme is not recommended for new installations. -

      -q --export-passwd= passwd
      Set the password for writing encrypted +identity scheme. +By default, the program generates public certificates. +Note: the PC identity scheme is not recommended for new installations. +

      +
      -q --export-passwd= passwd
      +

      Set the password for writing encrypted IFF, GQ and MV identity files redirected to -stdout +stdout to -passwd. +passwd. In effect, these files are decrypted with the -p password, then encrypted with the -q -password. +password. By default, the password is the string returned by the Unix hostname -command. -

      -s --subject-key= [host] [@ group]
      Specify the Autokey host name, where +command. +

      +
      -s --subject-key= [host] [@ group]
      +

      Specify the Autokey host name, where host is the optional host name and group -is the optional group name. +is the optional group name. The host name, and if provided, group name are used in host @ group -form as certificate subject and issuer. +form as certificate subject and issuer. Specifying -s -@ group is allowed, and results in leaving the host name unchanged, as with --i group. +-i group. The group name, or if no group is provided, the host name are also used in the file names of IFF, GQ, and MV -identity scheme client parameter files. +identity scheme client parameter files. If host is not specified, the default host name is the string returned by the Unix hostname -command. -

      -S --sign-key= [RSA | DSA]
      Generate a new encrypted public/private sign key file of the specified type. -By default, the sign key is the host key and has the same type. +command. +

      +
      -S --sign-key= [RSA | DSA]
      +

      Generate a new encrypted public/private sign key file of the specified type. +By default, the sign key is the host key and has the same type. If compatibility with FIPS 140-2 is required, the sign key type must be -DSA. -

      -T --trusted-cert
      Generate a trusted certificate. -By default, the program generates a non-trusted certificate. -
      -V --mv-params nkeys
      Generate +DSA. +

      +
      -T --trusted-cert
      +

      Generate a trusted certificate. +By default, the program generates a non-trusted certificate. +

      +
      -V --mv-params nkeys
      +

      Generate nkeys encrypted server keys and parameters for the Mu-Varadharajan (MV) -identity scheme. +identity scheme. This option is mutually exclusive with the -I and -G -options. -Note: support for this option should be considered a work in progress. +options. +Note: support for this option should be considered a work in progress. +

      -
      Random Seed File
      - + +

      1.2.1.4 Random Seed File

      All cryptographically sound key generation schemes must have means to randomize the entropy seed used to initialize the internal pseudo-random number generator used -by the library routines. -The OpenSSL library uses a designated random seed file for this purpose. +by the library routines. +The OpenSSL library uses a designated random seed file for this purpose. The file must be available when starting the NTP daemon and ntp-keygen -program. +program. If a site supports OpenSSL or its companion OpenSSH, it is very likely that means to do this are already available. - -

      It is important to understand that entropy must be evolved +

      +

      It is important to understand that entropy must be evolved for each generation, for otherwise the random number sequence -would be predictable. +would be predictable. Various means dependent on external events, such as keystroke intervals, -can be used to do this and some systems have built-in entropy sources. +can be used to do this and some systems have built-in entropy sources. Suitable means are described in the OpenSSL software documentation, but are outside the scope of this page. - -

      The entropy seed used by the OpenSSL library is contained in a file, +

      +

      The entropy seed used by the OpenSSL library is contained in a file, usually called -.rnd, +.rnd, which must be available when starting the NTP daemon or the ntp-keygen -program. +program. The NTP daemon will first look for the file using the path specified by the randfile subcommand of the crypto -configuration command. +configuration command. If not specified in this way, or when starting the ntp-keygen program, @@ -1040,77 +1173,76 @@ the OpenSSL library will look for the file using the path specified by the .Ev RANDFILE environment variable in the user home directory, -whether root or some other user. +whether root or some other user. If the .Ev RANDFILE environment variable is not present, the library will look for the -.rnd -file in the user home directory. +.rnd +file in the user home directory. Since both the ntp-keygen program and ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) daemon must run as root, the logical place to put this file is in -/.rnd +/.rnd or -/root/.rnd. +/root/.rnd. If the file is not available or cannot be written, the daemon exits with a message to the system log and the program exits with a suitable error message. - -

      Cryptographic Data Files
      - -

      All file formats begin with two nonencrypted lines. +

      + +

      1.2.1.5 Cryptographic Data Files

      +

      All file formats begin with two nonencrypted lines. The first line contains the file name, including the generated host name and filestamp, in the format -ntpkey_key _ name. filestamp, +ntpkey_key _ name. filestamp, where key is the key or parameter type, name is the host or group name and filestamp -is the filestamp (NTP seconds) when the file was created. +is the filestamp (NTP seconds) when the file was created. By convention, key names in generated file names include both upper and lower case characters, while key -names in generated link names include only lower case characters. -The filestamp is not used in generated link names. +names in generated link names include only lower case characters. +The filestamp is not used in generated link names. The second line contains the datestamp in conventional Unix -date -format. +date +format. Lines beginning with -# +‘#’ are considered comments and ignored by the ntp-keygen program and ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) daemon. - -

      The remainder of the file contains cryptographic data, encoded first using ASN.1 +

      +

      The remainder of the file contains cryptographic data, encoded first using ASN.1 rules, then encrypted if necessary, and finally written in PEM-encoded printable ASCII text, preceded and followed by MIME content identifier lines. - -

      The format of the symmetric keys file, ordinarily named -ntp.keys, -is somewhat different than the other files in the interest of backward compatibility. +

      +

      The format of the symmetric keys file, ordinarily named +ntp.keys, +is somewhat different than the other files in the interest of backward compatibility. Ordinarily, the file is generated by this program, but it can be constructed and edited using an ordinary text editor. -

      -# ntpkey_MD5key_bk.ntp.org.3595864945
+
      # ntpkey_MD5key_bk.ntp.org.3595864945
 # Thu Dec 12 19:22:25 2013
 
-1  MD5 L";Nw<\`.I<f4U0)247"i  # MD5 key
-2  MD5 &>l0%XXK9O'51VwV<xq~  # MD5 key
+1  MD5 L";Nw<\`.I<f4U0)247"i  # MD5 key
+2  MD5 &>l0%XXK9O'51VwV<xq~  # MD5 key
 3  MD5 lb4zLW~d^!K:]RsD'qb6  # MD5 key
 4  MD5 Yue:tL[+vR)M\`n~bY,'?  # MD5 key
 5  MD5 B;fx'Kgr/&4ZTbL6=RxA  # MD5 key
 6  MD5 4eYwa\`o@}3i@@@@V@@..R9!l  # MD5 key
 7  MD5 \`A.([h+;wTQ|xfi%Sn_!  # MD5 key
-8  MD5 45:V,r4]l6y^JH6"Sh?F  # MD5 key
+8  MD5 45:V,r4]l6y^JH6"Sh?F  # MD5 key
 9  MD5 3-5vcn*6l29DS?Xdsg)*  # MD5 key
 10 MD5 2late4Me              # MD5 key
 11 SHA1 a27872d3030a9025b8446c751b4551a7629af65c  # SHA1 key
@@ -1123,15 +1255,17 @@ and edited using an ordinary text editor.
 18 MDC2 a8d5e2315c025bf3a79174c87fbd10477de2eabc  # MDC2 key
 19 RIPEMD160 77ca332cafb30e3cafb174dcd5b80ded7ba9b3d2  # RIPEMD160 key
 20 AES128CMAC f92ff73eee86c1e7dc638d6489a04e4e555af878  # AES128CMAC key
-
      
-
           Figure 1. Typical Symmetric Key File
-
      
-  
      Figure 1 shows a typical symmetric keys file used by the reference
-implementation. 
+
      +
      Figure 1. Typical Symmetric Key File
+
      + +

      Figure 1 shows a typical symmetric keys file used by the reference +implementation. Following the header the keys are entered one per line in the format -

           keyno type key
-
      -

      where +

      +
      keyno type key
+
      +

      where keyno is a positive integer in the range 1-65535; type @@ -1151,18 +1285,18 @@ is the key itself, which is a printable ASCII string 20 characters or less in length: each character is chosen from the 93 printable characters in the range 0x21 through 0x7e ( -! +‘’! through -~ +‘~’ ) excluding space and the -# +‘#’ character, and terminated by whitespace or a -# -character. +‘#’ +character. An OpenSSL key consists of a hex-encoded ASCII string of 40 characters, which is truncated as necessary. - -

      Note that the keys used by the +

      +

      Note that the keys used by the ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) @@ -1170,21 +1304,21 @@ programs are checked against passwords requested by the programs and entered by hand, so it is generally appropriate to specify these keys in human readable ASCII format. - -

      The +

      +

      The ntp-keygen program generates a symmetric keys file -ntpkey_MD5key_hostname. filestamp. +ntpkey_MD5key_hostname. filestamp. Since the file contains private shared keys, it should be visible only to root and distributed by secure means -to other subnet hosts. +to other subnet hosts. The NTP daemon loads the file -ntp.keys, +ntp.keys, so ntp-keygen -installs a soft link from this name to the generated file. +installs a soft link from this name to the generated file. Subsequently, similar soft links must be installed by manual -or automated means on the other subnet hosts. +or automated means on the other subnet hosts. While this file is not used with the Autokey Version 2 protocol, it is needed to authenticate some remote configuration commands used by the @@ -1192,60 +1326,86 @@ used by the and ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) utilities. - -

      This section was generated by AutoGen, -using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntp-keygen program. +

      +

      This section was generated by AutoGen, +using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntp-keygen program. This software is released under the NTP license, <http://ntp.org/license>. - -

      - -
      -

      -Next: , -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      +

      + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      • ntp-keygen usage:  ntp-keygen help/usage (--help) +
      • ntp-keygen imbits:  imbits option (-b) +
      • ntp-keygen certificate:  certificate option (-c) +
      • ntp-keygen cipher:  cipher option (-C) +
      • ntp-keygen id-key:  id-key option (-e) +
      • ntp-keygen gq-params:  gq-params option (-G) +
      • ntp-keygen host-key:  host-key option (-H) +
      • ntp-keygen iffkey:  iffkey option (-I) +
      • ntp-keygen ident:  ident option (-i) +
      • ntp-keygen lifetime:  lifetime option (-l) +
      • ntp-keygen modulus:  modulus option (-m) +
      • ntp-keygen md5key:  md5key option (-M) +
      • ntp-keygen pvt-cert:  pvt-cert option (-P) +
      • ntp-keygen password:  password option (-p) +
      • ntp-keygen export-passwd:  export-passwd option (-q) +
      • ntp-keygen subject-name:  subject-name option (-s) +
      • ntp-keygen sign-key:  sign-key option (-S) +
      • ntp-keygen trusted-cert:  trusted-cert option (-T) +
      • ntp-keygen mv-params:  mv-params option (-V) +
      • ntp-keygen mv-keys:  mv-keys option (-v) +
      • ntp-keygen config:  presetting/configuring ntp-keygen +
      • ntp-keygen exit status:  exit status +
      • ntp-keygen Usage:  Usage +
      • ntp-keygen Notes:  Notes +
      • ntp-keygen Bugs:  Bugs +
      + +
      + +
      +

      +Next: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      ntp-keygen help/usage (--help)

      - -

      -This is the automatically generated usage text for ntp-keygen. - -

      The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option -(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print -the usage text by passing it through a pager program. + +

      1.2.2 ntp-keygen help/usage (--help)

      + + +

      This is the automatically generated usage text for ntp-keygen. +

      +

      The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option +(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print +the usage text by passing it through a pager program. more-help is disabled on platforms without a working fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is -used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit +used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit with a status code of 0. - -

      ntp-keygen (ntp) - Create a NTP host key - Ver. 4.2.8p11
+
      
+
      
+
      ntp-keygen (ntp) - Create a NTP host key - Ver. 4.2.8p12
 Usage:  ntp-keygen [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]...
   Flg Arg Option-Name    Description
    -b Num imbits         identity modulus bits
@@ -1293,680 +1453,679 @@ The following option preset mechanisms are supported:
  - examining environment variables named NTP_KEYGEN_*
 
 Please send bug reports to:  <http://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org>
-
      
-  
      
-
      
-Next: ,
-Previous: ntp-keygen usage,
-Up: ntp-keygen Invocation
-
      
-
      
-
-
      imbits option (-b)
      
-
-
      
-This is the “identity modulus bits” option. 
-This option takes a number argument imbits.
-
-
      This option has some usage constraints.  It:
-     
        
-
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. 
-
      
+
      -

      The number of bits in the identity modulus. The default is 256. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen imbits, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      +
      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      certificate option (-c)

      - -

      -This is the “certificate scheme” option. -This option takes a string argument scheme. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. -
      - -

      scheme is one of + +

      1.2.3 imbits option (-b)

      + + +

      This is the “identity modulus bits” option. +This option takes a number argument imbits. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +
      + +

      The number of bits in the identity modulus. The default is 256. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      +
      + +

      1.2.4 certificate option (-c)

      + + +

      This is the “certificate scheme” option. +This option takes a string argument scheme. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +
      + +

      scheme is one of RSA-MD2, RSA-MD5, RSA-MDC2, RSA-SHA, RSA-SHA1, RSA-RIPEMD160, DSA-SHA, or DSA-SHA1. - -

      Select the certificate signature encryption/message digest scheme. +

      +

      Select the certificate signature encryption/message digest scheme. Note that RSA schemes must be used with a RSA sign key and DSA schemes must be used with a DSA sign key. The default without -this option is RSA-MD5. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen certificate, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      +this option is RSA-MD5. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      cipher option (-C)

      - -

      -This is the “privatekey cipher” option. -This option takes a string argument cipher. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. -
      - -

      Select the cipher which is used to encrypt the files containing + +

      1.2.5 cipher option (-C)

      + + +

      This is the “privatekey cipher” option. +This option takes a string argument cipher. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +
      + +

      Select the cipher which is used to encrypt the files containing private keys. The default is three-key triple DES in CBC mode, -equivalent to "-C des-ede3-cbc". The openssl tool lists ciphers -available in "openssl -h" output. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen cipher, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      +equivalent to "-C des-ede3-cbc". The openssl tool lists ciphers +available in "openssl -h" output. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      id-key option (-e)

      - -

      -This is the “write iff or gq identity keys” option. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. -
      - -

      Write the public parameters from the IFF or GQ client keys to -the standard output. -This is intended for automatic key distribution by email. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen id-key, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      + +

      1.2.6 id-key option (-e)

      + + +

      This is the “write iff or gq identity keys” option. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +
      + +

      Write the public parameters from the IFF or GQ client keys to +the standard output. +This is intended for automatic key distribution by email. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      gq-params option (-G)

      - -

      -This is the “generate gq parameters and keys” option. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. -
      - -

      Generate parameters and keys for the GQ identification scheme, -obsoleting any that may exist. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen gq-params, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      + +

      1.2.7 gq-params option (-G)

      + + +

      This is the “generate gq parameters and keys” option. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +
      + +

      Generate parameters and keys for the GQ identification scheme, +obsoleting any that may exist. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      host-key option (-H)

      - -

      -This is the “generate rsa host key” option. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. -
      - -

      Generate new host keys, obsoleting any that may exist. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen host-key, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      + +

      1.2.8 host-key option (-H)

      + + +

      This is the “generate rsa host key” option. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +
      + +

      Generate new host keys, obsoleting any that may exist. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      iffkey option (-I)

      - -

      -This is the “generate iff parameters” option. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. -
      - -

      Generate parameters for the IFF identification scheme, obsoleting -any that may exist. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen iffkey, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      + +

      1.2.9 iffkey option (-I)

      + + +

      This is the “generate iff parameters” option. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +
      + +

      Generate parameters for the IFF identification scheme, obsoleting +any that may exist. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      ident option (-i)

      - -

      -This is the “set autokey group name” option. -This option takes a string argument group. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. -
      - -

      Set the optional Autokey group name to name. This is used in + +

      1.2.10 ident option (-i)

      + + +

      This is the “set autokey group name” option. +This option takes a string argument group. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +
      + +

      Set the optional Autokey group name to name. This is used in the file name of IFF, GQ, and MV client parameters files. In that role, the default is the host name if this option is not provided. The group name, if specified using -i/--ident or -using -s/--subject-name following an '@' character, +using -s/--subject-name following an ’@’ character, is also a part of the self-signed host certificate subject and issuer names in the form host@group and should match the -'crypto ident' or 'server ident' configuration in the -ntpd configuration file. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen ident, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      +’crypto ident’ or ’server ident’ configuration in the +ntpd configuration file. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      lifetime option (-l)

      - -

      -This is the “set certificate lifetime” option. -This option takes a number argument lifetime. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. -
      - -

      Set the certificate expiration to lifetime days from now. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen lifetime, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      + +

      1.2.11 lifetime option (-l)

      + + +

      This is the “set certificate lifetime” option. +This option takes a number argument lifetime. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +
      + +

      Set the certificate expiration to lifetime days from now. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      modulus option (-m)

      - -

      -This is the “prime modulus” option. -This option takes a number argument modulus. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. -
      - -

      The number of bits in the prime modulus. The default is 512. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen modulus, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      + +

      1.2.12 modulus option (-m)

      + + +

      This is the “prime modulus” option. +This option takes a number argument modulus. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +
      + +

      The number of bits in the prime modulus. The default is 512. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      md5key option (-M)

      - -

      -This is the “generate symmetric keys” option. -Generate symmetric keys, obsoleting any that may exist. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen md5key, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      + +

      1.2.13 md5key option (-M)

      + + +

      This is the “generate symmetric keys” option. +Generate symmetric keys, obsoleting any that may exist. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      pvt-cert option (-P)

      - -

      -This is the “generate pc private certificate” option. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. -
      - -

      Generate a private certificate. By default, the program generates -public certificates. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen pvt-cert, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      + +

      1.2.14 pvt-cert option (-P)

      + + +

      This is the “generate pc private certificate” option. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +
      + +

      Generate a private certificate. By default, the program generates +public certificates. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      password option (-p)

      - -

      -This is the “local private password” option. -This option takes a string argument passwd. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. -
      - -

      Local files containing private data are encrypted with the + +

      1.2.15 password option (-p)

      + + +

      This is the “local private password” option. +This option takes a string argument passwd. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +
      + +

      Local files containing private data are encrypted with the DES-CBC algorithm and the specified password. The same password -must be specified to the local ntpd via the "crypto pw password" +must be specified to the local ntpd via the "crypto pw password" configuration command. The default password is the local -hostname. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen password, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      +hostname. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      export-passwd option (-q)

      - -

      -This is the “export iff or gq group keys with password” option. -This option takes a string argument passwd. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. -
      - -

      Export IFF or GQ identity group keys to the standard output, -encrypted with the DES-CBC algorithm and the specified password. + +

      1.2.16 export-passwd option (-q)

      + + +

      This is the “export iff or gq group keys with password” option. +This option takes a string argument passwd. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +
      + +

      Export IFF or GQ identity group keys to the standard output, +encrypted with the DES-CBC algorithm and the specified password. The same password must be specified to the remote ntpd via the -"crypto pw password" configuration command. See also the option -–id-key (-e) for unencrypted exports. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen export-passwd, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      +"crypto pw password" configuration command. See also the option +–id-key (-e) for unencrypted exports. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      subject-name option (-s)

      - -

      -This is the “set host and optionally group name” option. -This option takes a string argument host@group. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. -
      - -

      Set the Autokey host name, and optionally, group name specified -following an '@' character. The host name is used in the file + +

      1.2.17 subject-name option (-s)

      + + +

      This is the “set host and optionally group name” option. +This option takes a string argument host@group. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +
      + +

      Set the Autokey host name, and optionally, group name specified +following an ’@’ character. The host name is used in the file name of generated host and signing certificates, without the group name. The host name, and if provided, group name are used in host@group form for the host certificate subject and issuer -fields. Specifying '-s @group' is allowed, and results in +fields. Specifying ’-s @group’ is allowed, and results in leaving the host name unchanged while appending @group to the subject and issuer fields, as with -i group. The group name, or if not provided, the host name are also used in the file names -of IFF, GQ, and MV client parameter files. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen subject-name, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      +of IFF, GQ, and MV client parameter files. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      sign-key option (-S)

      - -

      -This is the “generate sign key (rsa or dsa)” option. -This option takes a string argument sign. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. -
      - -

      Generate a new sign key of the designated type, obsoleting any + +

      1.2.18 sign-key option (-S)

      + + +

      This is the “generate sign key (rsa or dsa)” option. +This option takes a string argument sign. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +
      + +

      Generate a new sign key of the designated type, obsoleting any that may exist. By default, the program uses the host key as the -sign key. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen sign-key, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      +sign key. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      trusted-cert option (-T)

      - -

      -This is the “trusted certificate (tc scheme)” option. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. -
      - -

      Generate a trusted certificate. By default, the program generates -a non-trusted certificate. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen trusted-cert, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      + +

      1.2.19 trusted-cert option (-T)

      + + +

      This is the “trusted certificate (tc scheme)” option. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +
      + +

      Generate a trusted certificate. By default, the program generates +a non-trusted certificate. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      mv-params option (-V)

      - -

      -This is the “generate <num> mv parameters” option. -This option takes a number argument num. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. -
      - -

      Generate parameters and keys for the Mu-Varadharajan (MV) -identification scheme. -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen mv-params, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      + +

      1.2.20 mv-params option (-V)

      + + +

      This is the “generate <num> mv parameters” option. +This option takes a number argument num. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +
      + +

      Generate parameters and keys for the Mu-Varadharajan (MV) +identification scheme. +

      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      mv-keys option (-v)

      - -

      -This is the “update <num> mv keys” option. -This option takes a number argument num. - -

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. -
      - -

      This option has no doc documentation. - -

      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen mv-keys, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      + +

      1.2.21 mv-keys option (-v)

      + + +

      This is the “update <num> mv keys” option. +This option takes a number argument num. +

      +

      This option has some usage constraints. It: +

        +
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +
      + +

      This option has no ‘doc’ documentation. +

      + +
      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      presetting/configuring ntp-keygen

      + +

      1.2.22 presetting/configuring ntp-keygen

      Any option that is not marked as not presettable may be preset by -loading values from configuration ("rc" or "ini") files, and values from environment variables named NTP-KEYGEN and NTP-KEYGEN_<OPTION_NAME>. <OPTION_NAME> must be one of -the options listed above in upper case and segmented with underscores. +loading values from configuration ("rc" or "ini") files, and values from environment variables named NTP-KEYGEN and NTP-KEYGEN_<OPTION_NAME>. <OPTION_NAME> must be one of +the options listed above in upper case and segmented with underscores. The NTP-KEYGEN variable will be tokenized and parsed like the command line. The remaining variables are tested for existence and their values are treated like option arguments. - -

      libopts will search in 2 places for configuration files: -

        -
      • $HOME -
      • $PWD -
      - The environment variables HOME, and PWD -are expanded and replaced when ntp-keygen runs. -For any of these that are plain files, they are simply processed. -For any that are directories, then a file named .ntprc is searched for +

      + +

      libopts will search in 2 places for configuration files: +

        +
      • $HOME +
      • $PWD +
      +

      The environment variables HOME, and PWD +are expanded and replaced when ntp-keygen runs. +For any of these that are plain files, they are simply processed. +For any that are directories, then a file named .ntprc is searched for within that directory and processed. - -

      Configuration files may be in a wide variety of formats. +

      +

      Configuration files may be in a wide variety of formats. The basic format is an option name followed by a value (argument) on the same line. Values may be separated from the option name with a colon, equal sign or simply white space. Values may be continued across multiple lines by escaping the newline with a backslash. - -

      Multiple programs may also share the same initialization file. +

      +

      Multiple programs may also share the same initialization file. Common options are collected at the top, followed by program specific segments. The segments are separated by lines like: -

          [NTP-KEYGEN]
-
      -

      or by -

          <?program ntp-keygen>
-
      -

      Do not mix these styles within one configuration file. - -

      Compound values and carefully constructed string values may also be +

      +
      [NTP-KEYGEN]
+
      +

      or by +

      +
      <?program ntp-keygen>
+
      +

      Do not mix these styles within one configuration file. +

      +

      Compound values and carefully constructed string values may also be specified using XML syntax: -

          <option-name>
-       <sub-opt>...&lt;...&gt;...</sub-opt>
-    </option-name>
-
      -

      yielding an option-name.sub-opt string value of -

          "...<...>..."
-
      -

      AutoOpts does not track suboptions. You simply note that it is a +

      +
      <option-name>
+   <sub-opt>...&lt;...&gt;...</sub-opt>
+</option-name>
+
      +

      yielding an option-name.sub-opt string value of +

      +
      "...<...>..."
+
      +

      AutoOpts does not track suboptions. You simply note that it is a hierarchicly valued option. AutoOpts does provide a means for searching the associated name/value pair list (see: optionFindValue). - -

      The command line options relating to configuration and/or usage help are: - -

      version (-)
      +

      +

      The command line options relating to configuration and/or usage help are: +

      + +

      version (-)

      Print the program version to standard out, optionally with licensing information, then exit 0. The optional argument specifies how much licensing -detail to provide. The default is to print just the version. The licensing infomation may be selected with an option argument. +detail to provide. The default is to print just the version. The licensing infomation may be selected with an option argument. Only the first letter of the argument is examined: - -

      -
      version
      Only print the version. This is the default. -
      copyright
      Name the copyright usage licensing terms. -
      verbose
      Print the full copyright usage licensing terms. +

      +
      +
      ‘version’
      +

      Only print the version. This is the default. +

      +
      ‘copyright’
      +

      Name the copyright usage licensing terms. +

      +
      ‘verbose’
      +

      Print the full copyright usage licensing terms. +

      -
      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen config, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      +
      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      ntp-keygen exit status

      + +

      1.2.23 ntp-keygen exit status

      One of the following exit values will be returned: -

      -
      0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)
      Successful program execution. -
      1 (EXIT_FAILURE)
      The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid. -
      66 (EX_NOINPUT)
      A specified configuration file could not be loaded. -
      70 (EX_SOFTWARE)
      libopts had an internal operational error. Please report -it to autogen-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. +

      +
      ‘0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)’
      +

      Successful program execution. +

      +
      ‘1 (EXIT_FAILURE)’
      +

      The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid. +

      +
      ‘66 (EX_NOINPUT)’
      +

      A specified configuration file could not be loaded. +

      +
      ‘70 (EX_SOFTWARE)’
      +

      libopts had an internal operational error. Please report +it to autogen-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. +

      -
      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen exit status, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      +
      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      ntp-keygen Usage

      - -
      -

      -Next: , -Previous: ntp-keygen Usage, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      + +

      1.2.24 ntp-keygen Usage

      +
      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      ntp-keygen Notes

      - -
      -

      -Previous: ntp-keygen Notes, -Up: ntp-keygen Invocation -
      + +

      1.2.25 ntp-keygen Notes

      +
      + +
      +

      +Previous: , Up: ntp-keygen Invocation  

      - -

      ntp-keygen Bugs

      - -
      -

      -Next: , -Previous: Running the Program, -Up: Top -
      + +

      1.2.26 ntp-keygen Bugs

      + +
      + +
      +

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: Top  

      - - -

      Random Seed File

      + +

      1.3 Random Seed File

      All cryptographically sound key generation schemes must have means to randomize the entropy seed used to initialize the internal -pseudo-random number generator used by the OpenSSL library routines. +pseudo-random number generator used by the OpenSSL library routines. If a site supports ssh, it is very likely that means to do this are -already available. +already available. The entropy seed used by the OpenSSL library is contained in a file, usually called .rnd, which must be available when starting the ntp-keygen program or ntpd daemon. - -

      The OpenSSL library looks for the file using the path specified by the +

      +

      The OpenSSL library looks for the file using the path specified by the RANDFILE environment variable in the user home directory, whether root -or some other user. +or some other user. If the RANDFILE environment variable is not present, the library looks for the .rnd file in the user home -directory. +directory. Since both the ntp-keygen program and ntpd daemon must run as root, the logical place to put this file is in /.rnd or -/root/.rnd. +/root/.rnd. If the file is not available or cannot be written, the program exits with a message to the system log. - -

      -

      -Previous: Random Seed File, -Up: Top -
      +

      +
      + +
      +

      +Previous: , Up: Top  

      - - -

      Cryptographic Data Files

      + +

      1.4 Cryptographic Data Files

      File and link names are in the form ntpkey_key_name.fstamp, where key is the key or parameter type, name is the host or group name and -fstamp is the filestamp (NTP seconds) when the file was created). +fstamp is the filestamp (NTP seconds) when the file was created). By convention, key names in generated file names include both upper and lower case characters, while key names in generated link names include only lower case characters. The filestamp is not used in generated link names. - -

      The key name is a string defining the cryptographic key type. +

      +

      The key name is a string defining the cryptographic key type. Key types include public/private keys host and sign, certificate cert -and several challenge/response key types. +and several challenge/response key types. By convention, client files used for challenges have a par subtype, as in the IFF challenge IFFpar, while server files for responses have a key subtype, as in the GQ response GQkey. - -

      All files begin with two nonencrypted lines. The first line contains -the file name in the format ntpkey_key_host.fstamp. -The second line contains the datestamp in conventional Unix date format. +

      +

      All files begin with two nonencrypted lines. The first line contains +the file name in the format ntpkey_key_host.fstamp. +The second line contains the datestamp in conventional Unix date format. Lines beginning with # are ignored. - -

      The remainder of the file contains cryptographic data encoded first +

      +

      The remainder of the file contains cryptographic data encoded first using ASN.1 rules, then encrypted using the DES-CBC algorithm with given password and finally written in PEM-encoded printable ASCII text preceded and followed by MIME content identifier lines. - -

      The format of the symmetric keys file, ordinarily named ntp.keys, +

      +

      The format of the symmetric keys file, ordinarily named ntp.keys, is somewhat different than the other files in the interest of backward -compatibility. +compatibility. Ordinarily, the file is generated by this program, but it can be constructed and edited using an ordinary text editor. - -

          # ntpkey_MD5key_hms.local.3564038757
-    # Sun Dec  9 02:45:57 2012
-    
-     1 MD5 "]!ghT%O;3)WJ,/Nc:>I  # MD5 key
-     2 MD5 lu+H^tF46BKR-6~pV_5  # MD5 key
-     3 MD5 :lnoVsE%Yz*avh%EtNC  # MD5 key
-     4 MD5 |fdZrf0sF~^V  # MD5 key
-     5 MD5 IyAG>O"y"LmCRS!*bHC  # MD5 key
-     6 MD5 ">e\A  # MD5 key
-     7 MD5 c9x=M'CfLxax9v)PV-si  # MD5 key
-     8 MD5 E|=jvFVov?Bn|Ev=&aK\  # MD5 key
-     9 MD5 T!c4UT&`(m$+m+B6,`Q0  # MD5 key
-    10 MD5 JVF/1=)=IFbHbJQz..Cd  # MD5 key
-    11 SHA1 6dea311109529e436c2b4fccae9bc753c16d1b48  # SHA1 key
-    12 SHA1 7076f373d86c4848c59ff8046e49cb7d614ec394  # SHA1 key
-    13 SHA1 5f48b1b60591eb01b7cf1d33b7774f08d20262d3  # SHA1 key
-    14 SHA1 eed5ab9d9497319ec60cf3781d52607e76720178  # SHA1 key
-    15 SHA1 f283562611a04c964da8126296f5f8e58c3f85de  # SHA1 key
-    16 SHA1 1930da171297dd63549af50b29449de17dcf341f  # SHA1 key
-    17 SHA1 fee892110358cd4382322b889869e750db8e8a8f  # SHA1 key
-    18 SHA1 b5520c9fadd7ad3fd8bfa061c8821b65d029bb37  # SHA1 key
-    19 SHA1 8c74fb440ec80f453ec6aaa62b9baed0ab723b92  # SHA1 key
-    20 SHA1 6bc05f734306a189326000970c19b3910f403795  # SHA1 key
-
      -

      Figure 1. Typical Symmetric Key File - -

      Figure 1 shows a typical symmetric keys file used by the reference -implementation. +

      +
      +
      # ntpkey_MD5key_hms.local.3564038757
+# Sun Dec  9 02:45:57 2012
+
+ 1 MD5 "]!ghT%O;3)WJ,/Nc:>I  # MD5 key
+ 2 MD5 lu+H^tF46BKR-6~pV_5  # MD5 key
+ 3 MD5 :lnoVsE%Yz*avh%EtNC  # MD5 key
+ 4 MD5 |fdZrf0sF~;w-i^V  # MD5 key
+ 5 MD5 IyAG>O"y"LmCRS!*bHC  # MD5 key
+ 6 MD5 ">e\A>hT/661ri52,,H  # MD5 key
+ 7 MD5 c9x=M'CfLxax9v)PV-si  # MD5 key
+ 8 MD5 E|=jvFVov?Bn|Ev=&aK\  # MD5 key
+ 9 MD5 T!c4UT&`(m$+m+B6,`Q0  # MD5 key
+10 MD5 JVF/1=)=IFbHbJQz..Cd  # MD5 key
+11 SHA1 6dea311109529e436c2b4fccae9bc753c16d1b48  # SHA1 key
+12 SHA1 7076f373d86c4848c59ff8046e49cb7d614ec394  # SHA1 key
+13 SHA1 5f48b1b60591eb01b7cf1d33b7774f08d20262d3  # SHA1 key
+14 SHA1 eed5ab9d9497319ec60cf3781d52607e76720178  # SHA1 key
+15 SHA1 f283562611a04c964da8126296f5f8e58c3f85de  # SHA1 key
+16 SHA1 1930da171297dd63549af50b29449de17dcf341f  # SHA1 key
+17 SHA1 fee892110358cd4382322b889869e750db8e8a8f  # SHA1 key
+18 SHA1 b5520c9fadd7ad3fd8bfa061c8821b65d029bb37  # SHA1 key
+19 SHA1 8c74fb440ec80f453ec6aaa62b9baed0ab723b92  # SHA1 key
+20 SHA1 6bc05f734306a189326000970c19b3910f403795  # SHA1 key
+
      + +

      Figure 1. Typical Symmetric Key File +

      +

      Figure 1 shows a typical symmetric keys file used by the reference +implementation. Each line of the file contains three fields, first an integer between 1 and 65535, inclusive, representing the key identifier -used in the server and peer configuration commands. +used in the server and peer configuration commands. Next is the key type for the message digest algorithm, which in the absence of the OpenSSL library must be MD5 to designate the MD5 message digest -algorithm. +algorithm. If the OpenSSL library is installed, the key type can be any -message digest algorithm supported by that library. +message digest algorithm supported by that library. However, if compatibility with FIPS 140-2 is required, the key type must be either -SHA or SHA1. +SHA or SHA1. The key type can be changed using an ASCII text editor. - -

      An MD5 key consists of a printable ASCII string less than or equal to -16 characters and terminated by whitespace or a # character. +

      +

      An MD5 key consists of a printable ASCII string less than or equal to +16 characters and terminated by whitespace or a # character. An OpenSSL key consists of a hex-encoded ASCII string of 40 characters, which is truncated as necessary. - -

      Note that the keys used by the ntpq and ntpdc programs are +

      +

      Note that the keys used by the ntpq and ntpdc programs are checked against passwords requested by the programs and entered by hand, so it is generally appropriate to specify these keys in human readable ASCII format. - -

      The ntp-keygen program generates a MD5 symmetric keys file -ntpkey_MD5key_hostname.filestamp. +

      +

      The ntp-keygen program generates a MD5 symmetric keys file +ntpkey_MD5key_hostname.filestamp. Since the file contains private shared keys, it should be visible only to root and distributed by -secure means to other subnet hosts. +secure means to other subnet hosts. The NTP daemon loads the file ntp.keys, so ntp-keygen -installs a soft link from this name to the generated file. +installs a soft link from this name to the generated file. Subsequently, similar soft links must be installed by -manual or automated means on the other subnet hosts. +manual or automated means on the other subnet hosts. While this file is not used with the Autokey Version 2 protocol, it is needed to authenticate some remote configuration commands used by the ntpq and ntpdc utilities. +

      + - + + diff --git a/util/ntp-keygen.man.in b/util/ntp-keygen.man.in index f4eee2f26..13c71eac4 100644 --- a/util/ntp-keygen.man.in +++ b/util/ntp-keygen.man.in @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH ntp-keygen @NTP_KEYGEN_MS@ "14 Aug 2018" "ntp (4.2.8p12)" "User Commands" +.TH ntp-keygen @NTP_KEYGEN_MS@ "20 Feb 2019" "ntp (4.2.8p13)" "User Commands" .\" -.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (/tmp/.ag-VYaG.G/ag-7Yay9G) +.\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:30:31 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:14 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 .\" From the definitions ntp-keygen-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME diff --git a/util/ntp-keygen.mdoc.in b/util/ntp-keygen.mdoc.in index 5c0d952d3..a2fcedffb 100644 --- a/util/ntp-keygen.mdoc.in +++ b/util/ntp-keygen.mdoc.in @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd August 14 2018 +.Dd February 20 2019 .Dt NTP_KEYGEN @NTP_KEYGEN_MS@ User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntp-keygen-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed August 14, 2018 at 08:30:38 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed February 20, 2019 at 09:57:11 AM by AutoGen 5.18.5 .\" From the definitions ntp-keygen-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME